Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 2015-R0148 - Contract - Pharr & Company - Renovations To Senior Citizens Center - 05_14_2015Resolution No. 2015-Rn 35 R0148 Item No. 5.15 May 14. 2015 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT City of Lubbock Bid No. RFP 15-12208-MA/Contract No. 12208 is awarded to Pharr & Company of Lubbock, Texas, for renovations to the Senior Citizens Center, and further THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock is authorized and directed to execute, for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a contract for said activities with Pharr & Company, consistent with the terms of the bid submittal attached hereto and incorporated herein, in a t-orm acceptable to the City Attorney, and related documents. Passed by the City Council on May 14, 2015 GLL�N C. R06ERTSON, MAYOR ATTEST: R b ea Garza, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Mark Yv,-arwodkl, Assistant City Manager ,1 APPROVED AS TO FO John C.,Ora�e Assist,atit Ci // 71 /,f S:lcirya \CCDOCSaES.Contract-Pharr and Company 4.1.doc BOND CHECK BEST RATING LICENSED IN TEXAS DATE BY: CONTRACT AWARD DATE: MAY 14, 2015 CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR Renovations to the Senior Citizens Center RFP 15-12208-MA CONTRACT 12208 PROJECT NUMBER: 92323.8304.10000 an I S-'�o City of Lubbock TE%AS CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas 0 Page Intentionally Left Blank. PHARC-1 OP ID: SG A CI ;,'R®- ;.�,= CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) 05121I2015 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER Boley Featherston Insurance Steve Burleson CONTNAMEACT Steve Burleson _ PHONE FAX A/C No EXA ___ _ (A/C, No): E-MAIL ADDRESS: INSURERS) AFFORDING COVERAGE _ NAIC n ® ® _ INSURER A: BITCO General Insurance Corp �20095 INSURED Pharr Construction Company Inc i DBA Pharr &Company P O Box 2791 _ INSURER B : Texas Mutual Ins Co 45 INSURER C: America First Insurance Co — — — Lubbock, TX 79408-2791 wsuRER D : INSURER E INSURER F : i COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR ADDL§IJ�RT LTR i TYPE OF INSURANCE I POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF POLICY EXP i MM/DDIYYYY MM/DD/YYYY I LIMITS A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY T i EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,00 J CLAIMS -MADE OCCUR jCLP3607408B I DANIA 07131/2014 i 07/31/2015 i PREMISES E. occurrence) $ PREMISES 100,00 EXP (Any one person) $_ 5,00 —_ f PERSONAL _& ADV INJURY $ 1,000,00 2,000,00 GENT AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: E PRO- GENERAL AGGREGATE — POLICY X JECT- i� LOC PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,00 OTHER: (�— $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY I COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ (Ea accident) 1,000,000 A X ANY AUTO 07/31/2014 1 07/31 /2015 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ iCAP3607409B ALL OWNED — SCHEDULED { i AUTOS AUTOS I BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ NON -OWNED HIRED AUTOS !AUTOS PROPERTY DAMAGE $ (Per accident) �� _ X UMBRELLA LIAR X OCCUR j Y j EACH OCCURRENCE $ 3,000,00 A EXCESS CLAIMS -MADE, 'CUP2806051B 1 07/31/2014' 07,31/2015 ff AG—GREGATE _I $ 3,000,00 DED X RETENTION $ 10000!. j $ WORKERS COMPENSATION SAND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY TIN PER i OTH- � X STATUTE I I ER I B IANYPROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE I TSF0001108071 I OFFICER/MEMBER N N / A 07/3112014107/31/2015� E.L. EACH ACCIDENT is 1,000,00 EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) 4 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE 1,000,00 If yes, describe under I DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below I ! E.L DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,00 C Builders Risk I s IM8963067 08/01/2014! 08/01/2015 'SEE NOTE I*REPORTING FORM* j I j C aPAD 1 i DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) LUBBC01 CITY OF LUBBOCK P O BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TX 79408-2000 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ©1988-2014 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25 (2014101) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD � ��-,a- • � ram- -• �� -, �� �-� This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: It is agreed that the provisions listed below apply only upon the entry of an QX in the box next to the cation of such provision. A F-X] Partnership and Joint Venture Extension R 7X Construction Project General Aggregate limits B. FX Contractors Autommatic Additional Insured Coverage - Ongoing Operations C. OX Automatic Waiver of Subrogation D. F-X1 Extended Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal E. OX Unintentional Failure to Disclose Hazards F. FX Broadened Mobile Equipment G. FX Personal and Advertising Injury - Contractual Coverage H. FX Nonemployment Discrimination 1. F-X] Liquor Liability J. 0 Broadened Conditions K F-X] Automatic Additional Insureds - Equipment Leases L FX Insured Contract Extension - Railroad Property and Construction Contracts M. FX Turnkey Jobs - Coverage For Alienated Premises O. F7X Fellow Employee Coverage P. ED Property Damage Liability - Elevators Q. FX-] Property Damage to the Named Insureds Work R Ffl Care, Custody or Control S. 7X Concrete PeAuk Labor Reirnbursement Coverage T. 7X Last Key Coverage U. F Electronic Data Liability Coverage V. FX Consolidated Insurance Program Residual Liability Coverage W F-X-] Automatic Additional Insureds- Managers or Lessors of Premises X Q Automatic Additional Insureds - State or Governmental Agency or Pditical Subdivisions - Permits or Authorizations Y. FX Contractors Automatic Additional Insured Coverage -Completed Operations Z. FX Additional Insured- Engineers, Architects or Surveyors The following provision is added to SECTION II - N-10 IS AN IVSLF ED. The last full paragraph which reads as follows: No person or organization is an insured with respect to the conduct of any current or past partnership, joint venture or limited liability con7pany that is riot shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations. GL-3084 (09'11) -1- is deleted and replaced with the following: With respect to the conduct of any past or present joint venture or partnership not shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations and of Mich you are or me a partner or member, you are an insured, but only with respect to liability arising out of "your work" on behalf of any partnership or joint venture not shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations, provided no other similar liability insurance is available to you for "yo it work" in connection with your interest in such partnership or joint venture. SECTION II — WHO IS AN INS is amended to include as an additional insured any person or organization who is required by written contract to be an additional insured on your policy, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury', "properly damage" or "personal and advertising injury' caused, in Mole or in part, by: 1. Your ads or omissions; or 2 The acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf; in the performance of your ongoing operations for the additional insured(s) at the project(s) designated in the written contract. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the following additional exclusions apply. This insurance does not applyto'bodily injury' or "property damage" occurring after: 1. All work, including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work, on the project (other than service, maintenance or repairs) to be performed by or on behalf of the additional insureds) at the location of the covered operations has been completed; or 2 That potion of "your work" out of Mich the injury or damage arises has been put to its intended use by any person or organization other than another oontrador or subcontractor engaged in performing operations for a principal as a part of the same project. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s) Mich designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be noncontributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. G AUTCMMT IC WAND OF SUBROGA11ON Item S, of SBMXW IV - COIM030AL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS, is deleted and replaced with the following: & Transfer of Rights of Recovery Against Odds to Us and Au WrnaUc VMver of Subrogation. a. If the insured has rights to recover all or part of any payment we have made under this Coverage Form, those rights are transferred to us. The insured must do nothing after loss to impair those rights. At our request, the insured will bring "scat" or transfer those rights to us and help us enforce them b. If required by a written contract executed prior to loss, we waive any right of reoovery we may have against any person or organization because of payments we make for iryury or damage arising out of "your work" for that person or organization. Ci,3484 (09111) -2- Item Alb, of the COM ION POLICY CONDITIONS , is deleted and replaced with the following: Alb. 60 days before the effective date of the cancellation if we cancel for any other reason. Rem 9. of SECTION IV - CONUERCIAL GEN31AL LIABILITY CONDITIONS, is deleted and replaced with the following: 9. V*JEN VIE DO NOT FLEW a. If we choose to nonrenew this policy, we will mail or deliver to the first Named Insured shown in the Declarations written notice of the nonreneved not less than 60 days before the expiration date. b. If we do not give notice of our intent to nonrenewas prescribed in a. above, it is agreed that you may extend the period of this policy for a maximum additional sixty(60) days from its scheduled expiration date. Where not otherwise prohibited by law, the existing terms, conditions and rates will remain in effect during that extension period. It is further agreed that so long as it is not otherwise prohibited by law, this one time sixty day extension is the sole remedy and liquidated damages available to the insured as a result of our failure to give the notice as prescribed in 9. a. above. Although we relied on your representations as to existing and past hazards, if unintentionally you should fail to disclose all such hazards at the inception date of your policy, we will not deny coverage under this Coverage Form because of such failure. Item 12b. of SECTION V - DEFIWnONS , is deleted and replaced with the following: 12b. Vehicles maintained for use solely on or next to prerrises, sites or locations you own, rent or occupy. 5=:�.-•.► : e ► � � ��l�al.`. ►. .a �•.u'� is%Tilt _ t.•��=: e.r It NONBUPLOYIVENT DISMPANATION Unless "personal and advertising injury" is excluded from this policy. Item 14, of SECTION V - DEFaM10NS , is amended to include: "Personal and advertising irury' also means embarrassment or humiliation, mental or emotional distress, physical illness, physical impairment, loss of corning rapacity or monetary loss, which is caused by "discrimination." SECTION V - DEFINTIONS , is amended to include: "Discriminaticd' means the unlawful treatment of individuals based on race, odor, ethnic origin, age, gender or religion. GUT84 (09'11) -3- Item 2. Exclusions of SECTION I, COVERAGE B , is amended to include: "Personal and advertising injury' arising out of "d scri mi nation" directly or indirectly related to the past employment, employment or prospective employment of any person or class of persons by any insured. "Personal and advertising ir�ury" arising out of "cscr rrination" by or at your, your agents or your "employees" direction or with your, your agents or your "employees" knowledge or consent. "Personal and advertising inury' arising out of "clisc imination" directly or indirectly related to the sale, rental, lease or sub -lease or prospective sale, rental, lease or subs -lease of any dwelling, permanent lodging or premises by or at the direction of any insured. Rnes, penalties, specific performance or injunctions levied or imposed by a governmental entity, or governmental code, law, or statute because of "discrimination." I. LICUM LIABILITY Exclusion U. of SEC K)N I, COVERAGE , is deleted. Items 2.a. and 2b. of SECTION IV - CONNEAMAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS, are deleted and replaced with the following: 2- Duties in The Event Of Occurrence, Offense, Claim Or Suit: a. You must see to it that we are notified of an "occurrence" or an offense which may result in a claim as soon as practicable after the "ocwrrenoe" has been reported to you, one of your officers or an "employee" designated to give notice to us. Notice should induce: (1) How, when and where the "oocrrenoe" or offense took place; (2) The names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses; and (3) The nature and location of any injury or damage arising out of the "occurrence" or offense. b. If a claim is made or "suit" is brought against any insured, you must: (1) Record the specifics of the claim or "suit' and the date received as soon as you, one of your officers, or an "employee" designated to record such information is notified of it; and (2) No* us in writing as soon as practicable after you, one of your officers, your legal department or an "employee" you designate to give us such notice learns of the claims or "suit." Item Za is added to SECTION IV - COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COt\DMCNS Za ff you report an "ocarrenoe" to your workers compensation insurer Mich develops into a liability claim for which coverage is provided by the Coverage Form, failure to report such "occurrenoe" to us at the time of "oocurrenoe" shall not be deemed in violation of paragraphs 2.a., 2.b, and 2.c. However, you shall give written notice of this "oocrrenoe" to us as soon as you are made aware of the fact that this "occurrence" may be a liability claim rather than a workers compensation claim SECTION II - V* 0 IS AN INSIIRED is amended to include any person or organization with whom you agree in a written equipment lease or rental agreement to name as an adchonal insured with respect to liability for "boclily injury' "property darrrage" or "personal and advertising injury' caused, at least in part, by GL,3084 (09/11) 4 your maintenance, operation, or use by you of the equipment leased to you by such person or organization, subject to the following additional exclusions. The insurance provided to the additional insured does not apply to: 1. "Bodily injury' or "property damage" occurring after you cease leasing the equipment. 2 "Bodily injury' or "property damage" arising out of the sole negligence of the additional insured. 3. "Property damage" to: a Property owned, used or occupied by or rented to the additional insured; or b. Property in the care, custody or control of the additional insured or over which the additional insured is for any purpose exercising physical control. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s) which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be nor-Foontributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. Item 9. of SECTION V - DEFINITIONS , is deleted and replaced with the following. 9. "Insured Contract" means: a. A contract for a lease of premises. However, that portion of the contract for a lease of premises that indernifies any person or organization for damage by fire to premises while rented to you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of the owner is not an "insured contract'; b. A sidetrack agreernt; a Any easement or license agreement; d An obligation, as required by ordinance, to indemnify a municipality, except in connection with work for a municipality; e. An elevator maintenance agreement; f. That part of any other contract or agreement pertaining to your business (including an indemnification of a municipality in connection with work perfomned for a municipality) under Mich you assurre the tort liability of another party to pay for "bodily injury" or "property damage" to a third person or organization. Tort liability roans a liability that world be imposed by law in the absence of any contract or agreement. Paragraph f. does not include that part of any contract or agreement: (1) That indemnifies an architect, engineer or surveyor for injuryor damage arising out of: (a) Preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, repots, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; or (b) Giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the iI ury or damage; or GL 3054 (09/11) -5- (2) Under which the insured, if an architect, engineer or surveyor, assumes liability for an injury or damage arising out of the insureds rendering or failure to render professional services, inducting those listed in (1) above and supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. It is agreed that: Exclusion 2.j.(2) of SECTION I, COVERAGE A, does not apply if the premises are'your work" and were not occupied, rented or held for rental by you for more than 12 months after completion. This modifies SECTION III- UNM OF INSURANCE . A For all sums which can be attributed only to ongoing operations at a single construction project for Wiich the insured becomes legally obligated to pay as damages caused by an "oocurrenoe" under SECTION I - COVERAGE A, and for all medical expenses caused by accidents under SECTION I - COVERA(E C : 1. A separate Construction Project General Aggregate Limit applies to each construction project, and that limit is equal to the amount of the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations. 2. The Construction Project General Aggregate Limit is the most we will pay for the sum of all damages under COVERAGE A, except damages because of "bodily injury or "property damage" included in the "products -completed operations hazard," and for medical expenses under COVERAGE C regardless of the number of: a. Insureds; b. claims made or "suits" brought; or c. Persons or organizations making claims or bringing "suits." 3. Any payments made under COVERAGE A for damages or under COVERAGE C for medical expenses shall reduce the Construction Project General Aggregate Limit for that construction project. Such payments shall not reduce the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations nor shall they reduce any other Construction Prgect General Aggregate Limit for any other construction prgect. 4. The limits shown in the Declarations for Each Occurrence, Fire Damage and Medical Expense continue to apply. However, instead of being subject to the General Aggregate Unit shown in the Declarations, such limits Wit be subject to the applicable Construction Project General Aggregate Limit. B. For all sums which cannot be attributed only to ongoing operations at a single construction project for which the insured becomes legally obligated to pay as damages caused by an "occurrenoe" under SECTION! I - COVERAGE A, and for all medical expenses caused by accidents under SECTION I - COVERAGE C : 1. Any payments made under COVERAGE A for damages or under COVERAGE C for medical expenses shall reduce the amount available under the General Aggregate Limit or the Products - Completed Operations Aggregate Urnit, whichaver is applicable; and 2. Such payments shall not reduce any Construction Prqect General Aggregate Limit. Gt-,3084 (09/11) $- G Payments for damages because of "bodily injury" or "property darriage" included in the "products - completed operations hazard" will reduce the Products-Corrpleted Operations Aggregate Limit, and not reduce the General Aggregate Lin -it nor the Construction Project General Aggregate Limit. Q If a construction project has been abandoned, delayed, or abandoned and then restarted, or if the authorized contracting parties deviate from plans, blueprints, designs, specifications or timetables, the project will still be deemed to be the same construction project. E. The provisions of SECTION III - LIMI'M OF INSURANCE not otherwise modified by this endorsement shall continue to be applicable. Exdusion Za Employers Liability of SECTION I, COVE A, is deleted and replaced with the following: Ze. 'Bodily injury'to (1) An "employee" of the insured arising out of and in the course of: (a) BTiployment by the insured; or (b) Performing duties related to the conduct of the insured's business; or (2) The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of that "employee" as a consequence of paragraph (1) above. This exclusion applies: (1) Whether the insured may be liable as an errployer or in any other capacity, and (2) To any obligation to share damages with or repay someone else who mist pay damages because of the ir9 ury. This exclusion does not apply to: (1) Liability assumed by the insured under an "insured contract'; or (2) Liability arising from any action or omission of a co -"employee" Mile that co -"employee" is either in the course of his or her employment or performing duties related to the conduct of your business. Item 2.a(1Xa) of SECTION II - VM IS AN INSUIF ED , is deleted and replaced with the following: 2.a.(1)(a) To you, to your partners or members (if you are a partnership or joint venture) or to your members (K you are a limited liability company), or to your "volunteer workers" Mile performing duties related to the conduct of your business. "Property damage" Liability is d ianged as follows: 1. Exdusions 2.j.(3) and Z.J.(4) of SECTION I, COVERAGE A , do rat apply to the use of elevators. 2 The insurance afforded by reason of this provision is excess over any valid and collectible property insurance (including any deductible portion thereof available to the insured whather primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, and the OTHER INSURANCE condition is changed accordingly. Ci-3064 (09'11) -7- Exclusion I of SECTION I, COVERAGE A- is deleted and replaced with the following: Damage to Your Warlk "Property damage" to "your work" arising out of it or any part of it and included in the "products completed operation hazard." This exclusion applies only to that portion of any loss in excess of $50,000 per occurrence if the damaged work and the work out of which the damage arises was performed by you. This exclusion does not apply if the damaged work or the work out of which the damage arises was performed an your behalf by a subcontractor. Exclusion 2jA of SECTION I, COVERAGE A is deleted and replaced with the following: 2jA Personal property in the care, custody or control of the insured. I-bwever, for personal property in the care, custody or control of you or your "employees," this exclusion applies only to that portion of any loss in excess of $25,000 per occurrence, subject to the following tenor and conditions; (a) The most that we will pay under this provision as an annual aggregate is $100,000, regardless of the number of occurrences. (b) This provision does not apply to "employee" awned property or any property that is missing Mere there is not physical evidenoe to show what happened to the property. (c) The aggregate limit for this coverage provision is part of the General Aggregate Limit and SECTION III - LIMPS OF INSURANCE is changed accordingly. (d) In the event of damage to or destruction of property covered by this exception, you shall, if requested by us, replace the property or furnish the labor and materials necessary for repairs thereto, at actual cost to you, exclusive of prospective pmrt or averhead charges of any nature. (e) $2,500 shall be deducted from the total amount of all sums you became obligated to pay as damages on account of damage to or destruction of all property of each person or organization, inducing the loss of use of that property, as a result of each "occurrence." Our limit of liability under the endorsement as being applicable to each "occurrence" shall be reduced by the amount of the deductible indicated above; however, our aggregate lirrit of liability under this provision shall riot be reduced by the amount of such deductible. The conditions of the policy, including those with respect to duties in the event of "occurrence," claims or "suit" apply irrespective of the application of the deductible amount. We may pay any part or all of the deductible amount to effect settlement of any claim or "suif and, upon notification of the action taken, you shall promptly reimburse us for such part of the deductible amount as has been paid by us. As it applies to this coverage, SECTION I - COVERAGE A is amended as follows: 1. Insuring Agreement, is deleted and replaced by the following: We will reimburse you for your direct labor expense associated with your "concrete raAark" which vcas performed by you during the policy period due to the original "oxaete producr' failing to meet contractual specifications as ordered for the job or accepted industry standards for its specific a,-IM4 (09/11) -& intended use, verified by testing by an ASTM (American Society of Testing & Materials) accredited independent testing agency. 2 Exclusions, is deleted and replaced by the follovung: The insurance provided by this endorsement does not apply to: a "Cosmetic Defects" b. Loss of use a Changes to the "concrete product' contractual specifications not acknowledged by the named insured in writing prior to the beginning of the job d. "loss" arising from the "subsidence" of land a "Loss" arising from vork performed on your behalf by a subcontractor, except for the supply of the "concrete product" f. Cost of materials used in the installation of the "concrete product' or "concrete revaork' g. Damages or "loss" that is covered by a Property or Inland Marine coverage form for your financial interest in your project and structures h. "Loss" unless the "concrete rework" is completed within one year from the completion of the original "concrete product' installation performed by you L "Loss" caused by the failure to order the "concrete product' as required: a In the contractual specifications; or b. By accepted industry standards for its specific intended use j. "Loss" expected or intended from the standpoint of the insured k. "Concrete product' supplied by you SEMM III - UMTS OF INSURANCE is amended to include the following: 1. The Umits of Insurance as shown and the rules below fix the most we will pay regardess of the number of a Insureds covered under this insurance; b. "Concrete rework' projects to which this insurance applies. "Concrete Rework" Project Limit $50,000 "Concrete Rework' Policy Aggregate Limits $50,000 "Concrete Rework' Deductible $ 1,000 2 The "Concrete Rework' Project Lirrit shown above is the most we will reimburse you for your direct labor expense arising out of any single "concrete remk" project. 3. Subject to 2 above, the "Concrete Rework" Policy Aggregate Limit shown above is the most we will reimburse you for your direct labor expenses for the sum of all "concrete rework" projects. G-,M (09/11) -9- 4. The "Concrete Rework' Project Lint and the "Concrete Rewrk" Policy Aggregate Limits shall be included within and not be in addition to the General Aggregate Limit or the Products -Completed Operations Aggregate Limit (whichever applies), as stated in the declarations and as described in SECTION III - UMTS OF INSURANCE . 5. Our obligation to reimburse you applies only to the amount of your direct labor expense in excess of the "Concrete Rework" DaWible stated above. This deductible shall apply separately to each "concrete remark" project. The Limits of Insurance of this coverage apply separately to each consecutive annual period and to any remaining period of less than 12 months, starting with either the beginning of the policy period shown in the Declarations, or the effective date of the endorsement, whichever is less. If the policy period is extended after issuance for an additional period of less than 12 months the additional period will be deemed part of the preceding period for purposes of determining the Limits of Insurance. hem 2. Duties in The Event Of Occurrence, Offense, Claim Or Si.rit is deleted and replaced by the following: 2. Duties in The Event Of Occurrence, Offense, Claim Or Sift a You mast see to it that we are notified prior to completing the "concrete raAW which may result in labor reimbursement. Notice should include: (1) How, when and where the incident took place; (2) The names and addresses of any witnesses, and (3) The estimated labor expense for the "concrete remrk" b. You mast promptly take all steps to minimize the expenses involved. a You must cooperate with us and upon request, assist in enforcing any right of contribution or indemnity against any person or organization. d. You must provide us with proof of loss and any other required documyents within 60 days of our request. You mast also permit us to examine and copy any of your books and records at any reasonable time. You, your "ernployees" and your agents mist, if we require you to, submit to examination under oath at such times as may be required, and sign a copy of the examination. a No insureds will, except at their own cost, assume any obligation, or incur any expense without our consent. SECTION V - DEFINMONS is arr ended to add the following: "Concrete rework' means the alteration, repair, removal or replacement of a "concrete product" "Concrete product' means any product you directly install consisting of concrete, cement, sand, mortar mix or related materials "Cosmetic defects" Trans a superficial or surface defect that does not affect the structural integrity of the "concrete product" "Loss" means your direct labor expanse associated with a "concrete rework' project "Subsidence" means earth movement, including but not limited to: EL Landslide; CU90B4 (09/11) -10- b. Mud flow, c. Earth sinking; d. Earth rising; e. Collapse or movement of fill; f. Improper compaction; g. Earth settling, slipping, falling away, caving in, eroding, tilting or shifting; h. Earthquake; or I. Any other movement of land or earth. T. LOST KEY COVERAGE As it applies to this coverage, SECTION I, COVERAGE A, is amended to include as follows: VIA will pay those sum, subject to the limits of liability and deductible stated herein, that you become legally obligated to pay as damages due to the loss or mysterious disappearance of keys entrusted to or in the care, custody or control of you or your "employees" or anyone aging on your behalf. The damages covered by this endorsement are limited to the: 1. Actual cost of the keys; 2 Cost to adiust locks to accept new keys; or 3. Cost of new locks, if required, including the cost of installation. Item 2 Exclusions of SECTION I, COVERAGE A , is amended to include the following: 1. Keys owned by any insured, employees of any insured, or anyone acting on behalf of any insured. 2 Any resulting loss of use from the loss or mysterious disappearance of keys; or 3. Any of the following acts by any insured, employees of any insured, or anyone acting on behalf of any insureds: a Misappropriation; Ix Concealment; d. Fraud; or a Dishonesty Exclusions 2j.(3) and 2j.(4) of SECTION I, SAGE A do not apply to Lost Key Coverage. SECTION III - UNTTS OF INSURANCE is amended to include the following: 1. The Last Key Coverage Occurrence Limit shown below is the most we will pay for each occurrence for damages for Lost Key Coverage provided in this endorsement. Ci-3084 (09/11) 2 The Lost Key Coverage Policy Aggregate Limit shown below is the most we will pay for all occurrences covered by this erxbrsemant during the policy period. Lost Key Coverage Occurrence Limit $50,000 Last Key Coverage Policy Aggregate Unit $50,000 Last Key Coverage Deductible $ 1,000 3. The Lost Key Coverage Policy Aggregate Limit shall be included within and not be in addition to the General Aggregate Limit or the Products -Completed Operations Aggregate Unit (Michever applies), as stated in the declarations and as described in SECTION III - UMrTS OF INSURANCE . Cur obligation under this coverage to pay damages on your behalf applies only to the amount of damages in excess of the Lost Key Coverage Deductible stated above. The deductible applies on an "oocurren d' basis. We may pay any part or all of the deductible amount to effect settlement of any claim or "suit" and, upon notification of the action taken, you shall promptly reimburse us for such part of the deductible amount as has been paid by us. U. ELECTRONIC DATA LIABILITY OOVERAGE 1. Exdusion 2p. Elechuiic Data of SECTION I, CAVERAGE A, is deleted and replaced with the following: 2p. Damages arising out of the loss of, loss of use of, damage to, corruption of, inability to access, or inability to manipulate "electronic data" that does not result from physical injury to tangible property. 2 The following definition is added to SECTION V— DEFINITIONS: " Dectronic data" means information, facts or programs stored as or on, created or used on, or transmitted to or from computer software (including systems and applications softvere), hard or floppy disks, CD•RCIVIS, tapes, drives, cells, data processing devices or any other media which are used with electronically controlled equipment. 3. For the purposes of this coverage, the definition of "property damage" in SECTION V — DEFINIMONS is replaced bythefollowing: a Physical injury to tangible property, including all resulting loss of use of that property. All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the physical i jury that caused it; b. Loss of use of tangible property that is not physically inured. All such loss of use shall be deerned to occur at the time of the "omirrenoe" that caused it; or a Loss of, loss of use of, damage to, corruption of, inability to access, or inability to property manipulate "electronic data", resulting from physical ijury to tangible property. All such lass of "electronic data" shall be deemed to occur at the time of the "oocurrence" that caused ft. For the purposes of this insurance, "electronic data" is not tangible property. er• �:• �. �� ..� -. t -err-. -�:.�� � �: err :-•r Wth respect to ' bodly iryury' "property damage", or 'personal and advertising injury' arising out of your ongoing operations; or operations included within the "products -completed operations hazard', the policy to GL (0911) -12- Mich this coverage is attached shall apply as excess insurance over coverage available to "you" under a Consolidated Insurance Program (such as an Griner Controlled Insurance Program or Contractors Controlled Insurance Program). Coverage afforded by this endorsement does not apply to any Consolidated Insurance Program involving a "residential project" or any deductible or insured retention, specified in the Consolidated Insurance Program The following is added to Section V — Definitions "Residential project" means any project where 30% or more of the total square foot area of the structures on the project is used or is intended to be used for human residency. This includes but is not limited to single or multifamily housing, apartments, condominiums, townhouses, co-operatives or planned unit developments and appurtenant structures (including pods, hot tubs, detached garages, guest houses or any similar structures). A `residential project" does not include military owned housing, oollegeluniversity owned housing or dormitories, long term care facilities, hotels, motels, hospitals or prisons. Al other terms, provisions, exclusions and limitations of this policy apply. Any person or organizations with whom you agree in a written contract or written agreemant to name as an additional insured but only with respect to liability arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of that part of the premises, designated in the written contract or written agreement, that is leased to you and subject to the following additional exclusions: This insurance does not apply to: 1. Any' occurrence" which takes place after you cease to be a tenant in that premises. 2 Structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by or on behalf of the addrtional insured listed in the written contract or written agreement. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s) which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be non-contributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. SECTK)N II — VM IS AN III is amended to include any state or governmental agency or subdvision or political subdivision with whom you are required by written contract, ordinance, law or building code to name as an additional insured subject to the following provisions: This insurance applies only with respect to operations performed by you or on your behalf for which the state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision has issued a permit or authorization. This insurance does not apply to: a "Bodily ir>jury' "property damagd' or "personal and advertising injury' arising out of operations performed for the federal government, state or municipality; or b. 'Bodily injury, or "property damage" induded within the'products-completed operations hazard'. GUT84 (09/11) -13- This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s) which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be nor}oontributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. SECTION II — VMO IS AN INSlFIED is amended to include as an additional insured any person or organization who is required by written contract to be an additional insured on your policy for completed operations, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury' or "property damage" caused, in whole or in part, by "your work" at the project designated in the oontrad, performed for that additional insured and included in the "products -completed operations hazard". This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured, whether prinery, excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be primary relative to insurance policy(s) which designate the additional insured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be nor --contributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. SECTION II — VIA-1O IS AN INSIFIED is amended to include as an additional insured any architect, engineer or surveyor who is required by written contract to be an additional insured on your policy, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury' caused, in whole or in part, by: Your acts or omissions; or 2 The ads or omissions of those ailing on your behalf; in the performance of your ongoing operations performed by you or on your behalf. This includes such architect, engineer or surveyor, who may not be engaged by you, but is contractually required to be added as an additional insured to your policy. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the following additional exclusion applies: This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury" "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury' arising out of the rendering of or the failure to render any professional services, including: 1. The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve neaps, drawings, opinions, repots, surveys, change orders, designs or specifications; or 2 Supervisory, inspection or enjneering services. This insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, unless the written contract requires this insurance to be primary. In that event, this insurance will be printery relative to insurance policy(s) which designate the additional inured as a Named Insured in the Declarations and we will not require contribution from such insurance if the written contract also requires that this insurance be non-contributory. But with respect to all other insurance under which the additional insured qualifies as an insured or additional insured, this insurance will be excess. CL-3084 (09/11) -14- POLICY NUMBER: CAP 3 607 409 COMMERCIAL AUTO CA20481013 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. DESIGNATED INSURED FOR COVERED AUTOS LIABILITY COVERAGE This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: AUTO DEALERS COVERAGE FORM BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM MOTOR CARRIER COVERAGE FORM With respect to coverage provided by this endorsement, the provisions of the Coverage Form apply unless modified by this endorsement. This endorsement identifies person(s) or organization(s) who are "Insureds" for Covered Autos Liability Coverage under the Who Is An Insured provision of the Coverage Form. This endorsement does not alter coverage provided in the Coverage Form. This endorsement changes the policy effective on the inception date of the policy unless another date is indicated below. Named Insured: Endorsement Effective Date: SCHEDULE Name Of Person(s) Or Organizativn(s): Any person or organization for whom the named insured has agreed by written "insured contract" to designate as an additional insured subject to all the provisions and limitations of this policy. I Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. I Each person or organization shown in the Schedule is an "insured" for Covered Autos Liability Coverage, but only to the extent that person or organization qualifies as an "Insured" under the Who Is An Insured provision contained in Paragraph A.I. of Section II - Covered Autos Liability Coverage in the Business Auto and Motor Carrier Coverage Forms and Paragraph D.2. of Section - Covered Autos Coverages of the Auto Dealers Coverage Form. CA 20 48 10 13 0 Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2011 Page 1 of 1 POLICY NUMBER: CAP 3 607 409 COMMERCIAL AUTO CA04441013 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US (WAIVER OF SUBROGATION) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: AUTO DEALERS COVERAGE FORM BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM MOTOR CARRIER COVERAGE FORM With respect to coverage provided by this endorsement, the provisions of the Coverage Form apply unless modified by the endorsement. This endorsement changes the policy effective on the inception date of the policy unless another date is indicated below. Named Insured: Endorsement Effective Date: SCHEDULE Name(s) Of Person(s) Or Organization(s): "Any person or organization for whom the named insured is operating under written contract when such contract requires a waiver of subrogation." Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. The Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us condition does not apply to the person(s) or organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only to the extent that subrogation is waived prior to the "accident' or the "loss" under a contract with that person or organization. CA 04 44 10 13 0 Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2011 Page 1 of 1 ® WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY INSURANCE POLICY Insurance WC420304A TEXAS WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in Item 3.A. of the Information Page. We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule, but this waiver applies only with respect to bodily injury arising out of the operations described in the Schedule where you are required by a written contract to obtain this waiver from us. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. The premium for this endorsement is shown in the Schedule. Schedule 1. ( ) Specific Waiver Name of person or organization ( X ) Blanket Waiver Any person or organization for whom the Named Insured has agreed by written contract to furnish this waiver. 2. Operations: ALL TEXAS OPERATIONS 3. Premium The premium charge for this endorsement shall be 2.00 percent of the premium developed on payroll in connection with work performed for the above person(s) or organization(s) arising out of the operations described. 4. Advance Premium INCLUDED, SEE INFORMATION PAGE. This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following "attaching clause" need be completed only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) This endorsement, effective on at 12:01 A.M. standard time, forms a part of Policy No. TSF-0001108071 20140731 of the Texas Mutual Insurance Company Issued to PHARR CONSTRUCTION COMPANY INC DBA: PHARR & COMPANY Endorsement No. Premium $ 141tv-s '/�, Authorized Representative WC420304A (ED. 1-01-2000) AGENT'S COPY QUSER 7-21-2014 ADDENDUM(S) 1&2 Paae Intenflonally Left Blank I I N ADDENDUM 2 RFP 15-12208-MA Renovations to the Senior Citizens Center DATE ISSUED: March 30, 2015 DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION OF PROPOSALS: April 1, 2015 at 3:00 P.M., CST The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Request for Proposals. Where any item called for in the RFP documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. Please be advised of the following: Addendum No. 2 is attached. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: City of Lubbock Marta Alvarez, Director of Purchasing & Contract Management P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to (806)775-2164 or Emailed to malvarez(a?mylubbock.us THANK YOU, mtom 1WAZWy Director of Purchasing & Contract Management It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the Offeror's responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Director of Purchasing & Contract Management if any language, requirements. etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this UP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Director of Purchasing & Contract Management no later than five (5) business days prior to the bid close date. A review of such notifications will be made. PROJECT: Senior Citizens Center for City of Lubbock PROJECT NO: 898-14A LOCATION: 2001 19'' Street Lubbock, Texas ARCHITECT: Cox/Dirks, Architects, PC 1710 15th Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 Telephone (806)762-1226 Fax (806) 762-1257 DATA: March 26, 2015 All bidders are asked to note the following changes, additions, omissions, and/or corrections to the original bidding documents. Instructions issued in this Addendum are a part of the contract, and bidders are asked to adjust their proposal accordingly. Please acknowledge all Addenda on your proposal: ITEM 41 GENERAL Refer to the attached "Phase Construction Outline" for clarification and additional information relating to the phasing of this project. ITEM #2 SHEET D 1. DEMOLITION PLAN Replace the entire Sheet D1.0 with the revised Sheet D1.0, dated 03/24/15. Revision to Sheet D1.0 include: a.) Revised phasing to coordinate with Sheet A1.0 and attached `Phase Construction Outline'. b.) Revision to Sheet Note No. 21. c.) Notes to salvage an existing sink in Kitchen 120 for reinstallation into new millwork. d.) Notes to remove the existing concrete slab, as required, to install a new floor drain and connect to existing services. ITEM #3 SHEET ALO: FLOOR PLAN & SHEET A4.1: KITCHEN 120. ELEV.08 Reinstall salvaged sink, trap, faucet and all miscellaneous plumbing, removed during demolition, into new millwork. Reference attached `Partial Floor Plan A101', and `Rev. Kitchen 120 A101'. ITEM #4 SHEET A1.0: FLOOR PLAN & SHEET M2: FLOOR PLAN — MECHANICAL Install a new floor drain in Storage 135. Tie new floor drain to the existing line serving the existing floor drain in Storage 135. Refer to attached `Partial Floor Plan A104'. On Sheet M2, provide new floor drain in Fire Riser 134. Route new 3" sanitary waste line to existing sanitary waste line serving floor drain in Storage 135. Contractor shall verif}, location, size, and depth of existing sanitary waste line on -site. Floor drain shall be equal to Wade 1100-STD, with Proset Trap Guard or equal device for server gas sewage backup protection. Patch existing slab as required, reference the attached detail 'Slab Patch Detail A] 03% Match existing slab thickness and reinforcing. COVDIRKS ARCHITECTS, PC PAGE - 1 i.. ADDENDUM NUMBER 2, CONT i` ITEM #5 SHEET A1.0: SHEET NOTES Revise Sheet Note #58 to read as follows: Contractor to provide and install Hotpoint 3 cu.ft. 24 wide electric range, Model"RA724KWH (Item #02263242000P at Sears, and Broan F402411 non -ducted, 24" wide, white on white range hood. Provide on/off switch for hood, mounted within T.A.S. accessible reach ranges in back wall as shown. ITEM #6 SHEET A2.1 • WINDOW SCHEDULE Revise windows W/05 and W04 as follows: Window Mark: W/03 Mfg. No./Series: Trifab 451 Remarks: Verify all overall existing opening dimensions onsite. Provide and install roller shades, reference notes and sections. Frame line to be located as close as possible to finish face of buildiniz column Window Mark: W/04 Mfg. No./Series: Trifab 451 Remarks: Verify_ all overall existing opening dimensions onsite. Provide and install roller shades, reference notes and sections. Frame line to be located as close as possible to finish face of building columns. For clarification remove and patch existing plaster finish at all window sills, jambs and head to install new frames. Replace existing flashing as required to accommodate the deeper storefront framing system. ITEM #7 SHEET A3.0: DETAILS Replace the typical concrete slab patch, A3.0/11, with the attached detail `Slab Patch Detail 103". ITEM #8 SHEET A4. l : MULTIPURPOS 119 ELEV. 09 & 10 For clarification, the awning is to project out from the wall 30" and is to be 30" tall. The bottom of the awning frame is to be mounted at 7%10" a.f.f. COVDIRKS ARCHITECTS, PC PAGE - 2 PRASE CONSTRUCTION OUTLINE PROJECT: Renovations to the Senior Citizens Center for the City of Lubbock PROJECT #: City #92323.8304.10000 CDA# 898-14A ARCHITECT:. Cox/Dirks Architects, P.C. 1710 151' Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 DATE: February 9, 2015 Work shall be conducted in two (2) phases; with each phase substantially complete as indicated. Phase ll construction will be occupied by the Owner during the work of Phase I. The completed Phase I will be occupied by the Owner during the work of Phase II. A. PHASE 1 The interior area of Phase I is shown on the Construction Documents. a. Work of Phase I will begin after asbestos removal. Coordinate with Owner's abatement contractor. b. Separate phased construction as illustrated with a temporary enclosure wall located along the dashed line indicating separation from Phase I and II work on the Construction Documents. I . Temporary enclosure wall to consist of 2x4 studs at 24" o.c. running from floor to the ceiling. Provide %2" gypsum board over UL labeled polyethylene with a flame spread of 15 or less at one side and'/z" gypsum board at opposite side. Wall to be used as both a construction separation and containment wall. Coordinate wall construction with abatement contractor. 2. Provide a 3%0" x 6%8" temporary doors with weather stripping in the temporary enclosure wall between Entry 101 and Library 108 and Entry 101 and TV Area 106. Doors to be utilized as emergency egress exits from occupied areas during construction. Maintain clear exits to the exterior during construction period. Exterior site work will be comprised of the north parking area and west service drive areas with all adjoining walks and landscape, as designated Phase A. on the site plan. Re -roofing of the entire main roof except as follows: +" a. Roofing over the new and existing Men's toilet area and the addition will be complete in Phase II. b. Curb work for RTU #4 and plumbing vent extensions around RTU 44 to be completed under -� Phase Il. c. During all roofing activities, provide protection for Owner's employees and visitors utilizing the main south walk and entrance area outside of Vestibule 137. 4. The exterior wall work for the vvest; north and east sides of the building. 5. The exterior wall work for portions of the south wall: -' a. Exterior wall work around Door #118 from the southwest corner to the phase line at the west side of the south entry. b. Exterior clerestory window work up to the phase separation line at the west side of the south entrance and to the west and above the north entrance. F c. Work on the parapet wall on the west side of the Men's toilet area. 6. Extend all services (electrical, fire sprinklers, etc.) required for Phase II work up to and/or over temporarily enclosure wall for extension in Phase 11. 7. Maintain and/or provide for all existing or temporary senices to Owner occupied Phase II area at all times. Any disruption in services is to be coordinated in writing with the Owner a minimum of 48 hours prior to disruption. B, TRANSITIONS BETWEEN PHASES 1. All work of Phase I will be substantially completed before work on Phase II begins. a. Allow 5 working days between Phase I and Phase 11 for owner occupation of Phase I area and the vacating of Phase H areas. C. PHASE II 1. Work of Phase 1I is to begin after asbestos removal. Coordinate with Owner's abatement contractor. 2. Interior area of Phase II construction is shown on the Constriction Documents. 3. Exterior work to consist of the south parking area with all adjoining walks and landscape designated Phase B as shown on the Site Plan. 4. The south exterior wall work is to be completed. a. Clerestory windows over the south entrance (3 panels). b. Completion of the remaining south wall work including tuck pointing and graffiti guard coating. 5. Exterior clerestory window work at the north (Recreation 109) and south (Classroom 111 & Hall 114) sides of the building. ,_, Full height window work at the northeast corner of the building. ELEV A4,1/10 61 41 � Iff- I D C :. KITCHEN 11201 F_ __l � I 38 I I 5 `� 63 EL A4,1/08 p� (HIGH) 2 p w E N v o W f'-- s cn Q a-- PHASE PHASE 11 61 ' 37 7 � SEC. A4.1/12 X 118 d- -0 d- 0 cn \ \ C C 0 !n Q (n Q REINSTALL SALVAGED SINK, FAUCET, TRAP AND ALL MISCELLANEOUS PLUMBING ACCESSORIES INTO NEW MILLWORK. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH MILLWORK SUPPLIER TO ENSURE NEW LOCATION COORDINATES WITH EXISTING SERVICE CONNECTIONS. =1 FnP JOINT TRIM —f—AT EDGE OF 00 ON TO REMAIN W/ NER RNISHED UIINSTALLEP EQUIPMENT , ! 7 AS ACOUSTICAL CEILING AS SCHEDULED NEW ExQ. FRP TO WATCH / EXISTING. PATCH AS REQ. � FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION | I |==��AD����========J=== STAINLESS STEEL Top, PLASTIC LAMINATE, FLUSH OVERLAY CONSTRUCTION. � REF SEC. SKIRT FRP JOINT TRIM AT EDGE OF TO REMAIN NEW EXG. FRP0 MATCH EXISTING. PATCH AS REQ. FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION F } � OWNER | FURNISHED | & INSTALLED EQUIPMENT PROVIDE EXISTING SLAB ON GRADE ADDITIONAL #3'S NEW CONCRETE SLAB ON GRAD AT 16" Q.C. AT TO MATCH THICKNESS OF ALL SAWCUTS EXISTING SLAB. REINF. WITH #3 GREATER THAN DOWELS AT 16" O.C. AT MIDDLE 2'-0" WIDE POINT OF SLAB. DRILL AND EPDXY 4" INTO EXISTING SLAB #3'S CONT. -PATCH FLOORING e � a t--VAPOR BARRIER SAW -CUT SLAB EACH SIDE COMPACTED FILL AS REQUIRED 1 1 /2-=1'-O I ['04 wid'; �03 121 STOF 1132 T LI 13( STOR. ............_.... �------ - -- - - - o f - ,- 1. cb RM I , I L. I i '-� ,a I ------------- l°� I r - ....._. i - GENERAL..... NOTES ' rornwA oalnxN:wN v aa»xRax Iv wrNmx,s, NAm«:.%li M NeRwtx NSWNIrA NM iW Mp/rAi, xoWan RNYxnr wne to ......--_............... .......................... ......-........... _ ,Nt Wxfw. Wxnlx:lw n ro vsn sxc vrc xxwr m an Aw aXva a sl%n Ia MASRR wxdx rm auNrc mrcu+dw enAenNw, M%WN. rw9xa nect.�Y eA. (� E+4 swaa rwd, ni m aRw.. Naafea RWlwe eammxnm. mn%Ix0 a iW aaaN, xwneNS Nr„wrt. dxrnx:x., NsdNw . hIIuswc, Ru +nAnR nlrc NenWn, dcadDNNan MRWx tm. uxexX r adw,a +w. +m Yet w owa' A a rAmNCR.on rlwdrv. rrm.SRn N u¢ Y rNnm, nlnmlw lxe. Rnw rae,vm erRM'r ro u Nw1m n »N txllor IriW ro Harr a � awnwmlpx, m Hq. ac arc:Yo comets ro aa+t law rtoRY {Yms IXv. MHa wa5lnr roll mw Row nrn 10NCL1Aw RCA' NnKNldr wM 9:ttx'r H R. dCK1Ne WNtwdm M: A f0 9M im ttNMpMr {M.MNY mYf Ya xfAWM IR C9WI.CR X r...xMm d caw%mn, wxeNu am n+YIKs w adwn rea. m. mmtN MI. 9lWUl[ ul CW ,IIM M rtlnetuY M a4iNIR eq 4glm,Cfwl © 9DYOR a4 nM%CENGf MG Y'9Y. CCI�dVI[ ANRfLR.MYI eID09 SWf �. WAya a w A Runr Wl1!Rx. OdAYAIdIG O,S aLLINn-TR MO tmFnM d Eda%1£eR R F. wMR{{IMD AM M I%a,l atN rNlO[ a OwTNItY@', w9m Po TMr m CONTaC1W PWU• C iM.a01 eTN MI:mV.,NG 4F MwSt .Nb L*MR lwLYt RThNnn »,ACIIdVJt M CWSrfSXMx NxORB A Ylata( CW V iNt YAMdI fO6NC Yw M[a M1Om nlN. �9] b!M D6 k[N,MC rfAw R[ k`d raf, tPNOtl.R A p[e,2R Kf Ii0d1 MN ReG «..... a ,w Nt" Itn9R I51Ral wM WreAKO ippv M.SYINM M,Ki M 9R xeWe'Tatii RN1 I,Sr1%I a IC LMYYR NA55xN9 k N1t. RR9r emW YNSY M[x :R:m W iPi° u wEl%Yan AI a6 MCN xOR! ro 64NpS' NOkK Vimtt. +�wupYSixr' Q <M pr2tD WKaR m xrNbt xltxwiiii anr".a roar ' x�n ra:i5we"�iat ww N"mdY. rer� n�' n : esuwairw�wd ai aia{m�mmr�iYo n w aaam wn a n ui wa. NASu, M adarto w%,aY nNsfn:e:w �Nldl murNwY Sda Mp PIIXtN¢ Cd4lAM enlN ro TIC SPR d IXI� aY d.NWAAN YIYN fRm LRER Am Y:.dH ,Y.P% slaty NA {dt PJ w r-r � tlx w4wn' mo.nc a ao' . n l9 ix,sr: n'wR°d''rb n�wcsm"'ni0r19n� dNOTYY a wlsm xIIw. rm�rnw"'"�m' sWx dMrocs.. i 9d,ra NWMt. W rxR m »R WrornX:rw Mc drwWR xe onmN n:, WewY ne aWmelu dYwa na Of WALL WN5R1rNN1 wNil N,wr/xr NM MP lR wsr°�u 9ew"�w x+ aswR k wuu w, n , rsln_ ws, net. ama Wa F,r/Y+n d' dMw. a tNP wN SeRNN %MPAM1r Cx iKY.. /iMY a YVM C :afi fN3 N»i taf eMN ro rM � Nt M rbCY x4' Cw95:dw NWt COCpAVI[ f%E � RLwt MIN Yi[Rpt Txln 50 SYWNP WCGx: MuSf f fq a TY.O W. da9%m NOW YmY I4YCfW AWInxa AV. 9,Inf AfP W aNARq ®MMM Idl Mwx n. YST%In SNM R M MOSam W OWIR ]lmllm oea m n,l' ANpNX Ow>t�tdl. rkm m Wl' 01e �lNS 10MlnlN: NY.RNYx i rANx5.C1W T ORNN NRNI% iR :M R lea e9pixW,, Th vaAN v N ale' N5w er,tll a a NIla cWVLLrN Y,d q,amC m auWSNKWnIr N eR vnu P 4 d� IAMIREp 'nap K pNi M EMIUKt wet,aL WRiot516 YtN ' (, 4 ,%.uf6w odpu Po e151PN. RV- t9Ral adexc YUR Iew mARe w IwsN �1. OTM YW M M sdcwfxReSws gaRA'. YNb �iMYWY![ »4NSa.5YY NIN 1W amwn wWmd1 W' ME f9NidNn An NC ,. vxaN ,o iwu.»9w Ms. IC aCWM:iN01de d ,MM' nC WNmw W Wq m ++ � .over a'°0� iRkNee mrnwM:Y m ®WIIOR [M. NwR eaYC BST. e9NRN s,a9lse rw w 9m9aa daw9 m uRNx Mm{ Aro RYNeRR N ,IElpw N5 PCn Me m"lae'Yeid wfONwl""ove10XaiT"iveuoa"u a�Yue',u IMaSa'.:9°I41 " i' nos^r:emNf 3 -n ® �. hNwY4 etas. 9v, aesY atx wo Nwsu am Ya aN xL !NM( 9Y0rA tW NAd AV. aNaDi ro C RWe%9 i0iMd9TIW Gad CfB 5Nd[! »YM M CrN ALL +uxRam MRNOL SN5 on. wxt �.�aW. R �' ANCK e zND ilOM Ann u«iWd"�. d• urw' +a- W .mWs YSaR't ® .wags � � w.i ��,la. StdTw?.0P1w°ArMKMc m #�RmwlO. J IW CtWa4 w tTMMN1 Un 4iMK eilll I NC OrIN'UrxNl d PaVS% eN4 dIX M ea5a vd Im R[MI,WMh. xEYaC N Cddla M MA a9NRR W'. aRYT AtA M bC"wtro nd. Ym W'x 1CtLkUY+. da1w0 C 45RerxeN. nl R SdUIenMX w x,»Al! WCNCO /M � NM AMx M pNmtlmw Ap Wk1AS NN Nn Mm91lp K %ice ®RYWQ nIL NCn fWHL NMldplf. MttH rAE Wkt M Iaa xT PpPLt W NCYW1p Ma4Wt rr �® MN »C ARCWR'CY ,xnx A dd6 W %0.:YN dT:rAetm asNlNes naa x[vreim%m ra IK :Awranllrn' uY wdl � Iimrortn aA. Ww Rwc. xurmNd +eO.Assxwm wnNm k dIrcRCN Rd:4 fxxN, C mTRYCAR POLL a0a M/w uedV91 fH%iM wwx N RLlud'W r0 RM. YNa WaeN rd1 Mrx1.5n9N a Farr Ww Ar RwsY rrom. MTNu xr« iCNd Nd aNtt AbO,[ Wa {nw NM W Ai RCtK09 A N5161 � nRwxa M1vnY Mikl. H.w wwx, TNS RWN aNU. R »C Nll aTUAw.SY m »C taMRTm 4"^ MRCYA9 9[pAw m M dlldl W M! Y eaa tiNG Ar YAtKA. NAN lG. CSN:. K R%dMfp. ®� q6 INw R 1: ]sUPL U AMY A 9nhN. IY(R a4r .5f 9 Fw a1Y Am%s¢' TWl u w Ix 14 ccnmums Nv Mr '"Iwlr"I"Y °alum m tm nNO'.x c.0 tkrno /x m ®alewxn a0.. wW e. uc.'vAn« eon % x4 oexEw daNMerol: vuu !unt .n ,�ar«w WNdivaws m;.� Am w xu rWNus' ue vA9ru axrAou rw ,xe YrMY'Ane, a wawin 1N.c rkoas oNdm No as nr�r�� �. m°W;1i.'x ArR r , �% �oreNw rN wu _ , � •"• m.NCY"�'W➢ sma�WIG12�%a i IfmY�NY�ilxlWl' �q Y�yvWY. : NK YCN 1 a�:x.T��„�a:�-,�•N•" � � 4C. M. NM'IIS TOR t COd9NIIR xl WF M»I tlei5wt'X NYtTS. %011N ANal. OWxdlp IC »P. >W%.a,119NRYN'l RRNIMn Ilnr M x4 11. CiR xN%CMS' [WIA TANO+Ot. M d NR CPr mIYRSCG, !W %rlaenxtX 011E . M YSmwRO rV.tW ro R!%1Mi. xtd4ixwi ' CCNCNt 4nNINa:roN TN.W. 4Vwmn.Yl u 6NSxc IRTT. NF 06,n. AxO 1II. IXRIa1Cl1r. ,eNYN%:iR F YH, OMRe M 0nYN11 FOlM1KMl SIINMXR. ®4rc dMYE n 4fWI6 NWNt YMS:. aYN1 w51RA ro CW4N ai Oi. STMt OY rN.K IRNmw ldxnn, aeP, WWD, RV. dd<MIn SLFMmY g� as Hall oRRa ArnK dmNYl clam SHEET NOTES :liiiiii Ai &*isro rw, iiwo w«ir of rA rox. NWu% Ar alww %Rla rVNta aaN, . h�WaNw9 , WY14 ro xnpnl rRaRa olxdA mxn9uc»w. b3 as Rdu ramAtw sHrta ,m CSaVR ro K ASNaaa la. Ivwaa vacr. ;L GQ ma Hal Not nrMsmaY wemo« aAxwi Nn NRUNrc. ReY, aos AIA M �9mMl"'rt c nxM°A i Rnroie*ux°X�''Niii"axw. Mc rm n�wmw.roua. w 17 ew NCN weaiw4 eXr.wAn m RR Raw1a Rr xnesrcn .ultYfxt �y Adnte, sXVNca ,Net mMlkl ern eM%e:.ces ,.m Nmcarte we%s N anwn p,' E-li SRntv. xCiM YCC:R ro »C eea%Ralc m G'JMIfR1.Cnd1. 0R CkR. WNDYN 4WSN NO fRNw4. RV, alLtr NANR eew'W"}M IP aNMA [RnMXI (�M'1LM. tKVMA AW RllxfrK\ 0.. daM. � M ,C%i tm' AVl WRd tX Yi CNC CLL� C tt %' WIORO fY Ai�m9 Wi£YWY CMiR.i tRm m u wWl xVV[I%O WM1NIC I,A\ N.%JW M ran rwrtn i"o�Ml°d iw"vro ral� a:>«c Iw�l m aoxc %toniwwirwoorwx akem ro RrRvd. Rtr..-A n 11 dW ' n�i ti"'i;c�Nd K toaUNR RVM1iYm. 45'N. wCe4CmroOC TtlCe9tt N%Cp 0AM0 MNw O5m MW W N M%wp W 81N1R1. m1NR"L E4�"iI+C MMrillh me Mu ARO,e, fNOM oolo A YY. atI49E0 x HIUCW IHr WDI. RWCiY. 4lt0 AR Hl . 1aLL xaTRO IR rnwewCN M eNDMY.t »a ANu IR. auw.x stRa+ euet ' 'w Y t r, . YIDW 1a0.xRn w,tG WsSa Ax0 alNYnf ro _RV. RIgBM 9afiR 1�T1r5.I plRajlL tlNlal u Nu,,riA 0k'. S'CWea' M RddiXL t>R tAN RML a%. [NABS ANII rSXN �{ nJr ANR Mldi a0. hxYRx fmM N R(GMW 14 oM WN le'NSS,," AORA% WM [I41: R,NUOSYRf. AN1 114dw0LL N NNnq 4AIR5 Y _ DW1m. W. aRi A59 rw 5xW A CR.4 ro Y¢efu. �fN�iNC i rgwN WW"INiFKOWRmtSr[. �Ndk1K d0. OWR M lYN4 MMM Ael9 wR3 +.al M RedM®ro Mrwl NCN �ArAs• NAMN ICAO A IaSNYI, xA RPW Yves A er4 4Gtll 5W. lq,. d'1%Il' fMN tP dxa AW rea%t, pV. SWti N1A.. FN wXi. Me fL LLNWNt1N a�OW{d N'. NKN wY /LL {IDOYNIW rNMYWY. MMN �KfRY%AR RwN-M COtlG ro HNSNW E� Ih, � �,09M�� M YUa,arM! Nal. Mn:N YC qII. Ya aOW:ld: Ar HNIS � 9 &K' M is %�CnroC"� ReMNK WSRN. AS RI�cv+LY OMI(a NAahO Y �o �u� ses ww rvm�m arAwx Rm. mcar x9w M .e...st s ®exa wa mdw rnw awrtn Wm Y dmAu w w amR m CO% DIRKS . P,d9wa Aw.c vo. 4+drm.:arem w wadAAn HadxC:e m '"*n0F'11C: � RVCWCe.PiC rWl S:CV {01A fnR YlW Ar dRSMN d RR♦Aln MM da NWD 1LLwK� RIRiA M NMdaeR. 0,w axRr aR aCAMWI. . Yawm as awa u A roll ,CY w w atYra ARCHITECTS PC xR1wORx/SWl5N1: SO arxf j� a,yp[ mdlA�axN. I'AkIY. IrM AW NC AYtxea,.t MIWp:O IGC(.Y4JMr; %x NnN.u�nn NPaIka dW.rt NMNN�ApNVrti�W »Na.rar:xW wMAIH metaR. rxwNdmmW NlOrs 1+Y e'pwmTrHT:e x. wMv4'x4 N{RA x1Wn9Maty. rEMx,MaII*NbC 111. 5»NTMa S t1BCeTEXAS 79401 M 1MvxAOwfRltRor4ntaAfAdM0W., YwRn.bpe7Am nR0RNRutSxI N9,rawtx. SNx. AA YaRroYroFr6WRN CLL:tNVoQArWXn MmCl AA1R Y%MleN RrolRancdikw:dlaYls eimwN. pY{.UxMRnW1NNPtl.t1ndReMt G -H wTNN MmeMtu SYMAdx%a . A�AMM(YfY tl'a L %SmxepssWVK . aYh[4 LdMQ ,sdasG [TtWn RnEf%ga,xOiA9NNAfO9N»MaxROtIPf Nwwtt 0R W. S, rNNCx9mwWxYaXNnt mOw.I ncIF4e9eN, RPa4eYDWa. LrkSMuCDWreCR iaIaCamRRNcAles4 suAoNa0f fvaMwPM wNn.eY%.r a nMplNdCxdf ernci!Dw ,.W m4 I�rija ar1a . wxA :cwmc uamu%m rTc EraWWM Am Itf an TR xr%lu. m� Rae«raroYm,. +a"ox tllrN adMlY w%aa , SNeeT: D1.0 � . AOON 1Y/DCR IW »YN wALL Nxdx00:1 A Miwp, aY, atW Tlt1i. �% a"NN" °' �. �:at,.aWilMm.rmANa oF:29 r K sty RaMN". K 14YI. b: WLL 3M oY R9W mlk:Ye. IY4 pATF,: I0/G/3011 nwto' 00/C'S/e010 -" f."--- !"`---._-` 1^----' _ e Win; ­--- ,e " T - ram. -ry .....,�.., ,...m q'� ��mm�N' � .... a.„.,...,.,.o.. t ,� ,......... . , . ­._­ bbock TEXAS ADDENDUM 1 RFP 15-12208-MA Renovations to the Senior Citizens Center DATE ISSUED: March 18, 2015 DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION OF PROPOSALS: April 1, 2015 at 3:00 P.M., CST The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Request for Proposals. Where any item called for in the RFP documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. Please be advised of the following: DIVISION 15 - Mechanical as been added. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: City of Lubbock Marta Alvarez, Director of Purchasing & Contract Management P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to (806)775-2164 or Emailed to malvarez(a�mylubbock.us THANK YOU, WAso Av"Tq Director of Purchasing & Contract Management It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the Offeror's responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Director of Purchasing & Contract Management if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source . Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the Director of Purchasing & Contract Management no later than five (5) business days prior to the bid close date. A review of such notifications will be made. RENOVATIONS TO THE SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER THE CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas SPECIFICATION INDEX SECTION 15010 General Mechanical Provisions SECTION 15020 Testing SECTION 15060 Piping SECTION 15250 Insulation SECTION 15400 Plumbing SECTION 15500 Automatic Fire Protection System SECTION 15650 Air Conditioning SECTION 15804 Ventilating SECTION 15840 Ductwork SECTION 15870 Grilles, Registers and Ceiling Diffusers V / V - r BSA Consulting Engineers, PLLC Carl W. Wampler, P.E. TX Firm Registration No. F-4415 898-14A MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX SECTION 15010 -GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all materials and labor as required for the installation of the plumbing, heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems, all as shown on the drawings, as herein specified, or both. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. This Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of all submittal data covering proposed equipment to the Architect for approval prior to installation. All equipment shall be submitted at one time in a bound folder with an index of submittal. 1.4 REGULATIONS A. All work shall be done in strict accordance and compliance with State and Local Laws, together with regulations of the particular Utility Companies concerned. B. Obtain permits as required by the local authorities. 1.5 CLARIFICATION A. The Engineer shall provide, with reasonable promptness, written responses to requests from the Contractor for clarification and interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents. However, if the Contractor's requests for information, clarification or interpretation are, in the Engineers professional opinion, for information readily apparent from reasonable observation of field conditions or a review of the Contract Documents, or are reasonably inferable therefrom, the Engineer shall be entitled to compensation from the Contractor for the Engineer's time spent responding to such requests. 1.6 DEFECTS A. Contractors shall promptly report to the Engineer any defects or suspected defects in the contract documents of which the Contractor becomes aware, so that the Engineer may take measures to minimize the consequences of such a defect. Failure by the Contractor to notify the Engineer shall relieve the Engineer or Owner of the costs of remedying the defects above the sum such remedy would have cost had prompt notification been given when such defects were first discovered. 1.7 COMPLETION A. If the Contractor asks for a final inspection and the project is not complete enough to prepare a normal punch list as determined by the Engineer, the Engineer shall be compensated for time and 898-14A GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-1 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS CONT travel for subsequent site visits. 1.8 DRAWINGS A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. Each Contractor shall check these drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings and/or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the Contract Documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete Contract. B. The plans accompanying these specifications are intended to show the general arrangement and the extent of the work contemplated. The Contractor shall inspect the site before bidding to verify the actual conditions involved as no allowance will be made for unforeseen conditions. The exact location and arrangement of all parts shall be determined after equipment has been approved by the Architect and as directed by the Architect. All materials or labor necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these specifications shall be furnished by each Contractor without additional charge as if called for in these specifications or shown on the plans. C. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions, supports or clearances other than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such items with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. D. This Contractor shall verify all existing conditions that may effect his work including exact location and size of all plumbing lines, direction of flow, ductwork, existing equipment and connection points. Any discrepancies from conditions shown on the drawings shall be reported to the Architect before bidding and the bid price shall include the cost to correct any discrepancies to provide a complete and workable system. E. This Contractor shall thoroughly lay out all his work and check all conditions to insure that the work as shown on the Drawings can be installed without modifications. No material shall be fabricated or delivered to the job until these conditions have been determined. The Owner or Owner's Representative reserves the right to make changes during construction, if required, and no allowances will be made for prefabricated material or on job materials which can not be used due to actual conditions. 1.9 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS A. Where manufacturer's names are mentioned in these specifications, it has been done, in most cases, in order to establish a standard. The products of others than the particular manufacturers mentioned will be acceptable, if of suitable type and construction, but any substitution must be of quality as good as, or better than, the named article. B. If the Contractor elects to substitute other equipment or materials for that specified by name, he shall be fully responsible for all coordination with other trades involved. Any expense incurred because of modifications to accommodate larger sizes, larger electrical service, fuel piping requirements resulting from such substitution shall be borne by the Contractor substituting other equipment. C. Upon being awarded the Contract for the work under one of the following sections, the Contractor shall, within thirty (30) days, submit for approval a complete list of the materials which he proposes to use. The list shall give the manufacturer's names and designations corresponding to every item and where submitted materials are different from that specified by name, the submission shall be accompanied by a complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data and drawings, 898-14A GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-2 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS CONT r_ necessary to give full and complete details for the completed installation. D. Any item on this list which is rejected because of unsuitability or inferior quality, must be replaced by an acceptable item within two (2) weeks following notification of the Contractor of such rejection. If no satisfactory material is submitted within two (2) weeks, then the Architect reserves the right to notify the Contractor as to the type and make of materials he will be required to furnish. Six (6) copies of the material and the equipment list shall be furnished by the Contractor in neat and firmly bound brochures for approval. 1.10 PRECEDENCE A. The work covered in this section shall have precedence over each other in accordance with the following sequence: 1. Soil and waste piping 2. Duct work 3. Cold and hot water piping 4. Electric wiring 1.11 COOPERATION A. Each contractor shall cooperate with the General Contractor and all other contractors to properly coordinate their work, to avoid interference and delays, and arrange all parts of the work so as to harmonize in service and appearance with all other parts. 1.12 INTERFERENCES A. The plans are generally diagrammatic and the Contractor must harmonize the work of the different trades so that interference between piping, equipment, architectural and structural work will be avoided. All necessary offsets in piping, fittings, etc., required to properly install the work must be kept as close as possible to walls, ceiling, columns, etc., so as to take up the minimum amount of space, and all offsets, fittings, etc., required to accomplish it must be furnished and installed by the contractor without additional cost to the Owner. B. Exact locations of mechanical equipment may be varied a reasonable amount by the Architect before installation without additional cost to the Owner. C. All equipment and controls shall be so located and arranged that all parts will be available for proper maintenance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Materials shall be new, unless otherwise specified, and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from any defects. Materials and equipment for which the Underwriters' Laboratories have established as standard, shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and shall bear their label. B. Each Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to the job and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of same. This will be provided until final acceptance of the job. C. Each Contractor shall provide protection against weather, so as to maintain all materials and 898-14A GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-3 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS CONT t--, equipment free from injury and damage. All new work likely to be damaged shall be covered during the day and at the end of each day. D. Each Contractor will furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools, appurtenances and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of this contract. E. The workmanship shall be in all respects, the highest grade and all construction in accordance with the best practice of the trade. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VERIFICATION OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. It shall be the responsibility of all parties concerned to carefully examine the plans and specifications relating to this work for completeness, accuracy and clarity. Any conflict, errors or clarification requests shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Engineer for written interpretation or instructions. No claims for increased compensation for additions, changes or alterations will be considered unless written authority is granted by the Engineer. Otherwise, any additional materials and/or labor due to additions, alterations and changes necessary to meet existing conditions shall be furnished under this contract. 3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of these specifications shall furnish and install all foundations and supports required by equipment included in his work. B. All piping, both vertical and horizontal, shall be supported at sufficient close intervals to keep its alignment, prevent sagging and to prevent pipe from being supported by equipment or equipment connections. C. Vertical pipes shall be supported from floor with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and adequately support their weight. Vertical copper tubing, 1-1 /4" and smaller shall be supported at 3' intervals and at the base of pipe risers, where required for proper support. Hangers shall be manufactured by Kindorff, Unistrut, Elcen or equal. Where multiple pipes are indicated, they may be supported on a continuous hanger. All hangers must meet the Architect's approval. Use of perforated straps will not be pennitted. D. All horizontal pipes suspended with structure above shall be supported by hanger rods of the following size: 1. Pipes up to and including 2" 3/8" rods 2. 2-1/2" and 3" pipe 1/2" rods 3. 4" and 5" pipe 5/8" rods 4. 6" pipe 3/4" rods E. Soil pipe shall be supported at all turns and at intervals not to exceed 5' on centers on straight runs. The following table gives maximum hanger spacing for copper and steel lines but hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessary: SIZE OF LINE HANGER SPACING 3/4" and smaller 5' V 6' 1-1/4" 7, 1-1/2" 8' 2" to 4" 10, Larger than 4" 12' 898-14A GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-4 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS CONT F. If pipes of different Contractors can be racked on the same supporting structure, each Contractor shall cooperate with the other involved to properly locate the supporting members and shall furnish a proportionate share of the labor and materials involved in the installation. 3.3 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION OF PIPES A. Swing joints, turns, expansion loops, or long offsets, shall be provided wherever shown on the drawings, and where necessary to allow for the expansion of piping within the building. Broken pipes or fittings due to rigid connection shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Anchors shall be installed where shown or required to control expansion of piping system. Anchors shall be of the clamp type securely fastened to the building structure. 3.4 UNIONS A. Unions shall not be placed in any pipe in a location which will be inaccessible after completion of the building unless shown on drawings or specified. Unions shall be installed on both sides of all valves, regulators, check valves, traps, etc., so that such equipment may be readily disconnected. Where copper pipe joins iron or steel pipe, an insulation union using a "Bakelite" insulator shall be used. 3.5 ESCUTCHEONS A. Where exposed to view, pipes insulated or bare, passing through floors, walls, or ceilings, shall be filled with near, heavy spun or stamped steel escutcheons, firmly secured to the pipes. Escutcheons shall be of sufficient outside diameter to surround both the pipe and the sleeves. The sleeve shall have a nickel plated finish, fabricated in one piece and shall be firmly anchored in space. "Snap -on" type escutcheons will not be permitted. 3.6 SOIL CONDITIONS A. This specification and drawings in no way stipulate the condition of the soil to be encountered. When excavation may be required in execution of the work, this Contractor agrees that he has informed himself regarding conditions that may appear or seem to be implied in any portion of the Contract Documents. 3.7 EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPING A. Trenches for all underground pipe lines shall be excavated 12" beyond required depths. The bottom of trenches shall be tamped hard and graded to secure the required fall. Bell holes shall be excavated so that pipe will rest on solid ground for its entire length. Sewer shall be laid in a separate trench, except where otherwise noted on the drawings. Before backfilling of pipe, Contractor shall provide blow -sand and/or clean river sand in bottom of all trenches, 12" deep. B. Backfilling: After pipe lines have been tested, inspected, and approved by the Architect, and prior to backfilling, forms shall be removed, and the excavation shall be cleaned of trash and debris. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 8" in thickness, and properly moistened to approximate optimum requirements. Each layer shall be compacted by hand or machine tampers or by other suitable equipment to a density that will prevent excessive settlement or shrinkage. Backfill shall be brought to a suitable elevation above grade to provide for anticipated settlement and shrinkage thereof. Blow -sand and/or river sand shall be placed over pipe, 8" minimum, above top of pipe before backfill is begun. 898-14A GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-5 i Y .. GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS CONT C. Where gravel, streets, paved streets, sidewalks, etc., are disturbed, cut and damaged in making connections to city sewer, water lines, and gas lines, the expense of repairing same in an approved manner, as required, shall be included under this contract. , 3.8 UTILITY CONNECTIONS A. Utility connection locations, depths, sizes, characteristics and capacities shall be verified by each Contractor utilizing these items and any discrepancies from those shown on the plans shall be brought to the Architect's attention before bidding. Any and all utility connections shall be made by the Contractor, as required, with no increase to the Owner above the price indicated in the Contractor's proposal. Provide all necessary backflow prevention devices as required to comply with the City Of Lubbock's backflow prevention program. 3.9 PAINTING A. No painting will be required under this section. 3.10 TESTING A. This contractor shall test all plumbing lines and equipment as described under "Testing" section of these specifications. 1-1 3.11 ELECTRICAL A. Electric motors shall be of the speed, phase and voltage as specified and shall be of type recommended by motor manufacturer for type of service involved. B. The Contractor furnishing the motor shall install it. The Contractor shall furnish such motor controls and starting equipment as specified or as required. The erection and connection of all switches, starting and control equipment, and the wiring of same, shall be done as required. Conduits from controllers to motors shall be flexible for not over three feet (3') and shall be attached to the terminal housing of the motor. All flexible conduit to motor shall be waterproof type with neoprene jacket. C. Where automatic controls are called for in thePlumbing, Heating and Air Conditioning specifications, the control instruments, such as motorized damper motors, motorized valves, etc., shall be installed by the Contractor furnishing the controls. All wiring necessary shall be done by the Electrical Contractor. The Contractor furnishing the controls shall furnish a control wiring diagram to the Electrical Contractor. D. Starters on air cooled condensing units shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer. Starters for Heating and Ventilating units shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer. 3.12 FLASHING A. Vent pipes shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with 4 lb. sheet lead. Flashings shall extend not less than eight inches (8") from the vent pipes in all directions, shall be extended up the vent pipes a minimum of six inches (6") at which point threaded standard cast-iron or malleable -iron recess roof couplings shall be installed to form counter -flashing or rain guards. Flashings in connection with cast-iron pipe. vents shall be turned down into the pipes or hubs. Flashings on metal { roofs shall be "Dektite" flashings or approved equal. Roof drains shall be flashed as detailed on the j drawings. t 898-14A GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-6 i_ GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS CONT 3.13 PIPE SLEEVES A. Each contractor shall provide sleeves for service lines passing through walls, roof or floors, subject to Architect's approval and/or as shown on the Drawings. Pipes passing through interior wall sleeves --- shall be free to move through sleeve. Sleeves exposed to view shall be equipped with cast brass escutcheons, t B. All sleeves installed in vertical position shall be constructed of standard weight galvanized steel pipe. All sleeves in horizontal position shall be constructed of standard weight steel or extra heavy cast iron pipe unless otherwise noted, welded to steel pl ate in vertical position as detailed on the drawings. Pipe sleeve diameter shall be a minimum of 2 diameters larger than the outside of pipe passing through same, and a minimum of 1" larger than pipe plus insulation. Insulation shall pass through sleeves. C. Where pipe extends through exterior walls below grade, oversize pipe sleeves, 2 diameters f -, larger,made of standard weight steel pipe shall be used, and the annular space between service pipe and sleeves shall be filled with picked oakum and cement, or lead where required, to make a waterproof joint. D. All sleeves shall be installed flush with finished surfaces and/or as detailed on the Drawings. Copper pipes passing through steel pipe sleeves shall be installed with rubber insulation between pipe and sleeves Isolator insulation shall be similar to Johns -Manville Aeratube. E. Where any pipe passes through fire walls, smoke walls, and concrete slabs between floors, the Contractor shall furnish and install fire seals, U.L. listed, type LS, link -seal, as manufactured by Thunderline Corp., or approved equal. Fire and smoke seals shall be installed in steel pipe sleeve of correct size for pipe and insulation. 3.14 INSULATING COUPLINGS A. This Contractor shall furnish and install insulating couplings wherever piping material changes from galvanized steel pipe to copper, or from black steel to copper, and where shown on the drawings. 3.15 INSULATION A. Furnish and install pipe, duct, and equipment insulation as specified under "Insulation" section of these specifications. 3.16 LABELS A. Mechanical equipment shall have a permanent metal tag or laminated plastic (min. thickness .093 inch) attached by riveting to identify as shown on the drawings. Letters on tag shall be 114" to 318" in height. 3.17 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES A. All exposed pipes passing through floors, ceiling, or walls shall be provided with approved nickel or chromium plated cast brass ceiling plates securely attached with set screws. 3.18 DEMOLITION A. Each contractor shall remove those items shown on the plans to be removed for each respective trade. 898-14A GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-7 t- GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS CONT B. All items to be removed or discarded are property of the Owner and shall be stacked as directed by the Architect or Owner unless notified by the Architect to become property of the Contractor in which case all items shall be removed from the site. C. Contractor shall take care not to damage more of the existing facilities than is absolutely necessary. All concrete to be removed shall be cored or sawed to widths to allow the installation of pipes or conduits indicated and replaced by Contractor who occasions the work. 3.19 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical, or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings. 3.20 INSTRUCTION MANUALS A. Furnish four (4) complete bound copies of Instruction Manuals on all operating equipment to Owner. Manuals: complete with repair instructions, replacement parts list, and complete operating instructions and wiring diagrams. 3.21 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. After completion of the work but before final payment is made, the Contractor shall run test over a sufficient period of time to prove the proper capacity and performance of apparatus, etc., and of system as a whole to the approval of the Architect and Engineer. See Testing section of the Specifications. A. This Contractor shall guarantee the workmanship and material against defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance, unless specified otherwise in other sections of this specification. END OF SECTION 15010 898-14A GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 15010-8 I N I" SECTION 15020 - TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide specified testing and testing as required by governing authorities. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit a certificate signed by the job superintendent certifying that all tests have been satisfactorily completed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS A. All testing required under the contract of the plumbing contractor or heating and ventilating and air conditioning contractor shall be approved by the Engineer before acceptance. Soil or waste piping located underground shall be tested before backfilling. Provide the necessary valves for cutting off existing work not to be tested. B. The contractor shall perform the various tests as specified and as required by State and Local Authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. C. Any leaks or defective material found shall be repaired and replaced, and tests shall be repeated until no further leaks or defects are indicated. D. Drainage System: The entire drainage and venting system shall have all necessary openings plugged to permit the entire system to be filled with water to the level of the highest vent stack without showing a drop of greater than four inches (4"). Where a portion of the system is to be tested, the test shall be conducted in the same manner as described for the entire system, except that a vertical stack ten feet (10') above the highest horizontal line to be tested may be installed and filled with water to maintain sufficient pressure, or a pump may be used to supply the required pressure. The pressure shall be maintained for four (4) hours. E. All Domestic Hot and Cold Water System: Upon completion of any part of the roughing -in and setting of fixtures, the entire hot and cold water piping system shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 100 lbs. per square inch gauge, stand proof tight at this pressure for not less than eight (8) hours. Each particular part of the hot and cold water system shall be tested as above specified. F. Gas Piping: All gas piping shall be tested under a pressure of 15" of mercury air pressure for a period of twenty-four (24) hours and be proof tight. 898-14A TESTING 15020-1 TESTING, CONT G. Air Balancing: All supply and return air registers shall be balanced b the Contractor to supply CFM g PP Y g Y PP Y 1 shown, and results of all tests, together with type of equipment used, shall be submitted to the Architect's office at completion of the job, and if the Architect deems it necessary, this Contractor , shall perform such tests as may be necessary to illustrate to the satisfaction of the Architect that equipment installed performs properly. END OF SECTION 15020 898-I4A TESTING 15020-2H"i SECTION 15060 - PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This contract shall include the furnishing and installation of all labor and material necessary to complete all plumbing and gas fitting as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING GENERALLY A. Type of piping for the various systems shall be as specified under specific headings. B. Pipe ends shall be square cut. Ends of pipes shall be reamed and shall be wiped clean to remove cuttings. Before installation, pipe shall be stood on end and rapped sharply to remove cuttings and other foreign material from interior. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned inside and outside. C. Screwed joints shall be made with best linseed oil and graphite or "Jointite" used on male threads only. Omit compound on two (2) end starting threads. D. Pipe shall be accurately cut to fit. Bending or springing of pipe will not be permitted. E. The various service pipes, valves, fittings, etc., running parallel with each other and near together shall be in line with each other and shall be kept a sufficient distance from each other and other work, to permit not less than 1/2" between finished coverings on the different services. F. No unions are to be placed in any pipe in a location which will be inaccessible after completion of the building unless so shown on drawings or specified. Unions must be installed on each side of all special valves, regulators, etc., and one (1) side of all check valves, thermostatic traps, and at all pieces of equipment such as pumps, condensers, tanks, etc., so that such equipment may be readily disconnected. G. Each Contractor shall furnish all foundations, structural or pipe supports indicated or called for specifically, or that may be required to support his particular equipment and material, unless hangers are definitely indicated as being furnished by others. All horizontal runs of piping shall be securely supported by pipe hangers spaced not more than 10 apart, and closer when necessary to prevent sagging. Soil pipe shall be supported every 5'. H. Perforated strap hangers will not be allowed for any part of hangers. I. Swing joints, offsets, and anchors shall be provided in piping where required to provide for and t control expansion or contraction of pipe. 898-14A PIPING 15060-1 PIPING. CONT All piping, except waste piping, shall be installed above finished first floor slab, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2.2 EQUAL MATERIALS CONSIDERATION A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical, or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Locations for various kinds of pipe materials shall be in accordance with the schedule following: 1. Plastic DWV pipe and fittings: a. Underground sanitary drainage piping within the building line and exterior of the building line. b. Aboveground vent and drainage piping. 2. Type L hard drawn copper with brass solder fittings: a. Aboveground domestic water piping within the building 4" and smaller in size. b. Drainage pipe where shown on the drawings. 3. Type K hard drawn copper with brass solder fittings: a. Domestic water supply piping underground, inside masonry walls, and under concrete slabs within the building line and elsewhere as noted. 4. Standard weight black steel pipe, Schedule 40, with screwed malleable fittings: a. Aboveground gas piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COPPER WATER PIPING A. Pipe and tubing shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by the Contractor and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken the structural portions of the building. Piping aboveground shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise shown or noted on the drawings. Branches from service lines may be taken off top of main, bottom of main, or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. Service pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and not less than 1/2" between finished covering on the different services. No water piping shall be buried in floors unless specifically indicated on the drawings or approved. Changes in sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. The use of long screws and bushing will not be permitted. Where contractor connects copper to galvanized steel piping or hot water heaters, furnish and install insulating couplings. B. Drains indicated on the drawings in connection with the water distribution system shall be 1/2" brass plugs. Additional drains shall be installed at low points on the hot-water and cold -water piping, and all piping shall grade down to the drains. C. Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction or tubing. Horizontal runs of tubing over 50' in length shall be anchored to the wall or to the supporting construction about midway on the run to force expansion, evenly divided, toward the ends. D. Air chambers shall be provided on both hot and cold supplies near each faucet or control valve, as applicable, and where not definitely shown on the drawings shall consist of a 12" length of tubing of the same diameter as the branch supply, fitted with a cap. 898-14A PIPING 15060-2 I PIPING. CONT E. Tubing shall be cut square, and burrs shall be removed. Both inside of fittings and outside of tubing shall be well cleaned with steel wool before sweating. Care shall be taken to prevent annealing of fittings and tubing when making connections. All joints shall be made with fittings. Joints for aboveground soldered fittings shall be made with a non -corrosive paste flux and solid string silver solder, and all underground joints shall be made with silfos only. Cored solder will not be permitted. Threaded swing joints shall be provided on all branch connections to mains and risers to provide for expansion and contraction of tubing. 95-5 solder shall be used to make joints extending to fixture only. F. Underground piping shall be a minimum of 24" below finish and/or natural grades. 3.2 GAS PIPING A. Gas piping shall be installed parallel with the building and water piping. In finished rooms, piping shall be run concealed in a vented space. Gas piping shall be run under floor slabs, only as t specifically noted, and then shall be in Orangeburg or PVC airtight vented sleeves with metal fitting in an approved manner. B. Joints for steel pipe shall be made with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to the male thread only. After cutting and before threading, all pipe shall be reamed and shall have burrs removed. Threads shall be full cut, and not more than three (3) threads on the pipe shall remain -_ exposed. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks will not be permitted. C. Make final connection to all items of equipment, as shown and required, using unions and shut-off valves in each location. 3.3 DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER AND GAS VALVES AND FITTINGS A. Valves and fittings for all domestic cold water and hot water services shall be as follows: 1. Valves shall be ball valves. 2. Gas service stops shall be Crane No. 1228. 3. Swing check valves 3" and smaller shall be Crane No. 137. Swing checks larger than 3" shall be Crane No. 14493. 4. Lift check valves 3" and smaller shall be crane No. 366E. 3.4 PIPE HANGERS AND FIXTURE SUPPORTS A. Pipe hangers and fixture supports shall be furnished and set, and the Contractor shall be responsible for their proper and permanent locations. B. Horizontal runs of copper tubing shall be supported by approved steel plastic coated hangers spaced not more than 8' o.c. Horizontal runs of drainage and vent pipes shall be supported by adjustable expansion pipe hangers having bolted hinged loops and turnbuckles, or an approved equal. Hangers on drainage and vent pipe shall be spaced not more than 10' o.c. Hanger and collars shall be of size proportionate to the weight of the pipe supported. C. Fixtures and equipment shall be supported and fastened in a satisfactory manner. Where secured to concrete or brickwork walls, they shall be fastened with brass expansion bolts. Expansion bolts shall be 1/4" brass bolts with 20 threads to the inch and of sufficient length to extend at least 3" into solid concrete or brickwork, fitted with loose tubing or sleeves of proper length to bring expansion sleeves in the solid concrete or brick wall. Where secured to tile walls or partitions, they shall be fastened with 1/4" brass toggle or through bolts. Where through bolts are used, they shall be provided with plates or washers at back, set so that heads, nuts, and washers will be concealed by plaster. Bolts and nuts shall be hexagon, and exposed bolts, nuts, and screw heads shall be provided with chromium plated brass washers. 898-14A PIPING 15060-3 PIPING, CONT l D. Copper pipe hangers shall be similar to Grinnell No. 260 with plastic coating for non -insulated water Ij! i m and Grinnell No. 300 for insulated water i in Draina a and vent i e han ers shall be piping piping. g PP g similar to Grinnell No. 590. END OF SECTION 15060 898-14A PIPING 15060-4 SECTION 15250 - INSULATION r, PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This contract includes furnishing and installing all insulation specified herein. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND DUCT INSULATION A. All insulation required under the Plumbing contract and Heating and Air Conditioning Contract shall be equal to and as manufactured by Knauf Fiber Glass, or Johns -Manville, and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and recommendations. B. Insulation: 1. Water Piping Within Building Lines - Shall be insulated with I " thick fiber glass pipe insulation with a factory applied all service jacket with self-sealing lap. 2. Pipe Fittings - Insulate pipe fittings with Manville Zestons according to manufacturer's recommendation. 3. Condensate Drain Lines - Shall be insulated with Johns -Manville Aerotube, 1/2" thick, or approved equal. Secure joints with #57 adhesive. 4. Overhead Heating and Air Conditioning Sheet Metal Ducts Above Ceilings -Shall be insulated with 2" fiber glass duct wrap with aluminum foil Kraft vapor barrier, and shall be secured to ductwork with an approved adhesive and be sealed and stapled in place, 3/4 lb. density. 5. Contractor at his option may use interior duct liner in lieu of exterior insulation. Duct liner shall be Certainteed #150 Ultralite Duct Liner, or approved equal, 1-1/2 lb. per cubic ft. density with vinyl spray one side. All transverse joints shall be protected against air erosion by properly sealing all edges and securing with sheet metal clips. Duct liner shall be secured with mastic, 100% coverage and clips 18" on center. All exposed rectangular ducts shall be lined. C. Where insulation is indicated to be applied inside of ducts, exterior insulation will not be required. D. Where insulation occurs inside of ducts, allowance shall be made in sheet metal ductwork to accommodate the total insulation thickness. Duct dimensions indicated represent net inside clearances. E. Condensate lines shall be insulated with 1" thick fiber glass pipe insulation with a factory applied all service jacket with self sealing lap. 2.2 EQUAL MATERIALS CONSIDERATION 898-14A INSULATION 15250-1 INSULATION CONT A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical, or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings. 2.3 SMOKE AND FLAME SPREAD A. All duct and pipe insulation shall have a flame spread no greater than 25 and a smoke developed rating no greater than 50. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSULATION A. All insulation shall be applied to clean surfaces and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 15250 898-14A INSULATION 15250-2 SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1. DESCRIPTION A. This contract will include the furnishings and installation of all labor and material necessary to complete all plumbing and gas fittings as shown on the drawings and as herein specified as follows: 1. Water supply and service. 2. System of sanitary drainage, venting and connection to all fixtures as shown on the drawings. 3. Gas supply system. 4. Furnishing and installation of all fixtures as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittals required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical, or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings. 2.2 TRAPS A. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections at the drainage system shall be equipped with a trap. Traps installed on hub -and -spigot pipe shall be extra -heavy cast-iron. Traps installed on threaded pipe shall be recess drainage pattern. All floor drains shall be equipped with a deep seal trap. B. Provide acid waste traps for all lab station sinks. 2.3 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe, except that cleanout plugs larger than 4" will not be required. Cleanouts and access covers at finished walls and exterior walls shall be Wade Co. 8570-R N.B. cover and at finished floors shall be Wade Co. 8550-5 with Wade No 8300-5 #2, N.B. cover, or the approved equal. Omit access covers for cleanouts in other locations. All wall covers shall be cadmium plated, and all floor cleanouts shall be polished nickel bronze flush with finish floor. Cleanouts exterior to the building shall be Wade Co. 7100-X with 9" x 9" access cover set flush with finish grade in 16" x 16" concrete pad, or as detailed on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 898-14A PLUMBING 15400-1 s 1 PLUMBING, CONT 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Utilities: This Contractor shall furnish and install, and shall pay for connections to water, gas, and sewer piping, all in accordance with requirement of the local service companies concerned. B. Cross Connections and Interconnections: No plumbing fixtures, device or piping shall be installed which will provide a cross connection or interconnection between a distributing supply for drinking or domestic purposes and a polluted supply such as a drainage system of a soil or waste into the water supply system. Provide any and all backflow prevention devices as required by code. C. The Contractor shall provide all necessary material and labor to connect to the Plumbing System all fixtures and equipment shown on the drawings having plumbing connections and which are furnished and installed by others or are specified in other sections of these specifications. D. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions. Where pipes extend through concrete members, this Contractor shall core all such members and slabs, unless sleeves have been provided. Chipping concrete will not be allowed, and if any coring of the concrete members is necessary, this contractor shall call it to the Architect's attention before doing same. E. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury. At the completion of the work the fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. END OF SECTION 15400 898-14A PLUMBING 15400-2 SECTION 15500 - AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section covers the materials, design, installation and testing of the automatic fire protection system as specified and shown on the drawings. Contractor shall install a complete system in accordance with NFPA 13 for the type facility involved and ensure 100% coverage for the entire facility. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. General - Section 15010 2. Piping - Section 15060 3. Electrical - Section 16010 C. Referenced Standards: The following publications form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the reference thereto: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards: No. 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publication: Fire Protection Equipment List 3. Factory Mutual System (FM) Publication: Approved Guide D. General Requirements: The sprinkler system shall be installed in strict accordance with all mandatory and recommended provisions of NFPA No. 13 for wet pipe systems. E. Design: Hydraulic design shall be based on an occupancy of light hazard. F. Authority Having Jurisdiction: For interpretation of the NFPA Standard the "Authority Having Jurisdiction" referred to in the Standard shall be the Fire Marshal. The Contractor agrees to accept such interpretations by the same without additional cost to the Owner. G. Qualification of the Contractor: The Fire Protection System shall be installed by an experienced firm regularly engaged in the installation and design of automatic sprinkler systems. The Contractor shall have a "Certificate of Registration" or proof of qualifications as required by the State or the Fire Marshal. The fire protection design and layout shall have the approval of the Engineer and Fire Marshal. The Engineer may reject any proposed installer who cannot show evidence of such qualifications. H. Materials and Equipment List and Approval: The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a complete list of all materials, equipment and accessories proposed for installation, in compliance with the drawings and specifications. This list shall include catalog identification numbers, drawings, catalog cuts, and other descriptive data and material necessary to define completely all components of the work. No consideration will be given to partial list submitted from time to time. Approval of materials and equipment will be based on manufacturer's published data, and will be tentative, subject to submission and approval of complete shop drawings. I. Shop Drawings: 1. The contract drawings show the areas which require sprinkler systems. The Contractor shall submit complete working drawings on reproducible mylars and calculations of the sprinkler system and such other descriptive data as the Engineer may require to demonstrate compliance with the contract documents. 2. Shop drawings will be submitted at one time to demonstrate that pertinent items of equipment have been properly coordinated and will function properly with each other. No installation work will be permitted prior to approval of complete shop drawings. 3. Submittal drawings shall be accurately drawn on blank mylar or vellum sheets. Drawings shall be identical in size, scales, and orientation as the contract drawings, and conform to the requirements established for working plans by NFPA No. 13. i_ 898-14A i AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 15500-1 L 4. If departures from the contract drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures, including changes in related portions of the project and the reasons, therefore, shall be submitted with the shop drawings and hydraulic calculations. Approved departures shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. All calculations shall be submitted for approval showing piping designs, water supplies, available pressures, residual pressures, etc. as required by NFPA for hydraulic designs. Record Drawings: Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall revise the original shop drawings to agree with the construction as actually accomplished. These drawings shall be delivered to the Engineer. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section. 1.3 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical, or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All material and equipment shall be new and the current standard products of the manufacturer. Where two or more items of equipment performing the same function are required, they shall be exact duplicates, produced by one manufacturer. However, component parts need not be products of the same manufacturer. B. All materials and equipment shall be UL listed and/or FM approved for systems of the type indicated on the drawings, and conform to the requirements of NFPA No. 13. 2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. The following is a listing of materials and equipment requirements. It is not intended that all items will necessarily be required, but that those required for the workconform to this listing. 1. Pipe and Fittings: All pipe and fittings shall be non -galvanized except where galvanized is required by NFPA No. 13. ITEM SIZE (INCHES) Pipe All Above ground Fittings All screwed Fittings All flanged Fittings All welding Grooved All Fittings Flanges All SPECIFICATION Schedule 40 or Schedule 10 Steel, ASTM A120-83 or A53 Cast iron 125 lb. on Sprinkler System Cast iron 125 lb. on Sprinkler System Steel, Sch. 40, ANSI B 16.2 Malleable iron ASTM A47-77 or Ductile iron ASTM 536 500 lb. Cast iron 125 lb. on Sprinkler System 898-14A AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 15500-2 Threadolets Through 2" Steel, ANSI B 16.11, ASTM A105 sockolets Weldolets 2" & larger Steel, 90 deg. STD only, ANSI B16.9, ASTM Al05 Unions Through 2" Malleable iron, 300 lb. bronze to iron ground joint Pipe All Class 150 Ductile Iron or PVC Clowe Below Ground Fittings Below Ground Class 150 Mechanical Joint, Trinity Valley 2. Sprinkler and Nozzles: Sprinkler Head Type Fully -Recessed 3. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Vertical supports, Approved type, in accordance with NFPA No. 13 requirements all hangers and connections (non- All seismic bracing) Sprinkler escutcheons One or two-piece chrome depth as required to provide clearance in accordance with NFPA No. 13 except where otherwise specified on drawings Sprinkler Guard Approved guard, standard baked enamel finish PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Piping material, including valves and fittings shall be delivered to the site in a clean condition and protected against entry of foreign material. 3.2 CLEANING A. Prior to erection the interior or all piping shall be cleaned of all metal cuttings, loose scale, or other foreign materials. At the discretion of the Engineer, non -welded piping and welded piping with backing rings may require brush cleaning as above. After erection and prior to testing, all valves, caps, and plugs at all low points in the system shall be opened and the system thoroughly flushed with water. 3.3 JOINTS A. Joints shall be the threaded, flanged, welded, or grooved. Shop welded joints in accordance with NFPA No. 13 will be permitted. Flanged connections shall be provided where indicated on the drawings or required by NFPA No. 13. 1. Threaded Joints: Threads shall be concentric with the outside of the pipe and shall conform to ANSI B2.1. Threaded joints shall be made tight with an approved thread joint compound or tape. Joint compound shall be applied lightly but sufficiently to cover male threads only. Leaking joints shall not be repaired by peaning or packing. 2. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be faced -true, provided with non-metallic full face gaskets and made square and tight. When made up, flange bolts shall extend through nuts by at least one full thread. No flanges shall be placed in locations which will be inaccessible after erection. 3. Welded Joints: All welding, including methods and qualifications of welders, shall be in strict accordance with the standards and requirements specified in NFPA No. 13. Welded branch connections to headers shall be made by the use of threadolets, sockolets, and weldolets. 898-14A AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 15500-3 1 1-1 4. Groove Joints: All grooving shall be in accordance with NFPA No. 13. 5. Cutting: Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements shown on the drawings and to suit field conditions, and shall be carefully worked into place without forcing or ! springing. All cuts shall be reamed to remove fins and burrs. 3.4 PIPE SUPPORTS AND HANGERS A. Special supports and hangers shall be as detailed and located on drawings. Supports and hangers not detailed on drawings shall be an approved type, installed in accordance with NFPA No. 13. Ring hangers shall be of the adjustable type. Offsets in hanger rods will not be acceptable. 3.5 PIPE SLEEVES A. Pipes passing through concrete or masonry walls or concrete floors shall be provided with pipe sleeves. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective wall or floor, and be of sufficient size as to provide a minimum of 1/2" all-round clearance between pipe and sleeve. Sleeves in walls shall be cut flush with the surface and sleeves in floors shall extend two inches above floor surfaces, unless otherwise shown on drawings. Sleeves in non -bearing walls, floors, or ceilings may be steel pipe, cast iron pipe, or galvanized sheetmetal with lock -type longitudinal seam. B. Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire partitions, or floor/ceiling assemblies, the Contractor IJ shall furnish and install fire seals, U.L. listed, type LS, link seal, as manufactured by Thunderline Corp. Fire and smoke seals shall be installed in steel pipe sleeve of correct size for pipe and insulation. 3.6 ESCUTCHEONS A. Pipe escutcheons shall be provided at all finished surfaces where exposed piping passes through floors, walls or ceilings. Sprinkler escutcheons shall be provided for all pendent heads through ceilings. Escutcheons shall be fastened securely to the pipe. 3.7 SIGNS A. All control, drain and inspector's test valves shall be provided with identification signs. 3.8 SPARE SPRINKLERS A. Spare automatic sprinklers with cabinets and one sprinkler wrench for each cabinet shall be furnished. The number and types of sprinklers shall be in accordance with NFPA No. 13 requirements for stock of spare sprinklers. The cabinets shall be mounted where indicated on drawings or directed by Engineer. 3.9 ELECTRICAL A. All electrical work in connection with the installation of the fire protection system shall be performed in accordance with Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions, and Section 16721 - Fire Alarm and Detection System. 3.10 TESTS A. Upon completion and prior to acceptance of the installation, the Contractor shall subject the system to the tests required by NFPA No. 13 and furnish the Engineer with a test certificate signed by official of local fire department. 3.11 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. All materials and workmanship shall be guaranteed for one (1) year from date of completion to be free of defects. END OF SECTION 15500 898-14A AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 15500-4 SECTION 15650 AIR CONDITIONING PART]. GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Contractor shall furnish and install where shown on the drawings, complete Sumner -Winter, indoor and outdoor mounted air conditioning systems as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL _ A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. I 1.4 REBATES AND INCENTIVES A. Any and all rebates or incentives offered by utility companies or equipment manufacturers shall go directly to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. All units shall be of the same manufacturer and shall have capacities and efficiency ratings as scheduled. 2.2 GAS -ELECTRIC ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings, complete summer -winter rooftop mounted air conditioning units as scheduled on the drawings. All units shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer and as herein specified. B. Unit shall be a standard product of a firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of this type of Heating and Cooling Equipment and shall have factory personnel available for assistance in trouble shooting. C. Mechanical contractors bidding this work shall have service facilities of their own or make arrangements with an independent service company to handle the start up and the first years service of this installation. Cost of the first years service shall be included in this bid. Routine maintenance of this equipment such as filter changes, lubricating, tightening belts, etc. is the responsibility of the Owner after final acceptance of this job. D. The equipment offered shall be designed for rooftop mounting and be fully approved by an accredited agency for outdoor installation. E. All electrical components shall carry an Underwriters' Laboratories Listing. F. Cabinet Construction: 1. All components of each unit shall be contained in a single weatherproof casing factory fabricated and assembled, one piece construction, no field assemblies. 2. The cabinet shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel. Exterior panels shall have a durable finish coat of outdoor acrylic enamel. 898-14A AIR CONDITIONING 15650-1 AIR CONDITIONING CONT 3. All exterior panels of the conditioned air portion of each unit shall be lined with 1" thick fiberglass insulation. In addition the entire bottom of the unit shall be insulated with fiberglass or styrofoam. 4. Easy access of all interior components shall be provided to facilitate service and maintenance 5. All condenser coils shall have hail screens. 6. All units shall have hinged access panels with 1/4 latches. G. Heating Section: 1. Natural gas heating capacity as scheduled on the drawings shall be furnished in each unit. High voltage ignition and re -ignition, and all necessary operating and safety controls shall be furnished. 2. Heating exchangers shall be aluminized steel and the entire unit shall be A.G.A. approved for firing with entering air at any temperature. 3. Heat exchanger shall be warranted for a period of ten years. H. Cooling Section: 1. The cooling method shall be direct expansion coils with mechanical refrigeration. Capacity shall be as scheduled on the plans. 2. Methods of heat transfer shall be by means of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes which are tested at the factory for 500 psi working pressure. 3. Compressors shall be warranted for five (5) years. 4. Condenser coils shall have hail screens. I. Damper Section: (5 tons and larger) 1. An automatically controlled, multi -position interconnected system for handling outside air, return air and exhaust air shall be included in each unit, with mixed air thermostat and multi - position motor. 2. This system of dampers shall maintain a positive relationship between each element so that all dampers moved in unison, when required amounts of outside and return air are supplied. An exhaust -relief damper shall be included. 3. All damper linkage for this system shall be adjustable. 4. All damper blade bearings shall be made of a permanently lubricated corrosion -proof plastic material. 5. Outside air intakes shall employ rain eliminator louvers. 6. Damper blades shall be lined with urethane foam to provide a tight seal and quiet operation. 7. Units with a cooling capacity of less than five tons shall be provided with a manual outside air damper. J. Filter Section: 1. Filter media shall be one inch thick polyurethane with 20 pores per inch mounted in rugged individual galvanized frames for each handling and cleaning. 2. Both outside and return air shall be filtered. K. Blowers (Indoor Air): 1. Each unit shall be equipped with forced curved blower wheels. Units shall be belt or direct drive. 2. The belt tension shall be easily adjustable. Pulleys shall remain in alignment with motor and blower shafts parallel during adjustments. 3. The motor pulley shall have an adjustable sheave so that the blower speed may be changed. 4. Blower capacity and static pressure shall be as scheduled on the plans. Blower motor H.P. shall be as scheduled on the plans. L. Vibration Isolation: 898-14A AIR CONDITIONING 15650-2 AIR CONDITIONING CONT 1. The refrigeration compressors and the indoor fan system shall have all rotating parts spring ' isolated from the unit cabinet to minimize transmission of vibration. Fan motors 1/2 H.P. and under shall be resiliently mounted. 2.3 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A. Basic Unit Control System: 1. Each unit shall be equipped with a positive fan start device on a call for heat. 2. The condensing units shall be furnished with time off cycle devices to prevent short cycling of the compressors. They shall also have high -low pressure cutouts, 3 leg overload protection and internal thermostats in the compressor to limit winding and discharge temperature to safe limits. Units shall be capable of cooling in low ambient conditions. 3. Refrigerant control shall be by thermostatic expansion valves. 4. In addition to the above, contactors, relays and safety devices necessary for a complete operational system shall be furnished. 5. Units shall be controlled by programmable touchscreen thermostats, equal to Honeywell T138220U, with remote space temperature sensors, as indicated on the drawings. 6. The units serving the auditorium shall have CO2 ventilation controllers, as indicated on the drawings. 2.4 WARRANTIES A. All heating and air conditioning equipment shall have a five year warranty on compressors, 10 years on heat exchangers and 1 year on all other parts. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ADJUSTMENT A. Upon completion of work the Contractor shall balance the system so that the quantity and proper velocity of air is delivered at each outlet uniformly as indicated on the drawings to within ten percent (10%). Necessary adjustment shall be made to the system to produce these quantities of air, and to eliminate any objectional drafts or noise which might exist. Balance adjustments shall be made upstream of the registers and diffusers, leaving the O.B.D. in each grille neck fully open. B. When balancing has been completed, the Contractor shall provide the Architect with all necessary data, readings, and velocities at each outlet to substantiate that the systems are balanced and providing the necessary quantities of air as shown on the drawings. END OF SECTION 898-14A AIR CONDITIONING 15650-3 1' SECTION 15804 - VENTILATING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this section of the specifications shall include the furnishing of all labor and materials as required for the installation of a complete ventilating system and its related work. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EXHAUST SYSTEM A. Furnish and install an exhaust system all as shown on the drawings. B. Provide exhaust ducts, properly flashed and waterproofed as shown. C. All ceiling mounted fans shall be Cook, Greenheck, Acme, or approved equal, of size and capacity as shown on the drawings. Fan housing shall have a baked powder painted finish. All units shall be equipped with a backdraft damper, and all exhaust ducts shall extend to the outside, properly flashed and waterproofed. Fans shall be provided with an aluminum egg crate style grille, a speed controller for system balancing, and vibration isolators. D. All roof -mounted exhaust fans shall be aluminum construction as manufactured by Greenheck, Cook, Acme, or approved equal. Fans shall be complete with bird screens, disconnect switches, roof curbs, and backdraft dampers. Roof curbs shall be fabricated to accommodate the roof pitch as shown on the architectural drawings. E. Fan shaft bearings, for belt drive fans, shall be heavy duty regreaseable ball type in cast iron housings. F. All fans with direct drive motors shall be provided with solid state speed controllers for system balance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The exhaust systems shall be installed complete with all ductwork, fans and controls as shown on the drawings. B. All roof mounted units shall be mounted on roof curbs and secured by sheetmetal screws. 898-14A VENTILATING 15804-1 1 �_a 1, " VENTILATING. CONT C. Exhaust fans shall be controlled by wall mounted switches, interlocked with light switches, or controlled by temperature sensing devices, all as scheduled on the drawings. END OF SECTION 15804 898-1.4A r- VENTMATING 15804-2 f . SECTION 15840 - DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL l 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishings of all material and labor as required for the installation of a complete duct system, as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW VELOCITY - LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. All ductwork shall be of the sizes indicated on the drawings, shall be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished airtight joints. The ducts shall be installed as to be completely free of vibration. Metal duct slip joints shall be made with an inside radius of not less than the width of the duct, except that Factory Fabricated Air Turns shall be used where a sharper turn must be made or where otherwise indicated on the drawings. All takeoffs to registers shall be made with Factory Fabricated Deflectrols, or approved equal, and all major branches where noted on the plans shall have splitters with an accessible operating handle and locking device, Young Model No. 917 right angle gear and No. 1 ceiling regulator, or approved equal. B. All ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized iron sheets fabricated and installed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for Low Velocity Systems. C. Air turns shall be as manufactured by Barber -Colman, or approved equal. No job -built turning vanes 1" will be used on this job. Where insulation is applied inside of ducts, turning vanes shall be installed inside of insulation. D. After all ducts are installed, all dirt and debris shall be removed from inside of ducts. E. Ductwork for round ducts shall conform to the latest edition ASHRAE guide. F. All duct construction seam corners and connections shall be sealed with white "Permagum Slugs" as manufactured by Virginia Chemicals, Inc. G. All ductwork shall be made airtight and reinforced as required for pressures as shown on the drawings. H. All dimensions indicated shall be sheet metal dimensions. Allowance shall be made for internal insulation as it occurs, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS 898-14A DUCTWORK 15840-1 1 Ij " DUCTWORK, CONT A. Access doors in ductwork shall be 2" smaller in height than duct dimensions and 12" wide and located in accessible locations on both sides of all fire and smoke dampers. Doors in vertical position shall be equal to Ventlok insulated type, complete with all hinges, hardware and air seal. Doors in horizontal position shall be job built complete with sash lock, two (2) per side, and rubber air seal, all as manufactured by Ventlok, or approved equal. 2.3 ZONE VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Volume control dampers shall be furnished and installed where shown on the drawings for all air unit zone ducts with locking operator installed on bottom side of ducts. B. Dampers shall be the opposed blade type with corner bracing for stiffening as manufactured by Young Regulator Co., Model No. 817, or approved equal, of size shown on the drawings. C. Spin -In taps shall be equal to Dace #MSD-COS. With ROSSI seven position manual volume control. 2.4 FIBER DUCTWORK A. Fiber ductwork will not be used on this job anywhere. 2.5 LOW PRESSURE FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Furnish and install flexible connections of 30 ounce woven glass fabric from discharge and return openings of equipment to ductwork. The flexible connections shall be of a type that is airtight, equal to Ventfabrics "Ventglas", and shall be installed in such a manner that the air flow is not restricted nor the connection leaks air. At least 1" slack shall be allowed in connection to insure that no vibration is transmitted from fans to ductwork. B. Fabric connections shall be UL approved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All duct systems shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and shall provide a complete and working system. B. Hangers for ductwork shall be galvanized steel straps and/or electro-plated zinc or hot -dipped galvanized after threading, threaded rods, minimum of 3/8" diameter. C. Hangers shall be spaced a maximum of 8'-0" on center. D. When threaded hanger rods are used, bearing plate shall be on channel and/or angle, hot -dipped galvanized after cutting, and drilling of hanger rod holes. E. Hanger rods shall be secured to channels and/or angle by galvanized washer, nut, and locket nut. Hanger rods shall be suspended from super -structure. 3.2 CLEANING A. After installation is complete, all equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. Filters shall be cleaned and/or replaced with new. Damaged paint shall be sanded and touched -up. All damaged insulation shall be replaced. END OF SECTION 15840 898-14A DUCTWORK 15840-2 SECTION 15870 - GRILLES, REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS PART I - GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this section of the specification includes the furnishing of all labor and materials as required for the installation of a complete air diffusing system as shown on the drawings, and as hereinafter specified. All side wall grilles, supply and returns, shall comply with NFPA Standard No. 90A. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SIDE WALL REGISTERS A. All side wall registers shall be extruded aluminum with removable cores. 2.2 CEILING SUPPLY DIFFUSERS A. Ceiling supply diffusers, except where shown on the drawings and/or specified, shall be as shown on the drawings. All diffusers shall be equipped with deflectrols and opposed blade volume controls operated from the face of the diffusers. B. Ceiling diffusers shall be of the removable core type for 1, 2, 3 or 4-way deflection as shown on the drawings. 2.3 CEILING RETURN AIR GRILLES A. Ceiling return air grilles shall be all as shown on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GUARANTEE A. This Contractor shall ensure that the grilles, registers and diffusers are recommended by the manufacturer for the installation in the surfaces as shown and the application shown. END OF SECTION 15870 898-14A GRILLES, REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS 15870-1 City of Lubbock, TX Purchasing and Contract Management Contractor Checklist for r- RFP 15-12208-MA Before submitting your bid, please ensure you have completed and included the following documents in the order they are listed. The contractor is only to submit (1) one original copy of every item listed. X Carefully read and understand the plans and specifications and properly complete the BID SUBMITTAL FORM. Bid submittal form MUST be completed in blue or black ink or by typewriter. Signatures must be original, in blue or black ink, and by hand. The bidder binds himself on acceptance of his bid to execute a contract and any required bonds, according to the accompanying forms, for performing and completing the said work within the time stated and for the prices stated below. Include corporate seal and Secretary's signature. Identify addenda received (if any). Include firm's FEDERAL TAX ID number or Owner's SOCIAL SECURITY number. 2. X Include BID BOND or CASHIER'S OR CERTIFIED CHECK as your bid surety. Failure to provide a bid surety WILL result in automatic rejection of your bid. 3. X Complete and sign the CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT. This must include the signature of the agent or broker. Contractor's signature must be original. 4. X Clearly mark the bid number, title, due date and time and your company naine and address on the outside of the envelope or container. 5. X Ensure your bid is RECEIVED by the City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office prior to the deadline. Late bids will not be accepted. 6. X Complete and sign the SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE. All "YES" responses must be explained in detail and submitted with Bid. 7. X Complete and sign the SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION. Include firm's FEDERAL TAX ID number or Owner's SOCIAL SECURITY number. 8. X Complete and submit the PROPOSED LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS. DOCUMENTS REQUIRED WITHIN SEVEN BUSINESS DAYS AFTER CLOSING: 9. X Complete and submit the FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS. FAILURE TO PROVIDE ANY OF THE ABOVE MAY RESULT IN YOUR BID BEING DEEMED NON -RESPONSIVE AND, THEREFORE, NOT FURTHER EVALUATED. PLEASE INCLUDE THIS COMPLETED PAGE AS THE FIRST PAGE OF YOUR BID SUBMITTAL. PHARR do COMPANY (Type or Print Company Name) Pau Intentionally Left Blank INDEX NOTICE TO OFFERORS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE § 2269 PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM — (must be submitted by published due date & time) 4-1. LUMP SUM PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM 4-2. CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS 4-3. CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT 4-4. SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE 4-5. SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION 4-6. PROPOSED LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS POST -CLOSING DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS — (to be submitted no later than seven business days after the close date when proposals are due) 5-1. FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS PAYMENT BOND PERFORMANCE BOND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT DAVIS-BACON WAGE DETERMINATIONS SPECIAL CONDITIONS (IF APPLICABLE) SPECIFICATIONS Paae Intentionally Left Blank L_. NOTICE TO OFFERORS Paue Intentionally Left Blank NOTICE TO OFFERORS RFP 15-12208-MA Sealed proposals addressed to Marta Alvarez, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be 6i received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, City Hall, 1625 13th Street, Room 204, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 3:00 p.m. on April 1, 2015 or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: "Renovations to the Senior Citizens Center " After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened in the =office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the proposer to ensure that his proposal is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. The Contractor is only required to submit one original copy of every item listed on the Contractor Checklist in the proposal submittal. Proposals are due at 3:00 p.m. on April 1, 201.5 , and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the proposals on May 14, 2015 at the City Hall, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all proposals and waive any formalities. The successful proposer will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds i $100,000 and the successful proposer will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $50,000. Said statutory bonds shall be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of "A" or better. The bond must be in a form accepted by the City Attorney and must be dated the same as the Contract Award date. Offerors are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the proposal submitted as a guarantee that proposer will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds within ten (10) business days after notice of award of the contract to the Offerror. FAILURE OF THE PROPOSER TO INCLUDE PROPOSAL SECURITY WITH THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL SHALL CONSTITUTE A NON -RESPONSIVE PROPOSAL AND RESULT IN DISQUALIFICATION OF THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL. It shall be each proposer's sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform Offerror regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the proposal submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre -proposal conference on March 16, 2015 at 11:00 a.m., in Committee Room 103, at City Hall 1625 13 1h Street, Lubbock, Texas. i Offerors may view the plans and specifications without charge at The Reproduction Company, 2102 Avenue Q, Lubbock, Texas 79405 or at http:ffpr.theroroductioncompany.conV . ONE SET OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS MAY BE OBTAINED, AT THE CITY'S EXPENSE, FROM THE REPRODUCTION COMPANY WITH A $100 REFUNDABLE DEPOSIT, Phone: (806) 763-7770. �t Deposit Checks shall be made PAYABLE TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, and will be refunded if documents E i Pa2e Intentionally Left Blank are returned in good condition within Sixty (60) days of the opening of Proposals. Additional sets of plans and t: specifications may be obtained at the proposer's expense. Attention of each proposer is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing and Contract Management Office of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to offerors. Each offerors attention is further directed to Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates, and the -, requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all offerors that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit proposals in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre - proposal meetings and proposal openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you require special assistance, please contact the Purchasing and Contract Management Office at (806) 775-2175 write to Post Office Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK, .Marta-ACvarez Marta Alvarez DIRECTOR OF PURCHASING AND CONTRACT MANAGEMENT Pate Intentionally Left Blank GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS Page Intentionally Left Blank GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS i 1 PROPOSAL DELIVERY TIME & DATE The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive proposals to furnish Renovations to the Senior Citizens Center per the attached specifications and contract documents. Sealed proposals will be received no later than 3:00 p.m. on April 1, 2015 at the office listed below. Any proposal received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the proposer. Each proposal and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the lower left-hand corner: "RFP 15-12208-MA, Renovations to the Senior Citizens Center " and the proposal opening date and time. Offerors must also include their company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Proposals must be addressed to: Marta Alvarez, Director of Purchasing and Contract Management City of Lubbock 1625 13th Street, Room 204 Lubbock, Texas 79401 1.1 Offerors are responsible for making certain proposals are delivered to the Purchasing Contract Managers Office. Mailing of a proposal does not ensure that it will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If proposer does not hand deliver proposal, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. r 1.2 Proposals may be delivered in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier service. Only written proposals submitted in conformance with the Instruction to Offerrors will be considered responsive and evaluated or award of a Contract. 1.3 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening proposals through an addendum. 2 PRE -PROPOSAL MEETING ' For the purpose of familiarizing offerors with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda as needed for the clarification of the Request for Proposals (RFP) docu vents, a non- mandatory nre-nronosal conference will be held at on March lb. 2015 at 11:00 a.m.. in 2.1 All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective proposer they represent. 2.2 It is the proposer's responsibility to attend the pre -proposal meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre - proposal meeting to offerors who do not attend the pre -proposal meeting. 2.3 3 ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the RFP are made by ADDENDA information available over the Internet at www.bidsyiic.com. We strongly suggest that you check for any addenda a minimum of forty-eight hours in advance of the response deadline. BUSINESSES WITHOUT INTERNET ACCESS may use computers available at most public libraries. 1 3.2 Any proposer in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing Manager. At the request of the proposer, or in the event the Purchasing Manager deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing Manager. Such addenda issued by the Purchasing Manager Office will be available over the Internet at hqp://www.bidsync.com and will become part of the proposal package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original RFP. NO VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Manager Office no later than seven (7) calendar days before the proposal closing date. 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any explanation or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Manager Office in writing or in this RFP should be used in preparing proposal responses. All contacts that a proposer may have had before or after receipt of this RFP with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this proposal should be disregarded in preparing responses. 3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to offerors. 4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Each proposer shall carefully examine all RFP documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all requirements before submitting a proposal to ensure that their proposal meets the intent of these specifications. 4.2 Before submitting a proposal, each proposer shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Request for Proposals. Failure to snake such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the proposer from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Request for Proposals. 4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Purchasing Manager and a clarification obtained before the proposals are received, and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing Manager prior to the opening of proposals, then it shall be deemed that the proposer fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If proposer does not notify the Purchasing Manager before offering of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than seven (7) calendar days prior to the opening of proposals. 5 PROPOSAL PREPARATION COSTS 5.1 Issuance of this RFP does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the preparation and submission of a proposal._ 5.2 The issuance of this RFP does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or equipment. J 2 5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a proposal shall be paid by the proposer. i 6 TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT 6.1 If you consider any portion of your proposal to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions. 6.2 Proposals will be opened in a manner that avoids disclosure of the contents to competing offerors ' and keeps the proposals secret during negotiations. All proposals are open for public inspection after the contract is awarded, but trade secrets and confidential information in the proposals are not open for inspection. Tex. Loc. Govt. Code 252.049(b) t 6.3 Marking your entire proposal CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open Records Act. 7 LICENSES PERMITS TAXES The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the proposer is or may be required to pay. 8 UTILIZATION OF LOCAL BUSINESS RESOURCES Prospective offerors are strongly encouraged to explore and implement methods for the utilization of local resources, and to outline in their proposal submittal how they would utilize local resources. 9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST 9.1 The proposer shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. 9.2 By signing and executing this proposal, the proposer certifies and represents to the City the offeror has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this proposal. 10 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 10.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. 10.2 All offerors shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 11 PLANS FOR USE BY OFFERORS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a proposal on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a proposal without charge. The contract documents may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Offerors. .: 12 PROPOSER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 12.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive proposals. It shall be the offerors responsibility to advise the Purchasing Manager if any 3 13 14 15 16 language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this RFP to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City Purchasing Manager Office no later than seven (7) calendar days before the proposal closing date. A review of such notifications will be made. 12.2 NO PROPOSER ` SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION CONCERNING THIS REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING NO LATER THAN SEVEN (7)CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE PROPOSAL CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO: Marta Alvarez, Director of Purchasing and Contract Management City of Lubbock Purchasing and Contract Management Office 1625 13'' Street, Room 204 Lubbock, Texas 79401 Fax: 806-775-2164 Email: 1nalvarez_0imvlubbock.us Bidsync: www.bidsine.com TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION 13.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be substantially completed within TWO HUNDRED AND SEVENTY (270) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful proposer. 13.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor , to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no ` claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. L MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and ; grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying 1. with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents ' provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 17 GUARANTEES 17.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within TWO years from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 17.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 17.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub -contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. 17.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 18 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will, upon written request, be furnished up to a maximum of ten sets of plans and specifications and related contract documents for use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 19 PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City 5 i_ i c 21 22 23 24 25 } reserves the right, after the proposals have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a proposer the following information: I (a) The experience record of the proposer showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage -x completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the proposer. (c) Equipment schedule. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 20.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 20.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures, both known and unknown, cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, and/or the owning utility at the Contractor's expense. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. EXPLOSIVES 23.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted 23.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful proposer shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful proposer shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. INSURANCE 0 25.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted before contract execution. 26 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 26.1 Attention of each proposer is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem. wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The proposer' attention is further directed to the requirements of Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates, providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the proposer's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in the contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on Sundays or holidays unless the following conditions exist: 26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 26.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on Sundays or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on Sundays or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 26.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 27 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors shall keep a record showing the name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or subcontractor in the construction of the public work and the actual per diem wages paid to each worker. This record shall be open at all reasonable hours i 29 to inspection by the officers and agents of the City. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, $200 for each laborer, workman or mechanic employed for each calendar day, portion thereof, such laborer, workman Y� or or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. House Bill 2015, signed by the Governor on June 14, 2013 and effective on January 1, 2014, authorizes a penalty to be imposed on a person who contracts for certain services with a governmental entity and t who fails to properly classify their workers. This applies to subcontractors as well. Contractors and subcontractors who fail to properly classify individuals performing work under a governmental contract will be penalized $200 for each individual that has been misclassified (Texas Government Code Section 2155.001). PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated proposal price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be -11 rejected and returned to the proposer without being considered. PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL 29.1 The form shall be correctly filled in, stating the price in numerals for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the unit price and the extended total for a bid item, the unit price will be taken. A bid that has been opened may not be bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City, and all blank spaces in the changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. 29.2 If the proposal is submitted by an individual, his naive must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the proposal signed by a member of the firm, - association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or - others to sign proposals must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink. 29.3 Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Offerors, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: 29.3.1 Proposer's name ._ 29.3.2 Proposal RFP 15-12208-MA, Renovations to the Senior Citizens Center " Proposal submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the proposals, but no proposal may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 29.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(g), a competitive sealed proposal that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the proposal price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE PROPOSAL PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO PROPOSAL OPENING. 30 BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Proposer understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by proposer shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Offerors. (b) General Instructions to Offerors. (c) Proposer's Submittal Form. (d) Statutory Bonds (if required). ( (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates for Contractor and all Sub -Contractors. (j) All other documents made available to proposer for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. ` 31 QUALIFICATIONS OF OFFERORS The proposer may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The proposer may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the proposer's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the proposer to perform the work, and the proposer shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The proposer's proposal may be deemed not to meet specifications or the proposal may be rejected if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the proposer fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the proposer is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the proposer's -< qualifications shall include but not be limited to: (a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service �.n required. (b) The ability of the proposer to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the proposer. (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. (e) The safety record of the Contractor and proposed Sub -Contractors (f) The experience and qualifications of key project personnel (g) Past experience with the Owner Before contract award, the recommended contractor for this project may be required to show that he has experience with similar projects that require the Contractor to plan his work efforts and equipment needs f_ 32 with City of Lubbock specifications in mind. Demonstration of experience shall include a complete list of ALL similar municipal and similar non -municipal current and completed projects for the past five (5) years for review. This list shall include the names of supervisors and type of equipment used to perform work on these projects. In addition, the Contractor may be required to provide the name(s) of supervisor(s) that will be used to perform work on this project in compliance with City of Lubbock specifications herein. BASIS OF PROPOSALS AND SELECTION CRITERIA The City uses the Competitive Sealed Proposals procurement method as authorized by the Texas Legislature and further defined by Texas Local Government Code Section 271.116. The Maximum Point value is equal to 100 points. The weight factor is 60% for Price, 30% for Contractor Qualifications, 5% for Safety Record, and 5% for Construction Time. The selection criteria used to evaluate each proposal includes the following: 32.1 60% PRICE: The quality of Offerors is not judged solely by a low initial cost proposal or, conversely, eliminated solely because of a high initial cost proposal. The following is the formula used when determining price as a factor for construction contract proposals. The lowest proposal price of all the proposals becomes the standard by which all price proposals are evaluated. One at a time, each proposal is evaluated by taking the lowest proposal price and dividing it by the price of the proposal being evaluated. That fraction is then multiplied by the maximum point value multiplied by the weight of the price factor for the price score. For Example: (Lowest Price/Current Proposal Price) x Maximum Point Value x Weight Factor = Price Score. 32.2 20% CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS: When evaluating a contractor's qualifications, the City uses the "Contractor's Statement of Qualifications" attached within and past experience with the contractor. The City may also interview the job superintendent at a time to be named after receipt of proposals. This criterion is subjectively evaluated and the formula is as follows: (Points X Weight = Score) with a maximum of five points allowable. Each evaluator assigns points based upon the responses the contractor provides in the "Contractor's Statement of Qualifications" And any past experience with the contractor. The "Contractor's Statement of Qualifications" is a minimum, and you may provide additional pertinent information relevant to the project for which you are submitting this proposal. 32.3 10% SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE: This criterion is also more subjectively evaluated and the formula is as follows: (Points X Weight = Score) with a maximum of five points allowable. Each evaluator assigns points based upon the responses you provide in your "Safety Record Questionnaire" and the Contractors Experience Modification Ratio. The Contractor must submit this ratio with his bid. Contractors with an Experience Modification Ratio greater than 1 will not be considered. The City may consider any incidence involving worker safety or safety of Lubbock residents, be it related or caused by environmental, mechanical, operational, supervision or any other cause or factor under the contractor's control. Evaluators base their rating primarily upon how well you document previous offenses with the date of the offense, location where the offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of the offense, and any penalty assessed as well as the Experience Modification Ratio. 10 32.4 10% CONSTRUCTION TIME: This criterion is, as with price, objective and evaluators use the following formula when determining construction time as a factor for construction contract 1. proposals. The lowest construction time proposal of all the proposals becomes the standard by which all the construction time proposals are evaluated. One at a time, each proposal is evaluated by taking the lowest construction time and dividing it by the construction time of the proposal being evaluated. That fraction is then multiplied by the maximum point value 3 multiplied by the weight of the construction time factor for the construction time score. For example: (Lowest construction time/Current Proposal construction time) x Maximum Point Value x Weight Factor = Construction Time Score 32.5 EVALUATION PROCESS: Evaluators independently review and score each proposal. The committee meets, during which time the Committee Chairperson totals the individual scores. If the individual scores are similar, the Chairperson averages the scores then ranks offerors accordingly. If the scores are significantly diverse, the Chairperson initiates and moderates discussion to determine the reasons for the differences and ensures that all evaluators are fully knowledgeable of all aspects of the proposals. Scores may then be adjusted by the committee based on committee discussion. Please note that offerors with higher qualifications scores could be ranked higher than offerors with slightly better price scores. The estimated budget for the construction phase of this project is 1,400,000 Proposals shall be made using the enclosed Proposal Submittal Form. 33 SELECTION 33.1 Selection shall be based on the responsible offeror whose proposal is determined to be the most advantageous to the City of Lubbock considering the relative importance of evaluation factors included in this RFP. 33.2 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT (CITY OF LUBBOCK WATER UTILITIES OR OTHER) HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL. 33.3 The City shall select the offeror that offers the best value for the City based on the published selection criteria and on its ranking evaluation. The City shall first attempt to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror. The City and its engineer or architect may discuss with the selected offeror options for a scope or time modification and any price change associated with the modification. If the City is unable to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror, the City shall, formally and in writing, end negotiations with that offeror and proceed to the next offeror in the order of the selection ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected. 33.4 In determining best value for the City, the City is not restricted to considering price alone, but may consider any other factor stated in the selection criteria. 33.5 A proposal will be subject to being considered irregular and may be rejected if it shows omissions, alterations of form, conditional alternate proposals, additions or alternates in lieu of the items specified. r- 11 34. 35 ANTI -LOBBYING PROVISION 34.1 DURING THE PERIOD BETWEEN PROPOSAL SUBMISSION DATE AND THE CONTRACT AWARD, PROPOSERS, INCLUDING THEIR AGENTS AND REPRESENTATIVES, SHALL NOT DISCUSS OR PROMOTE THEIR PROPOSAL WITH ANY MEMBER OF THE LUBBOCK CITY COUNCIL OR CITY STAFF EXCEPT UPON THE REQUEST OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK PURCHASING DEPARTMENT IN THE COURSE OF CITY -SPONSORED INQUIRIES, BRIEFINGS, INTERVIEWS, OR PRESENTATIONS. fig: 34.2 This provision is not meant to preclude bidders from discussing other matters with City Council members or City staff. This policy is intended to create a level playing field for all potential bidders, assure that contract decisions are made in public, and to protect the integrity of the bid process. Violation of this provision may result in rejection of the bidder's bid. PREVAILING WAGE RATES 35.1 Offerors are required to comply with Texas Government Code, Chapter 2258, Prevailing Wage Rates, with respect to the payment of prevailing wage rates for the construction of a public work, including a building, highway, road, excavation, and repair work or other project development or improvement, paid for in whole or in part from public funds, without regard to whether the work is done under public supervision or direction. A worker is employed on a public work if the worker is employed by the contractor or any subcontractor in the execution of the contract for the project. 35.2 A worker employed on a public work by or on behalf of the City of Lubbock shall be paid not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for the work of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed, and not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for legal holiday and overtime work. 35.3 The State of Texas has adopted the Federal Davis -Bacon wage rates for use in Texas pursuant to and in accordance with the Texas Government Code, Section 2258.022. Bidders may access the U. S. Department of Labor web site at the following web address to obtain the rates to be used in Lubbock County: http:/l,%,,�x,w.wdol.g_ovldba.aspx 35.4 It shall be the responsibility of the successful offeror to obtain the proper wage rates from the web site for the type of work defined in the bid specifications. 35.5 A contractor or subcontractor who violates Texas Government Code Section 2258.023 shall pay to the City of Lubbock $60 for each worker employed for each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the contract. i j f �f 12 TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE $ 2269 SELECTING CONTRACTOR FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES THROUGH COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSALS (a) In selecting a contractor through competitive sealed proposals for construction, rehabilitation, alteration, or repair services for a facility or for construction of a project to which Section 252.043(d-1) applies, a governmental entity shall follow the procedures prescribed by this section. (a-1) In this section "facility" means an improvement to real property. (b) The governmental entity shall select or designate an engineer or architect to prepare construction documents for the project. The selected or designated engineer or architect has full responsibility for complying with Chapter 1001 or 1051, Occupations Code, as applicable. If the engineer or architect is not a full-time employee of the governmental entity, the governmental entity shall select the engineer or architect on the basis of demonstrated competence and qualifications as provided by Section 2254.004, Government Code. (c) The governmental entity shall provide or contract for, independently of the contractor, the inspection services, the testing of construction materials engineering, and the verification testing services necessary for acceptance of the facility or project by the governmental entity. The governmental entity shall select those services for which it contracts in accordance with Section 2254.004, Government Code, and shall identify them in the request for proposals. (d) The governmental entity shall prepare a request for competitive sealed proposals that includes construction documents, selection criteria, estimated budget, project scope, schedule, and other information that contractors may require to respond to the request. The governmental entity shall state in the request for proposals the selection criteria that will be used in selecting the successful offeror. (e) The governmental entity shall receive, publicly open, and read aloud the names of the offerors and, if any are required to be stated, all prices stated in each proposal. Not later than the 45th day after the date of opening the proposals, the governmental entity shall evaluate and rank each proposal submitted in relation to the published selection criteria. (f) The governmental entity shall select the offeror that offers the best value for the governmental entity based on the published selection criteria and on its ranking evaluation. The governmental entity shall first attempt to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror. The governmental entity and its engineer or architect may discuss with the selected offeror options for a scope or time modification and any price change associated with the modification. If the governmental entity is unable to negotiate a contract with the selected offeror, the governmental entity shall, formally and in writing, end negotiations with that offeror and proceed to the next offeror in the order of the selection ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected. (g) In determining best value for the governmental entity, the governmental entity is not restricted to fi_y considering price alone, but may consider any other factor stated in the selection criteria. Paae Intentionafly Left Blank PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM Page Intentionally Left Blank PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM LUMP SUM PROPOSAL CONTRACT RFP 15-12208-MA DATE: April 1, 2015 PROJECT NUMBER: -RFP 15-12208-MA Proposal of Pharr do Company (hereinafter called Offeror) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Ladies and Gentlemen: Renovations to the Senior Citizens Center The Offeror, in compliance with your Request for Proposals for the Renovations of the Renovations to the Senior Citizens Center having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to offerors, notice to offerors and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the renovations of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to renovate the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in perfonning the work required under the contract documents. RAW. PROPOSAL ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT MATERIALS LABOR TOTAL PRICE 1 Renovations to the Senior LS $484 , 800.00 $ 7 27 , 200.00 $1, 212 , 000.00 Citizens Center TOTAL PROPOSAL ITEMS #1: ($-1,212, 000.00 ------ One Million -Two Hundred:.' Twelve Thousand DURATION 1. Number of days required for construction (-1 A "-nygr"TV AT 'Iru" T A gry Y{IYl YY . YI C1iJ 3 .-.Y�. V11 YJLi TOTAL CALENDAR DAYS: ®" ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT MATERIALS LABOR TOTAL Provide and install LED light fixtures in lieu of 2x4 1 fluorescent light fixtures. Refer LS $ 7 , 400.00 $11,100.00 $18 , 500.00 to sheet E1.0. Eighteen Thousand Five Hundred TOTAL ADDITIVE ALTERNATE#1: ($18,500------------- ) ?-P Offeror's Initials Offeror hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to substantially complete the project within (*79) Days Completed by Contractor 250 (TWO HUNDRED AND SEVENTY ) Written Days Completed by Contractor CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Offeror hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $150 (ONE HUNDRED AND FIFTY DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Offeror understands and agrees that this proposal submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 29 of the General Instructions to Offerors. Offeror understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals and to waive any formality in the proposing. The Offeror agrees that this proposal shall be good for a period of sixty (60) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving proposals. The undersigned Offeror hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this proposal, and he further agrees to commence work on the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has proposed; as provided in the contract documents. Offerors are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the proposal submitted as a guarantee that offeror will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within ten (10) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Offeror's Initials 2_ . f Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for N/A .................................... OntI rs- fS-------------) or a Proposal Bond in the sum of Five Percent of Total Bid AsnouD411ars ($ 5%-------- ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) business days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Offeror understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Offeror shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(g), a competitive sealed proposal that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the proposal price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE PROPOSAL PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO PROPOSAL OPENING. (Seal if Offeror is a Corporation) b__retary y R- Pharr Oeror acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. 1 Date 3/18/15 Addenda No. 2 Date 3/30/15 Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Date: April 1, 2015 �L� /K orized Si Lure jimmy R. Pharr (Printed or Typed Name) Pharr & Company Company P ® Box 2791 Address Lubbock Lubbock City, County Texas 79408 State Zip Code Telephone: 806 _ 763-5263 Fax: 806 - 763-5843 Email: jianmyftharreo.coin FEDERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY No. T5-218T285 MIWBE Firm: Woman Black American Native American Hispanic American Asian Pacific American Other S ecif ) Any entity or person that manufactures, distributes, converts new motor vehicles (or represents an entity that manufactures, distributes, or converts new motor vehicles) or is in the business of buying, exchanging, or selling new motor vehicles is required under the Tex. Occ. Code. Chapter 2301 to be licensed by Motor Vehicle Division of the Texas Department of Transportation. In order for a bid to be in compliance with the Motor Vehicle Commission Code, the bidder must hold and provide all applicable current valid licenses issued by the State of Texas: 1. Name N/A and Manufacture's License No. N/A _s 2. Name N/A and Converter's License No. N/A 3. Name N/A and Representative's License No. N/A 4. Name N/A and Franchise Dealer's License No. N/A } General Distin ishing No. �11 J _ (Franchised TX dealer) r. By Date: April 1, 2015 Author r epresentatz A - must sign by hand Officer Name and Title: jimmy R. Pharr Vice President Please Print Business Telephone Number 806-763-5263 FAX: 806-763-5843 E-mail Address: lintsny@pharrco.cosn FOR CITY USE ONLY Bid Form Item Number(s) Awarded to Above Named Firm/Individual: Date of Award by City Council (for bids over $50, 000): Date P.O./Contract Issued: RETURN COMPLETED & SIGNED BID FORM ALONG WITH CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS. LABEL THE OUTSIDE OF YOUR SEALED BID WITH THE ITB NUMBER, THE CLOSING DATE AND TIME, AND YOUR COMPANY NAME AND ADDRESS. 4 : s CONTRACTORS STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS Individual contractors and joint ventures submitting a bid must complete the following evaluation information for the Project. Joint ventures shall be composed of not more than two firms and each firm must complete separate evaluations. Evaluation information must be submitted at time of bid submittal. Failure to submit the following Bidder Evaluation information may result in the OWNER considering the bid non -responsive and result in rejection of the bid by the OWNER. Bidders are to provide any additional information requested by the OWNER. In evaluating a firm's qualifications, the following major factors will be considered: A. FINANCIAL CAPABILITY: For this project, the CONTRACTOR`S financial capability to undertake the project will be determined by the CONTRACTOR'S ability to secure bonding satisfactory to the OWNER. B. EXPERIENCE: Do the organization and key personnel have appropriate technical experience on similar projects? Refer to atached Current and Completed Projects and Key C. SAFETY: Personnelresumes. Does the organization stress and suprt safety as an important function of the work process? Refer Coiproposal-Contractor's Project Experience & Resources (pg. 13 - #6) D. QUALITY OF WORK: Project Site Safety - Response. Company Safety Policy also available upon request. (1) Does the organization have a commitment to quality in every facet of their work - the process as well as the product? (2) Does the organization have a written quality philosophy and/or principles that exemplifies their work? If so, submit as Attachment "A". (3) Has this organization ever received an award or been recognized for doing "quality" work on a project? If so, give details under Attachment "A". YES, See attached Texas Tech West Hall article and the Midland County Centennial Library. E. CONFORMANCE TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: (1) Does the organization have a commitment and philosophy to construct projects as designed and as defined in the Contract Documents? Pharr & Company has never failed to fulfill the terms of any contract with an Owner. The OWNER reserves the right to waive irregularities in determining the firm's qualifications and reserves the right to require the submission of additional information. The qualifications of a firm shall not deprive the OWNER of the right to accept a bid, which in its judgement is the lowest and best bid, to reject any and all bids, to waive irregularities in the bids, or to reject nonconforming, non- responsive, or conditional bids. In addition, the OWNER reserves the right to reject any bid where circumstances and developments have in the opinion of the OWNER changed the qualifications or responsibility of the firm. f Material misstatements on the qualifications forms may be grounds for rejection of the firm's bid on this project. Any such misstatement, if discovered after award of the contract to such firm, may be grounds for immediate termination of the contract. Additionally, the firm will be liable to the OWNER for any additional costs or damages to the OWNER resulting from such misstatements, including costs and attorney's fees for collecting such costs and damages. r Complete the following information for your organization: Contractor's General Information Organization Doing Business As Pharr do Company 907 N Avenue Q Drive Business Address of Principle Office Lubbock, Texas T9408 Telephone Numbers Main Number 806-763-S263 Fax Number 806-763-S843 Web Site Address www.pharrandcornpany.corn Form of Business (Check One) 4 ! Date of Incorporation X A Corporation A Partnership An Individual 1987 State of Incorporation Texas Chief Executive Officer's Name N/A President's Name John K. Pharr I Vice President'sName(s) R. Pharr Secretary's Name Jimmy R. Pharr Treasurer's Name Jimmy R. Pharr Date of Organization N/A State whether partnership is general or I NIA limited Name I NIA Business Address NIA Average Number of Current Full Time I 35 Employees 6 Average Estimate of Revenue for 1 $23 Million the Current Year Contractor's Organizational Experience Organization Doing Business As Pharr & Company Business Address of Regional Office NIA Name of Regional Office Manager NIA Telephone Numbers NIA Main Number NIA Fax Number NIA Web Site Address NIA List of names that this organization currently, has or anticipates operating under over the history of the organization, including the names of related companies presently doing business: Names of Organization From Date To Date Pharr and Pharr Enterprises 1976 1984 Pharr Construction Company, Inc. 1984 1987 Pharr and Company 1987 Current List of companies, firms or organizations that own any part of the organization. Name of companies, firms or organization Percent Ownership NIA Years experience in projects similar to the proposed project: As a General Contractor 1 38 1 As a Joint Venture Partner NIA Has this or a predecessor organization ever defaulted on a project or failed to complete any work awarded to it? No If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Has this or a predecessor organization been released from a bid or proposal in the past ten ears? No If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Has this or a predecessor organization ever been disqualification as a bidder or proposer by any local state or federal agency within the last five ears? No If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Is this organization or your proposed surety currently in any litigation or contemplating litigation? No If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. Has this or a predecessor organization ever refused to construct or refused to provide materials defined in the contract documents? No If yes provide full details in a separate attachment. See attachment No. I Contractor's Proposed Key Personnel Organization Doing Business As Pharr dt Company Provide a brief description of the managerial structure of the organization and illustrate with an organizational cart. Include the title and names of key personnel. Include this chart at an attachment to this description. See attachment No. A TEAMWORK! Our goal is to accomplish teamwork with Owners, Architects and Subcontr to produce a winning and successful project. We strive to accomplish this by using expe competent superintendents and reputable subcontractors. With this winning combinati we will build your construction project with skill and integrity, completing the work on schedule and at the best price. Safety is Number 1 on all our projects and is impiemente every aspect of our construction. PHARR & COMPANY pledges to give you this winning combination of teamwork to produce a superior project of excellence. * Organizational Chart attached Provide a brief description of the managerial structure proposed for this project and illustrate with an organizational cart. Include the title and names of proposed key personnel and alternates. Include this chart at an attachment to this description. See attachment No. Project Executive jimmy R. Pharr Project Manager Jacob Tyler Superintendent Jason Forbes Safety ESConsultants Quality Control Don Bundock *Organizational Chart attached Provide information on the key personnel proposed for this project that will provide the following key functions. Provide information for candidates for each of these positions on the pages for each of these key personnel. Also provide biographical information for each primary and alternate candidate as an attachment. The biographical information must include the following as a minimum: technical experience, managerial experience, education and formal training, work history which describes project experience, including the roles and responsibilities for each assignment, and primary language. Additional information highlighting experience which makes them the best candidate for the assignment should also be included. Role Primary Candidate Alternate Candidate Project Manager Jacob Tyler Kenneth Barthold Project Superintendent Jason Forbes Aaron Francis Project Safety Officer ESConsultants NIA Quality Control Manager Don Bundock NIA If key personnel are to fulfill more than one of the roles listed above, provide a written narrative describing how much time will be devoted to each function, their qualifications to fulfill each role and the percentage of their time that will be devoted to each role. If the individual is not to be devoted solely to this project, indicate how time it to be divided between this project and their other assignments. 8 STAFFING NARRATIVE PROJECT STAFFING: ON -SITE STAFFING: Project Manager - 30% on -site to monitor schedule, workforce present, construction progress meetings and quality control. Off -site duties to include financial monitoring of the project and contract control. Project Superintendent - Full time on -site supervision of sub -contractors workforce, work progress and compliance to contract documents and specifications. Superintendents will maintain a project daily record of all work progress, delays, weather conditions and workforce available by all sub -contractors. Safety - Weekly unscheduled safety jobsite inspections, monitor weekly safety meetings and investigate any reported injuries and/or accidents. OFF -SITE STAFFING: Project Executive - Monitor project progress, review all reports and inquiries pertaining to workforce, project submittals, materials ordered, schedule and finance requirements. Project Estimator - Develop project budget estimates, final GMP, provide change order request estimates. r Project Manager - Project Manager will monitor all jobsite reports and logs, review all reports generated j by the on -site Superintendent, maintain the project construction management software program which L tracks the progress of the project in regards to materials, submittals, purchasing, deliveries, workforce, weather conditions, safety concerns and the implementation of the Construction Manager's workforce. ffThe Project Manager will administer weekly progress meetings on -site with all required personnel in order to keep the project update and on schedule. All requests for changes, RFI's and project correspondence will be reviewed by the Project Manager. Clerical Staff- As required to maintain proper document control and financial tracking of the project. Off -site personnel are utilized as needed for the complete control and documentation of the project. These costs are included as part of our commitment to the project at no charge. John K. Pharr Jimmy R. Pharr Linda Gonzales Accounting Marinda Pharr Donna Walker OfflbeManager& Warranty/Closebut Atcoundng Lucille Whitfield Jacob Tyler Project Gary Stringer Kenneth Barthold Sr. Project'. Manager Project Manager Jason Pharr Project Manager CostAcmuntin4 Jim Phillips CPA Michael Smith 1 Ramon Diaz I Pharr & Company Organizational Team Chart I Don Bundock. 1 1 Bob Renne 1 Charlie Armacost Bradley Flood Taz Miller Duggan Wood Billy. Reed Jett Foisom� Mark Fstep Tommy Seymour Aaron Francis Jason Forbes CONTRACTOR [ ■ JIMMY R. PHARR - PROJECT MANAGER / ESTIMATOR 38 years experience Jimmy R. Pharr is Vice President of Pharr & Company. He has been involved in projects of all types — including new [ ' construction as well as renovation and repair/maintenance of existing facilities. Mr. Pharr has extensive experience in cost estimating, project scheduling, and construction management. He has managed the following projects: Project: Elementary/High School Renovations Owner: Ropesville, ISD, Ropesville, TX Construction Cost $3,028,307 Architect: JDMA, Inc Project: Phase VIl Classroom Renovations & New Addition l Owner: Westbrook I.S.D., Westbrook, TX Construction Cost: $2,179,155 Architect BGR Architects, Inc. Project: Midland Centennial Library Owner: Midland County, Texas Construction Cost: $3,496,263 Architect: Dewberry Architects Project: CM Phase VI Renovations Owner: Westbrook, I.S.D. t Construction Cost: $1,846,000 Architect BGR Architects, Inc. Project: DeZavala Elementary School - Additions & Renovations Owner: Midland Independent School District Construction Cost: $1,043,541 Architect: Pate & Associates Architects -Planner, Inc. Project: New Branch for SouthWest Bank Owner: SouthWest Bank Construction Cost: $1,978,244 Architect: Pate & Associates Architects -Planner, Inc. Project: CM Phase III Improvements - Westbrook I.S.D. Owner: Westbrook Independent School District Construction Cost: $2,040,000 Architect: BGR Architects, Inc Project: CM Yoakum County Hospital Additions & Renovations Owner: Yoakum County Courthouse Construction Cost: $1,491,043 Architect: Walter Pate & Associates Architects -Planners, Inc. Project: CM Highland ISD Additions/ Renovations Project: UMC Westwind Primary Health Center Owner: Highland Independent School District - Roscoe, Texas Owner: University Medical Center Construction Cost: $8,130,500 Construction Cost: $949,575 fArchitect: Grimes & Associates, Consulting Engineers, LP Architect: Condray Design Group, Inc. L, Project: University Medical Center Ophthalmology Building Project CM Estacado High School Additions /Alterations Owner: University Medical Center Owner: Lubbock Independent School District Construction Cost: $1,683,500.00 Construction Cost: $3,581,413 l- Architect: Condray Design Group, Inc. Architect BGR Architects, Inc. Project: CM Phase IV Improvements - Westbrook L S. D Owner: Westbrook Independent School District Construction Cost $1,442,080 Architect BGR Architects, Inc. Project: Bowie Fine Arts Academy Owner: Midland Independent School District Construction Cost $3,655,090 Architect Rhotenberry Wellen Architects Project: Kent County Nursing Home in Jayton, Texas Construction Cost: $2,549,632 Project: Burnet Elementary School Renovations & Alterations Owner: Midland I.S.D. Construction Cost: $2,531,185 Architect: Associated Architects of Midland Project: New Facility for Hunter Millworks, Inc. Owner: B.L. Hunter Family Construction Cost $1,489,094 Architect: Architects Developers Contractors, Inc Proposed Project Managers Organization Doing Business As Name of Individual Pharr do Company Jacob, Tyler Years of Experience as Project Manager 2 Years of Experience with this organization 3 Number of similar projects as Project Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date DDS Kids Dayeave 40 Nov. 2015 Center for Children & Families Renov 40 Oct. 2016 Reference Contact Information(listing names indicates a roval to contacting the names individuals as a reference Name Joe McKay Name Mary Crites Titlel Position Architect Title/ Position Architect Organization JDMA, Inc. Organization Telephone 806•244.4490 Telephone 806-790-7114 E-mail imckayaldmatexas.com E-mail Project I Ropes ISD Elemili S/Cafe. Project Candidate role on Project, Name of Individual Superintendent Candidates role Superintendent on Pro ect Kenneth 8arthold Years of Experience as Project Manager 3 Years of Experience with this organization 3 Number of similar projects as Project Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Lamesa ISD Pyre-K 40 912015 Lansesa High School Renovation 40 412016 Name Phil lrur ueron Name John Rasrios Title/ Position Architect Title/ Position Superintendent Organization Parkhill Smith do Cooper, anization Lamesa ISO Telephone 3 - - 447 Tel hone 806-872-5461 E-mail fur ero eam- se.co E-mail jramosaamesaesc 1 7.ne 1 Project Glasscock CISD High Schoo lProject Lamesa Elem. & High Sch Candidate role on Project Project Manager Candidate role on Project Project Massager 9 of GENERAL CONTRACTOR ♦JACOB TYLER — PROJECT MANAGER. 3 years experience Jacob started as a field crew member in 2012 for Pharr & Company. Because of his training, construction knowledge and solid work ethics he was promoted to Assistant Project Manager in December 2013 and then Project Manager in December 2014. Current Projects: Project: Owner: Architect: Contract: Completion Date: DBS Kids Daycare Center DBS Kids, Lubbock, TX Studio West. - Lubbock, TX $2,566,000 November 2015 Project: CM — Centers for Children and Families Renovations Owner: Centers for Children and Families — Midland, TX Architect: Pate & Associates — Midland, TX Contract: $2.3 Million Completion Date: October 2016 Past Projects: Project Manager: Project: Landwer House Renovations Owner: City of Lubbock, TX Construction Cost: $784,164 Architect: Mary Crites, AIA, Lubbock, TX Project: CMAR - Elementary and High School Renovations Owner: Ropes ISD, Ropesville, TX Construction Cost: $3,028,307 Architect: JDMA, Inc. Assistant Project Manager: Project: Classroom Renovations Owner: Westbrook ISD, Westbrook, TX Construction Cost: $1,831,866 Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. Project: New Addition & Renovations Owner: Covenant Presbyterian Church- Lubbock, TX Construction Cost: $1,475,533 Architect: Condray Design Group, Inc. GENERAL ■ KENNETH BARTHOLD - PROJECT MANAGER CONTRACTOR 26 years construcfion experience Kenneth began working for Pharr & Company in April 2012, He has experience in overseeing and involvement of day-to-day operations, invoicing and purchase order work, and all aspects of material procurement and transfer. His education, covers multiple areas of business as it relates to construction. Listed below are projects in which he served as Project Manager for Pharr & Company. • Current Projects Project: CM - High School Renovations/Additions Owner: Lamesa ISD — Lamesa, Texas Cost: $9,256,358 Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. - Lubbock, Texas Project: CM - S. Elementary Pre-K Addition Owner: Lamesa ISD — Lamesa, Texas Cost: $4,259,468 Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. - Lubbock, Texas • Completed Projects Project: Larry Combest Community Health/Wellness Center Owner: Texas Tech University Cost: $2,594,050 Architect: MWM Architects, Inc. — Lubbock, Texas Project: Brownfield Public Safety Facility Owner: City of Brownfield, Texas Cost $2,843,127 Architect: Parkhill, Smith. & Cooper, Inc. - Lubbock, Texas Project: Construction Manager for Glasscock County I.S.D. High School Remodel Owner: Glasscock County Independent School District, Garden City, Texas Cost: $1.,830,991 Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. - Midland, Texas Project: CMAR - 2011 District Facility Improvements, Brownfield High School Owner: Brownfield LS.D., Brownfield, Texas Cost: $4,704,352 Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. - Lubbock, Texas • Previous Evperience - Division Project Manager Estimating Profit and Loss Margins Bid Proposals/Meeting Deadlines Specifications Compliance Compiling & Field Verification of Shop Drawings Inventory Scheduling Environmental Issues and Concerns Past Proposed Project Superintendent Organization Doing Business As Name of Individual Pharr do Company Jason Forbes Years of Experience as Project Superintendent 25 Years of Experience with this organization New Mire Number of similar projects as Superintendent Number of similar projects in other positions @unent Project Assignments with other general contractors Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Schools, Churches, Municipalties, Universities - New construction and renovations Reference Contact Information(listing names indicates a roval to contacting the names individuals as a reference Name Mike Tem le Name David Sussell Title/ Position Title/ Position Project Manager Organization Tem le Electric Organization Lee Lewis Construction Telephone 806-775-7070 Tel hone 806-548-0164 E-mail E-mail Pro'ect Project Candidate role on Project Name of Individual Superintendent Candidate role Superintendent on Project Aaron Francis (Assistant Superintest Years of Experience as Project Superintendent 4 Years of Experience with this organization 1 Number of similar projects as Superintendent Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Carillon Mouse 4th Floor Renovations 215115 Name Name Title/ Position Title/ Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone E-mail E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project 10 ,ent) JASON FORBI-EIS 2717 56th Street, Lubbock, Texas 79413 ( (806) 778 - 2765 I j Iforbes1965C gmaiLcom SUMMARY 25 Years of Commercial and Residential Construction, as well as Architectural Design and Drafting - Structural Cast -In -Place Concrete / Tilt -Up / Flat Work / Structural. Steel / Structural Wood Framing ,/ MPE Fluent / Construction Administration Proficient % Finish Out & Punch List / Cost Control / Superb Management Ski [is % SWPPP / Safe Job Set Up & Maint. / Forklift £t Tractor Training / Safety Coordination / HAZMAT / Scheduling /Concrete Calculations / Lumber Take Offs-] PHOTOGRAPHY / FAMILIAR WITH CITY CODES, PERMITS & LICENSING EXPERIENCE 1996 - 2015 Construction Superintendent, Lee Lewis Construction, Inc.; Lubbock, TX 2015 Construction Superintendent, Lee Lewis Construction, Inc.; Lubbock, TX - Odessa. Permian. High School, Odessa, TX Structural It Architectural Layout Project Cost; 38 Million 2014 Construction Superintendent, Lee Lewis Construction, Inc.; Lubbock, TX LISD Middle School Tracks,,.Lubbock, TX - (All Phases of Construction Coordination It Completion) - Project Cost: 10 Million 2003- 2005 Construction Superintendent, Lee Lewis Construction, Inc.; Lubbock, TX Texas Tech Student Union (Phase 111), Lubbock, TX - (All Phases of Construction Coordination & Completion) - Project Cost: 10 Million 2000- 2003 Construction Superintendent, Lee Lewis Construction, Inc.; Lubbock, TX Texas Tech Student Union Building (Phase I Et Phase 11), Lubbock, TX - (Structural & Architectural Layout, Site Safety, Payroll, SWPPP, Structural Concrete Supervision) - Project Cost: 58 Million 1998-2000 Construction Superintendent, Lee Lewis Construction, Inc.; Lubbock, TX • Windsong Retirement Home, Lubbock, TX - (Structural a Architectural Layout, Site Safety, Payroll, SWPPP) - Project Cost: 26 Million 1996-1998 Construction Superintendent, Lee Lewis Construction, Inc.; Lubbock, TX Carrillon Assisted Living Home, Lubbock, TX - (Structural Et Architectural Layout) - Project Cost: 10 Million 1989-1993 Wood Framing Foreman, Darrell Julian Construction, In.; Albuquerque, NM EDUCATION 1995 Architecture Major, Texas Tech University, Lubbock, TX 1988 Architecture Major, University of New Mexico, Albuquerque, NM 1985 General Studies, New Mexico Military Institute, Roswell, NM 1983 High School, Carlsbad, NM REFERENCES UPON REQUEST Page 3 OR ♦AARON FRANCIS -ASSISTANT SUPERINTENDENT 4 years experience Aaron started as a field crew member in 2014 for Pharr & Company. Because of his training, construction knowledge and solid work ethics he was promoted to Assistant Superintendent. Past Projects: Proj ect: Carillon e Floor Renovations Owner: Carillon -Lubbock, Teams Cost: $500,000 Architect: REES Architecture, Planning & Interiors — Dallas, Texas Project: South Plains Boy Scouts of America Camp Swimming Pool ADA & Restroom Upgrades Owner: Post, Texas Cost: $165,000 Architect: Robert A Stoll, Jr. — Lubbock, Texas Proposed Project Safety Officer Organization Doing Business As Name of Individual Pharr & Company Ramon Dian Years of Experience as Project Safety Officer Engineering Safety Consultants (ESC) Years of Experience with this organization 1307 N. Glenville Dr. Number of similar projects as Safety Officer Richardson,, TX 75081 Number of similar projects in other positions 214-575-8710 Current Project Assignments rdiaz@e9csafety.cona Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Reference Contact Information(listing names indicates ap vat to contactingthe names individuals as a reference Name Name Title/ Position Title/ Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone E-mail E-mail Project I Project Candidate role on Project Name of Individual Candidate role on Project NIA Years of Experience as Project Safety Officer Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Safety Officer Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Name NIA Name NIA Title/ Position Title/ Position Organization Organization Telephone Telephone E-mail E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project 11 Proposed Project Quality Control Manager Organization Doing Business As Name of Individual - Pharr lit Coinpany Don Sundock Years of Experience as Quality Control Manager Years of Experience with this organization 4 Number of similar projects as Quality Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Reference Contact Information(listing names indicates ap al to contactingthe names individuals as a reference Name Milke Bradford Name Michael Molina Title/ Position C6unty judge Title/ Position V Chancellor of Facilities Organization Midland County, TX Organization Texast Tech University Telephone 432-688-4310 Telephone 806-742-2116 E-mail c 101 co.znidiaAd.tx.us E-mail xn1chae1.zno1inaQttu.edu Project entennial Library -Midland[ Project Candidate role on Project , Name of Individual Candidate role on Project 11i/A Years of Experience as Quality Control Manager Years of Experience with this organization Number of similar projects as Quality Manager Number of similar projects in other positions Current Project Assignments Name of Assignment Percent of Time Used for this Project Estimated Project Completion Date Name NIA Name NIA Title/ Position Title/ Position Organization OrRanization Telephone Telephone E-mail E-mail Project Project Candidate role on Project Candidate role on Project 12 H GENERAL ■ DON BUNDOCK - PROJECT MANAGER CONTRACTOR 40 ears construction experience Y Xp Don was hired by Pharr and Company in December 2011. He holds an Industrial Engineering Degree from Texas Tech University. Mr. Bundoch has extensive experience in project management, construction business development, owner's representation, and construction litigation consultation. • CURRENT PROJECT [ Project: Liquid Nitrogen Plant Owner: Air Products - Allentown, PA Architect: Pate & Associates - Midland, TX Construction Cost: $2,514,249 f • COMPLETED PROJECTS with PHARR & CO. Project: Midland County Pre -Trial Bonding Building Owner: Midland County, TX Architect: Jennifer Joseph, AIA, Plano, TX L Contract Amount: $1,057,927 Project: Midland County Library Addition and Renovations Owner: County of Midland, TX Architect: Dewberry Architects, Inc. - Dallas, TX Construction Cost: $3,495,263 • PROJECT MANAGEMENT "The Horseshoe" - Midland County Multi -Purpose Events Facility, $13,000,000 180,000 square feet Walmart Super Center - Midland, TX $12,000,000 210,000 square feet Lowes Supermarket Renovation - Ft. Stockton, TX $2,000,000 60,000SF Complete interior renovation/adaptation of facilities to new design Overton Parking Garage - Lubbock, TX $6,000,000 300,000SF, 5 story precast Wells Fargo - Banking Call Center - Lubbock, TX $10,000,000 78,000SF Concrete tilt up Garrison Geriatric Care Center - Lubbock, TX $8,000,000 86,000SF, One story light gauge frame • CONSTRUCTION LITIGATION CONSULTATION Catholic Diocese of Lubbock - Lubbock, TX Advise, consult, prepare construction litigation documents for negotiation and arbitration on structural failure of classroom facility. • OWNER'S REPRESENTATION United Spirit Arena - Texas Tech - Lubbock, TX $67,000,000 160,000SF Multipurpose facility Scharbauer Sports Complex (CIVIL) - Midland, TX $42,000,000 132AC Football & baseball facility civil and site work phase for utilities and roadways Godbold Cultural Center - Lubbock, TX $4,000,000 68,000SF, Adaptive reuse of hospital to serve as community cultural center. Hiring and consulting with design team and subcontractors. GGGG's Barn - Ranching Heritage Ctr Lubbock, TX $300,000 6,000SF Reconstruct historic barn on Texas campus to replicate original facility I. Contractor's Project Experience and Resources Organization Doing Business As Pharr & Company Provide. a list of major projects that are currently underway, or have been completed within the last ten years on Attachment A See Attached Provide a completed, Project Information form (Attachment B) for projects that have been completed in the last five ears which specifically illustrate the organizations capability to provide best value to the Owner for this project. Att Include a completed Project Information form (Attachment B) for projects which illustrate the experience of the proposed key personnel. Refe: to attached Proposed Project Personnel resumes Provide a description of your organizations approach to .completing this project to provide best value for the Owner. Including a description of your approach in the following areas: 1. Contract administration 2. Management of subcontractor and suppliers 3. Time management *Responses Attached 4. Cost control, S. Quality management 6. Project site safety 7. Managing changes to the project 8. Managing equipment 9. Meeting HUB / MWBE Partici ation Goal Provide a list of major equipment ro osed for use on this project. Attach Additional Information if necess Equipment Item Primary Use on Project Own ill UY Lease Forklift X What work will the organization complete using its own resources? Demolition, rough carpentry, concrete, layout, hardware and speciality installation. What work does the organization propose to subcontract on thisproject? 90% 13 ached H GENERAL CONTRACTOR Contractor's Project Experience and Resources - Attachment A - Major Projects — Current and Completed in the Last Ten Years CURRENT: Project: Liquid Nitrogen Plant — Odessa, TX Owner: Air Products, Inc. Architect: Pate & Associates, Inc. — Midland, TX Project Executive: Jimmy R. Pharr Project Manager: Jason Pharr Superintendent: Billy Reed Contract: $2,514,249 Percent Complete: 36% Completion Date: July 2015 Project: Construction Manager - New Warehouse and Educational Facility 69,000 sq. ft. warehouse/educational/storage facility with commercial kitchen/equipment Owner: South Plains Food Bank — Lubbock, TX Architect: MWM Architects, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Executive: Jimmy R. Phan Project Manager: Gary Stringer Superintendent: Jett Folsom Contract: $10,785,085 Percent Complete: 23% Completion Date: January 2016 Project: Construction Manager -at -Risk — Pre-K thru 12th 43,376 sf renovations of existing building and 68,356 sf new construction Owner: Wellman -Union CISD, Wellman, TX Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Executive: John K. Pharr Project Manager: Gary Stringer Superintendent: Taz Miller Contract: $15,811,539 Percent Complete: 99% - Phase I Completion Date: August 2016 —1— $ Project: CM ElementaryPre-K - New Addition Remodel of main entrance with New 13,000 s. f, addition Owner: Lamesa Independent School District, Lamesa, TX Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. -Lubbock, TX Project Executive: John K. Pharr Project Manager: Kenneth Baithold Superintendent: Mark Estep Contract: $4,259,468 Percent Complete: Completion Date: 38% September 2015 Project: CM — New Home ISD 2013 Bond Projects New Gymnasium, Classroom Additions & Cafeteria Renovations Owner: New Home Independent School District, New Home, TX Architect: BGR: Architects, Inc. - Lubbock, TX Project Executive: Jimmy R, Pharr { Project Manager: Jason Pharr jt Superintendent: Bradley Flood Contract: $4,395,466 Percent Complete: 9% Completion Date: January 2016 Project: CM— High School Renovations — Phase 2 - Pka. 2 New entry, computer labs, kitchen and 2-story common area renovations Owner: Lamesa Independent School District, Lamesa, TX Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. - Lubbock, TX Project Executive: JohnK. Pharr Project Manager: Kenneth Barthold Superintendent: Charles Armacost Contract: $7,925,931.00 Percent Complete: 8% Completion Date: April 2016 Project: DBS Kids Daycare Center New 20,430 s f childcare facility Owner: DBS Kids — Lubbock, TX Architect: Mary Crites, AIA - Lubbock, TX Project Executive: Jimmy R. Pharr Project Manager: Jacob Tyler Superintendent: Duggan Wood" Contract:. $2,566,000 Percent Complete: Newly Awarded Completion Date: November 2015 —2— COMPLETED IN THE LAST TEN (10) YEARS: Project: CM— High School Renovations — Phase 2 - Pkz. I + - Demo and Classrooms/Restrooms Renovations and New Elevator installed ,_- Owner: Lamesa Independent School District, Lamesa, TX Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. - Lubbock, TX { Project Executive: John K. Phan Project Manager: Kenneth Barthold Superintendent: Charles Armacost i_ Final Cost: $1,330,427 Completion Date: tr February 26, 2015 , Project: Construction Manager —2013 Bond Projects Admin. Office/Elementary School Renovations, Security Upgrades and High School and Cafeteria Renovations Owner: Ropes Independent School District, Ropesville, TX Architect: JDMA, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Executive: Jimmy R. Pharr Project Manager: Jacob Tyler Superintendent: Duggan Wood Final Cost: $3,028,307.00 Completion Date: September 23, 2014 Project: Construction Manager for 2010 Bond Program Demo /Replace High School Gymnasium Bleachers/ New High School Parking Lot/New 41,000 sq. ft. Cafeteria -Kitchen and Interior/Exterior Renovations to (2) Middle Schools Owner: Lubbock Independent School District, Lubbock, TX - Architect: Stiles, Wallace & Associates - Lubbock, TX Project Executive: John K. Phar Project Manager: Gary Stringer _ Superintendent: Billy Reed/Duggan Wood/Mark Estep Final. Cost: $19,614,731.00 Completion Date: August 26, 2014 _ Project; Construction Manager —High School Renovations/Addition Phase I - Main Entrance Remodel/Addition with New Admire. Offices, New Sprinkler System, Electrical & HVAC for building and Interior remodel for new nurses room/teachers lounge & work area/new corridors/ceiling/fire sprinkler system and New Elevator Owner: Lamesa Independent School District, Lamesa, TX Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. - Lubbock, TX Project Executive: John K. Pharr Project Manager: Kenneth. Barthold Superintendent: Charles Armacost Final Cost: $5,559,159.00 Completion Date: August 14, 2014 —3— Project: The Larry Combest Community Health/Wellness Center Expansion New 9,200 s. £ Office/Exam Room Addition & Renovation to 5,400 s. f. existing clinical space &New parking lot Owner: Texas Tech University System, Lubbock, TX Architect: MWM Architects, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Executive: John K. Pharr Project Manager: Kenneth Barthold Superintendent: Jett Folsom Final Cost: $2,594,050.00 Completion Date: May 12, 2014 Project: Midland County Pre -Trial Bonding Building New 3,800 sq. f. Metal Framed Building with Lobby/Office areas Owner: Midland County, TX Architect: Jennifer Joseph, AIA, Plano, TX Project Executive: Jimmy Pharr Project Manager: Jason Pharr Superintendent: Richard Freeman/Brad Bolm Final Cost: $1,032,660.00 Completion Date: February 6, 2014 Project: City of Brownfield Public Safety Facility New 11,780 s. f, building with Offices, File/Storage Briefing/Exercise/Training Rooms Owner: City of Brownfield, TX Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. - Lubbock, TX Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager.: Kenneth Barthold Superintendent: Taz Miller Final Cost: $2,843,127.00 Completion Date: December 9, 2013 Project: UMC 3W Tower Remodel Renovation to existing patient rooms Owner: University Medical Center — Lubbock, TX Architect: Condray Design Group, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Executive: Jimmy Pharr Project Manager: Jason Pharr Final Cost: $1,251,823.00 Completion Date: September 30, 2013 —4— Project: Construction Manager for 2010 Bond Program Demo /Replace High School Gymnasium Bleachers/ New High School Parking Lot/New Cafeteria-Kitchen/ Interior Renovations to (2) Middle Schools Owner: Lubbock Independent School District, Lubbock, TX Architect: Stiles, Wallace & Associates - Lubbock, TX Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager: Gary Stringer Superintendents: Billy Reed — High School Cafeteria Duggan Wood — Middle Schools g Final Cost: $15,432,216.00 Completion Date: August 26, 2013 Project: Construction Manager for Midland County Library Addition and Renovation of existing Library Owner: County of Midland, TX Architect: Dewberry Architects, Inc. — Dallas, TX Project Executive: Jimmy Pharr Project Manager: Jason Pharr Superintendent: Bill Baker Final Cost: $3,496,263.12 Completion Date: April 4, 2013 Project: Covenant Presbyterian Church Two additional classrooms and Interior Renovations �.- Owner: Covenant Presbyterian Church, Lubbock, TX Architect: Condray Design Group, Inc.- Lubbock, Texas Project Executive: Jimmy Pharr Project Manager: Jason Pharr Superintendent: Taz Miller Final Cost: $1,475,532.74 + Completion Date: January 31, 2013 Project: Construction Manager for Westbrook I. S. D. — Phase VI New Show Barn, Renovations to existing Auditorium & Addition to Vocational Ag Building, New parking lot/sidewalks/septic system Owner: Westbrook Independent School District —Westbrook, TX Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. - Lubbock, Texas Project Executive: Jimmy Pharr Project Manager: Jason Phan z Superintendent: Bradley FIood Final Cost: $1,831,866.75 Completion Date: January 18, 2013 .PS Project: Construction Management -at -Risk Services for 1 2011 District Facility Improvements - Demo of existing Fieldhouse, Renovations to RestroomsBleachers/Press Box, New Fieldhouse/Indoor Practice Facility and Renovations to classrooms Owner: Brownfield Independent School District, Brownfield, TX Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. - Lubbock, TX - Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager: Kenneth Barthold Superintendent: Charles Armacost Final Cost: $4,634,647.96 Completion Date; November 29; 2012 Project: Construction Manager for Glasscock County I. S. D. — High School Remodel Owner: Glasscock County Independent School District — Garden City, TX Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. - Midland, Texas Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager: Kenneth Barthold Superintendent: Duggan Wood Final Cost: $1,830,991.00 Completion Date: August 20, 2012 Project: Worsham High School Auditorium — Snyder, Texas Renovations to existing Auditorium Owner: Snyder Independent School District Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. - Midland, Texas Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager: Gary Stringer Superintendent: Richard Freeman Final Cost: $2,928,015.00 Completion Date: August 15, 2012 Project: Highland I. S. D. New locker rooms, two new classrooms, new multi -purpose facility (gymnasium) Owner; Highland Independent School District - Roscoe, Texas Architect: Grimes & Associates, Consulting Engineers, LP. Project Executive: Jimmy Pharr Project Manager: Gary Stringer Superintendent: Randy Leonard/Richard Freeman Final Cost: $8,130,500.00 Date of Completion: August 22, 2011 x t ,. Project: Elementary School Garden City, TX - Renovations Owner: Glasscock County Independent School District - Garden City, Texas Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. - Midland, Texas Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager: Sonny Owen Superintendent: Duggan Wood Final Cost: $1,605,325.00 Date of Completion: August 19, 2011 Project: University Medical Center Ophthalmology Building — Lubbock, TX New Construction Owner: University Medical Center Architect: Condray Design Group, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Executive: Jimmy Pharr C--- Project Manager: Jason Pharr Superintendent: Charles Armacost Final Cost: $1,691,324.24 Date of Completion: January 3, 2011 Project: Lubbock Central Appraisal District — Lubbock, TX Facility Renovations p Owner: Lubbock Central Appraisal District . Architect: Cox/Dirks Architects, P. C. — Lubbock, TX Project Executive: John Pharr Project Engineer: Jason Pharr Superintendent: Duggan Wood Final Cost: $1,784,578.44 Date of Completion: December 29, 2010 Project: Day Care Facility for Brenda Jones — Lubbock, TX New Construction ' Owner: Thomas and Brenda Jones Architect: Cox/Dirks Architects, P. C. — Lubbock, TX Project Executive: John Pharr Project Engineer: Jason Pharr Superintendent: Bradley Flood Final Cost: $2,306,096.31 Date of Completion: December 22, 2010 -- Project: Fort Stockton Tourism Enhancement Center — Ft. Stockton, TX Renovations and Addition to tourism center Owner: City of Ft. Stockton, Texas Architect: Pate & Associates Architects -Planner, Inc. — Midland, TX Project Executive: Jimmy Pharr Project Manager: Gary Stringer Superintendent: Richard Freeman Final Cost: $1,695,394.56 Date of Completion: July 3, 2010 Project; Westbrook ISD - Phase. IV- Westbrook, TX Track/New Concession/Science Lab Renovations Owner: Westbrook Independent School District Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Executive: Jimmy .Pharr Project Engineer: Jason Phan Superintendent: Bradley Flood Final Cost: $1,466,333.00 Date of Completion: December 2009 Project: Bowie Fine Arts Academy — Midland, TX Renovations Owner: Midland Independent School District Architect: Rhotenberry Wellen Architects — Midland, TX Project Executive: Jimmy Pharr Project Manager: Gary. Stringer Superintendent: Gerry Velasquez (former employee) Final Cost: $3,986,833.00 Date of Completion: August 20, 2009 Project: Vista Bank— Lubbock, TX New Construction Owner: Vista Bank - Lubbock Architect: MWM Architects, Inc. - Lubbock, TX Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Duggan Wood Final Cost: $1,189,500.00 Completion Date: August 27, 2009 Project: Owner: Architect: Project Executive: Project Manager. Superintendent: Final Cost: Date of Completion: Project: Owner. Architect: Project Executive: Project Engineer: Superintendent: Final Cost: Date of Completion: DeZavala Elementary School —Midland, TX Additions & Renovations Midland Independent School District Pate & Associates Architects -Planners, Inc.- Midland, TX Jimmy Pharr Gary Stringer Richard Freeman $1,159,461.50 August 12, 2009 Brownfield I. S. D.— Brownfield, TX High School Renovations Brownfield Independent School District - Brownfield, Texas Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc.- Lubbock, TX John Pharr Jason Pharr Charles Armacost $1,355,000.00 August 24, 2009 —8— Project: Southwest Bank — Lubbock, TX New Branch Owner: SouthWest Bank Architect: Pate & Associates Architects -Planners, Inc. — Midland, TX Project Manager: Jimmy Pharr Superintendent: Monty Matthews Final Cost: $2,064,079.52 Date of Completion: May 27, 2009 Project: Technicare Dental Office Building — Lubbock, TX New Construction Owner: Bromley Investments, LLC Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Ron Allen Final Cost: $1,171,966.40 Date of Completion: November 1, 2008 Project: Owner: Architect: Project Manager: Superintendent: Final Cost: Date of Completion: Citizens Bank — Lubbock, TX New Branch Citizens Bank MWM Architects, Inc. — Lubbock, TX John Pharr Duggan Wood $1,580,000.00 October 9, 2008 Project: ABC Bank —Lubbock, TX New Northstar Branch Owner: American Bank of Commerce Architect: MWM Architects, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Charles Armacost Final Cost: $1,284,839.34 Date of Complete: October 6, 2008 Project: Westbrook I.S.D. — Westbrook, TX Phase III Improvements Owner: Westbrook Independent School District Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Executive: Jimmy Pharr Project Engineer: Jason Pharr Superintendent: Bradley Flood Final Cost: $2,061,814.00 Date of Completion: August 1, 2008 l_ Project: St. John Neumann Catholic Church Lubbock, TX , Office & Conference Center Addition Owner: Catholic Diocese of Lubbock Architect: Chapman Harvey Architects, Inc. - Lubbock, TX Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Monty Matthews - Final Cost: $2,434,872.53 Date of Completion: June 9, 2008 Project: Brownfield Family Aquatic Center —Brownfield, TX New Construction Owner: City of Brownfield Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Taz Miller Final Cost: $2,400,969.80 Date of Completion: May 28, 2008 Project: Yoakum County Hospital —Denver City, TX Additions & Renovations Owner: Yoakum County Architect: Pate & Associates Architects -Planners, Inc. — Midland, TX Project Manager: Jimmy Pharr Superintendent: Bradley Flood Final Cost: $1,698,216.45 Date of Completion: March 31, 2008 Project: New City Hall-Slatou, TX New 7,098 s. f. municipality building Owner: City of Slaton, TX Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. Lubbock, TX Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Charles Armacost Final Cost: $1,410,884.73 Date of Completion: August 2007 Project: Stanley Ford Dealership —Andrews, TX Remodel of auto dealership Owner: Automotive Properties Unlimited, Ltd. — Dallas, TX Architect: Architect's Ink Midland, TX Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Gerry Velasquez Final Cost: $2,268,735 Date of Completion: June 2007 —10— Project: Additions & Renovations - Estacado High School Renovation to existing Hunt Field House, Science Labs, Classrooms, Boys & Girls Dressing Rooms, New Coaches Offices &New Gymnasium Lubbock, Texas Owner: Lubbock Independent School District Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. Project Manager: John Pharr ' Superintendent: Danny Heath/Taz Miller Final Cost: $6,017,485.90 �.." Date of Completion: April 2007 Project: Texas National Guard Readiness Center New 34,600 s. f. construction Owner: Texas Military Facilities Commission Architect: Parhkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Manager: Jimmy Pharr Superintendent: Gerry Velasquez Final Cost: $4,718,265 Date of Completion: July 2006 Project: Brownfield Church of Christ New 17,000 s. f. Auditorium/Chapel/Welcome Center/ Classrooms/Office Area Owner: Brownfield, TX Church of Christ Architect: Lee Architects -Interior Designers Project Manager: John Phar Superintendent: Charles Armacost Final Cost: $2,837,175 Date of Completion: March 2006 Project: Lubbock National Bank Retail/Shopping Center New 16,300 s. f. banking facility & shopping center Owner: Graco Real Estate Development — Lubbock, TX Architect: MWM Architects, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Manager: Jimmy Pharr t Superintendent: Duggan Wood Final Cost: $1,196,788 Date of Completion: November 2005 Project: Bio-Safety Level 3 Laboratory Facility -- Lubbock, TX Owner: City of Lubbock, TX Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Charles Armacost Final Cost: $1,132,123 Date of Completion: April 2005 —11— GENERAL CONTRACTOR Contractor's Project Experience and Resources - Attachment B — Major Projects Completed in the Last Five Years — Illustrate Capability to Provide Best Value PHARR & COMPANY WILL STRIVE FROM START TO COMPLETION OF EACH PROJECT TO ATTAIN THE BEST MATERIALS, LABOR FORCE AND SCHEDULING FOR THE BENEFIT OF THE OWNER, RESULTING IN THE BEST VALUE: Project: Owner: Project Executive: Project Manager: Superintendent: Contract Amount: Final Cost: Completion Date: Project: Owner: Project Executive: Project Manager: Superintendent: Contract Amount: Final Cost: Date Completed: Project: Owner: Project Executive: Project Manager: Superintendent: Contract Amount: Final Cost: Date Completed: Construction Manager — 2013 Bond Projects Admin. Office/Elementary School Renovations, Security Upgrades and High School and Cafeteria Renovations Ropes Independent School District, Ropesville, TX Jimmy R Pharr Jacob Tyler Duggan Wood $3,028,307.00 $2,881,137.00 - Final — Savings Returned to Owner September 23, 2014 Construction Manager for 2010 Bond Program Demo /Replace High School Gymnasium Bleachers/ New Parking Lot/New Cafeteria-Kitchen/New HVAC Interior Renovations to (2) Middle Schools Lubbock Independent School District, Lubbock, TX John Pharr Gary Stringer Billy Reed & Mark Estep — H. S./Duggan Wood — Middle Schools $19,614.731.00 $19,392,656.44 — Final — Savings Returned to Owner August 26, 2013 Construction Manager for Westbrook I. S. D. — Phase VI New Show Barn, Renovations to existing Auditorium & Addition to Vocational Ag Building/New parking lot/sidewalks Westbrook Independent School District — Westbrook, TX Jimmy Pharr Jason Pharr Bradley Flood $1,817,000.00 $1,831,866.75 —Final — Change Order By Owner January 18, 2013 Project: Owner: Project Executive; Project Manager: Superintendent: Contract Amount: Final Cost: Date Completed: Construction Management -at -Risk Services for 2011 District Facility Improvements Demo of existing Fieldhouse/Practice Facility/New Fieldhouse/Practice Facility and Renovations to RestroomsBleachers and Renovations to 4 classrooms Brownfield Independent School District, Brownfield, TX John Pharr Kenneth Barthold Charles Armacost $4,704,352.00 $4,634,647.00 — Final — Savings Returned to Owner November 29,_ 2012 Project: Construction Manager for Glasscock County I. S. D. — High School Remodel Owner: Glasscock County Independent School District — Garden City, TX Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager:: Sonny Owens/Kenneth Barthold Job Superintendent: Duggan Wood Contract Amount: $1,699,026.00 IA Final Cost: $1,830,991.00 — Final — Change Orders by Owner Date Completed: August 20, 2012 Project: Worsham Auditorium — Snyder ISD High School Auditorium renovations Owner: Snyder Independent School District — Snyder, TX Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager: Sonny Owens/Gary Stringer Job Superintendent: Richard Freeman (former employee) IT Contract Amount: $3,076,195.00 Final Cost: $2,928,015.00 — Final — Savings Returned to Owner ` 3 Date Completed: August 15, 2012 Project: University Medical Center Ophthalmology Building Owner: University Medical Center Architect: Condray Design Group, Inc.- Lubbock, TX IJ Project Executive: Jimmy Pharr Project Manager: Jason Pharr Job Superintendent: Charles Armacost t_ Contract Amount: $1,683,500.00 Final Cost: $1,691,324.00 —Final —Change Orders by Owner Date of Completion: Januaryl, 2011 Project: Facility. Renovations - Lubbock Central Appraisal District Owner: Lubbock Central Appraisal District Architect: Cox/Dirks Architects, P. C. — Lubbock, TX Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager: Jason Pharr Job Superintendent: Duggan Wood ; Contract Amount: $1,789,000.00 Final Cost: $1,784,587.44 — Final — Saving returned to Owner Date of Completion:. December 29, 2010 � i { a d Project: Owner: Architect: Project Executive: Project Manager: Job Superintendent: Contract Amount: Completion Amount: Date of Completion: Project: Owner: Architect: Project Executive: Project Manager: Job Superintendent: Contract Amount: Completion Amount: Date of Completion: Learning Tree Day Care New pre-engineered child care facility, including landscape & playground equipment Thomas and Brenda Jones Cox/Dirks Architects, P. C. — Lubbock, TX John Pharr Jason Pharr Bradley Flood $2,301,691.00 $2,306,096.00 — Final — Change Order by Owner December 22, 2010 Highland I. S. D. - Additions & Renovations Construction of new Locker Rooms, 2 new classrooms, new Multi purpose facility (gym) and library/classroom wing Highland Independent School District - Roscoe, Texas Grimes & Associates, Consulting Engineers, LP. — Wolfforth, TX Jimmy Pharr Gary Stringer Richard Freeman/Randy Leonard $8,081,260.00 $8,595,884.79 — Final — Change Orders by Owner August 20, 2011 Project: Fort Stockton Tourism Enhancement Center Owner: City of Ft. Stockton, Texas Architect: Pate & Associates Architects -Planner, Inc. — Midland, TX Project Executive: Jimmy Pharr Project Manager: Gary Stringer Superintendent: Richard Freeman Contract Amount: $1,699,200.00 Completion Amount: $1,695,394.56 — Final — Savings Returned to Owner Date of Completion: July 3, 2010 Project: Westbrook ISD - Phase IV - Track/Concession/Science Lab Owner: Westbrook Independent School District Architect: BGR Architects, Inc. — Lubbock, TX Project Executive: Jimmy Pharr Project Engineer: Jason Pharr Superintendent: Bradley Flood Contract Amount: $1,442,080.00 Completion Amount: $1,466,333.00 — Final — Change Order by Owner Date of Completion: December 2009 Project: Owner: Architect: Project Executive: Project Manager: Superintendent: Contract Amount: Completion Amount: Date of Completion: Bowie Fine Arts Academy - Midland I. S. D. Midland Independent School District Rhotenberry Wellen Architects — Midland, TX Jimmy Pharr Gary Stringer Gerry Velasquez $3,655,090.00 $3,986,833.64 — Final — Change Order by Owner August 20, 2009 ;i Project: Vista Bank t. j Owner: Vista Bank - Lubbock Architect: MWM Architects, Inc.- Lubbock, TX Project Manager: John Pharr Superintendent: Duggan Wood Contract. Amount: $1,279,067.00 Completion Amount: $1,189,500.00 - Final — Change. Orders by Owner ? Completion Date: August 27, 2009 Project: DeZavala Elementary School - Additions & Renovations Owner: Midland Independent School District } Architect: Pate & Associates Architects -Planners, Inc.- Midland; TX Project Executive: Jimmy Pharr Project Manager: Gary Stringer Superintendent: Richard Freeman Contract Amount: $1,253,453.00 Completion Amount: $1,1.59,461.50 - Final — Savings Returned to Owner Date of Completion: August 12, 2009 Project: Brownfield I. S. D. High School Renovations Owner: Brownfield Independent School District - Brownfield, Texas Architect: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. — Midland, TX Project Executive: John Pharr Project Manager: Jason Pharr Superintendent: Charlie Armacost Contract Amount: $1,355,000.00 Completion Amount: $1,355,000.00 Date of Completion: August 24, 2009 Project: SouthWest Bank - New Branch Owner: SouthWest Bank Architect: Pate & Associates Architects -Planners, Inc. — Midland, TX Project Manager: Jimmy Pharr Superintendent: Monty Matthews Contract Amount: $1,978,24.4.00 Completion Amount: $2,064,079.52 - Final — Change Orders by Owner Date of Completion: May 27, 2009 GENERAL CONTRACTOR Contractor's Project Experience and Resources - Attachment B - Capability to Provide Best Value APPROACH TO PROVIDE BEST VALUE: 1. Contract Administration: PHARR & COMPANY utilizes Sage 300 Construction Program (formerly Timberline Construction �.. Management Program) and our accounting system in order to monitor all aspects of the project. A full staff, comprised of Project Executive, Estimator, Manager, Quality Control Officer, Superintendent and Accounting Department, works in conjunction with the construction management program to manage the operation of subcontractors and material suppliers. 2. Management of Subcontractors/Suppliers: Choosing the correct subcontractors and suppliers is paramount to a quality project. PHARR & COMPANY will work with the Owner to choose subcontractors and material suppliers that have demonstrated the ability to meet quality standards. Factors used in selecting subcontractors and suppliers f are as follows: Experience with the Owner. Experience with similar projects. Reputation for quality. Ability to work in a team atmosphere. Quality of field personnel. ` Financial stability. l Cost of product or service. 3. Time Management: �..: PHARR & COMPANY has vast experience in providing schedules during the schematic, design development and construction document phases of a project. The ability to provide accurate schedules is a key element of the pre -construction services we provide. At the Schematic Design and Design - Development Stage we prepare conceptual schedules for the project. The level of detail of the schedule increases as more information and refinement of the documents are provided. The schedule as developed can then be tracked and monitored using the Sage 300 Construction Program. 4. Cost Control: PHARR & COMPANY will construct the project with the best quality in materials and workmanship while retaining the lowest possible cost for the City of Lubbock. We will offer value engineering on any item and/or items we feel will benefit the city in saving money. Our goal is to build your project with skill and integrity. Therefore, PHARR & COMPANY strives to minimize any long-term cost to the city. During the Construction Phase - PHARR & COMPANY controls costs by providing accurate cost ` estimates in the formulation of the bid price. We utilize state-of-the-art estimating software to compile a definitive estimate in recognized Construction Specifications Institute cost codes. This system allows us to track each cost item through a controlled, efficient buy-out of that item. Through the use of our project management software, PHARR & COMPANY has an organized method to track each item and aggressively manage any changes to that cost item. Cost reports are generated for review with the Project Team at regularly scheduled meetings. 5, Ouality Management: PHARR & COMPANY'S Quality Control Manager is responsible for monitoring the standards specified and incorporated for all projects. Submittal examination and final installation of all materials and labor will be monitored to make sure that all contract document requirements are adhered to. 6. Project Site Safetv: It is PHARR & COMPANY'S goal to continue the impeccable safety standards that we pride ourselves on. We have an extensive written safety nrogram for all employees to follow: It is our goal to ensure that our personal employees and all of our subcontractors are not just given the policies, but know the policies and adhere to them. We conduct weekly spot checks on all of our jobs: These reports are then communicated with each superintendent. The superintendent then follows up with the foreman to discuss any infractions that need to be corrected. If infractions are repeated, the visits are made with the owner and the foreman to establish a resolution. We host weekly Safety Tool Box meetings: Superintendents host these meetings with all subcontractors on the job. Records of those meetings are maintained in our office and are available for review. PHARR & COMPANY believes in continuing education: We provide our superintendents the most up -to -date -training. It is evident through the many safety awards we receive each year that our team is diligent in maintaining a safe job site, Our Corporate Safety Policy Manual is available upon request. 7. Managing Changes to the Project: All changes must be handled through written directive, all verbal changes must. be documented in writing and approved and signed by appropriate personnel. 8. Managing Equipment: PHARR & COMPANY will supervise all equipment installed as required per contract documents. We will also coordinate the installation of any Owner supplied equipment. 9. Meeting HUB/MWBE Participation Goal: PHARR & COMPANY strives to encourage all, Historically Underutilized Businesses (HUB) to participate in the bidding process by submitting their quotes to us. We will put forth a good faith effort to attain the percentage required by law. We will adhere to every step of the established guidelines for the procurement of bids. Even though this project does not required Historically Underutilized Businesses to participate, it is our policy to make every effort to solicit H[]B subcontractors in order to utilize local resources available, *Refer to Proposed List of Subcontractors included in proposal document.Contractor's Subcontractors and Vendors Organization Doing Business As Pharr & Company Provide a list of subcontractors that will provide more than 10 percent of the work based on contract amounts Name Work to be Provided Est. Percent Contract HUB/MWBEof Firm Provide information on the proposed key personnel, project experience and a description of past relationship and work ex erience for each subcontractor listed above using the Project Information Forms. Provide a list of major equipment proposed for use on this project. Attach Additional Information ifnecessary Vendor Name Equipment / Material Provided Furnish Only Furnish and Install HUB/M WBE Firm 14 ' Attachment A Current Projects and Project. Completed within the last 10 Years *Refer to attached A. -Current Projects and Conspleted Major Projects within the Last Tea (10) Years. Project Owner. I I Project Name General Description, of Project: Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name Reference Contact Information (lasting names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Designer Construction Manager Project Owner IProject Name General Description of Project: Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Designer Construction Manager Project Owner Project Name General Description of Project: Project Cost Date Project Completed Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name Reference Contact Information (Listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference) Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Designer Construction Manager 15 *Refer to attached- Attachment S.-Major Projects Completed in the Last Fine (5) Yearn - illustrate Capabilitq to Proiect information Provide Best Value Project Owner Project Name General Description of Project Budget History Schedule Performance Amount % of Bid Amount Date Days Bid Notice to Proceed Change Orders Contract Substantial Completion Date at Notice to Proceed Owner Enhancements Contract Final Completion Date at Notice to Proceed Unforeseen Conditions Change Order Authorized Substantial Completion Date Design Issues Change Order Authorized Final Completion Date Total Actual / Estimated Substantial Completion Date Final Cost Actual / Estimated Final Completion Date Project Manager Project Sup Safety Officer Quality Control Manager Name 7 Percentage of Time Devoted to the Project Proposed for this Project Did Individual Start and Complete the Project? If not, who started or completed the project in their place. Reason for change. Name Title/ Position Organization Telephone E-mail Owner Designer Construction Manager Suret Number of Issues Total Amount involved in Resolved Resolved Issues Number of Issues Total Amount involved in Pending Resolved Issues 16 i_ 1_ a� Paae Intentionally Left Blank s [ t ? I t( 2 @@ i i— .F CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Offeror and Agent Must be submitted with Proposal I, the undersigned Offeror, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this proposal document have been reviewed by me and my Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, i will be able to, within ten (14) business days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, fumish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this proposal. A jignxny R. Pharr ntractor riginal Signature) Contractor (Print) CONTRACTOR'S BUSINESS NAME; Pbaxy & Company (Print or Type) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: P O Sox 2791 3 Lubbock, Texas 79408 Boley-Featherston Insurance Company P O Sox 97513 Wichita Falls, TX 76307 940-723-7111 ( Agent: Scott Burleson zos � x NOTE TO CONTRACTOR If the time requirement specified above Is not met, the City has the right to reject this proposal and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Director of Purchasing & Contract Management for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2572. All insurance coverage is subject to the terms and conditions of each specific policy. We will not interpret insurance coverage for any party, which would require us to engage in the unauthorized practice of law. We recommend that you seek legal opinions on each policy from an attorney specializing in law in your field, and we assume no liability to any party as a result of our issuance of this document. PROPOSAL 15-12208-MA - Renovations to the Senior Citizens Center Pate Intentionally Left Blank SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE The City of Lubbock City Council desires to avail itself of the benefits of Section 252.0435 of the Local Government Code, and consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding proposals on City contracts. Pursuant to Section 252.0435 of the Local Government Code, City of Lubbock has adopted the following written definition and criteria for accurately determining the safety record of a proposer prior to awarding proposals on City contracts. The definition and criteria for determining the safety record of a proposer for this consideration shall be: The City of Lubbock shall consider the safety record of the offerors in determining the responsibility thereof. The City may consider any incidence involving worker safety or safety of the citizens of the City of Lubbock, be it related or caused by environmental, mechanical, operational, supervision or any other cause or factor. Specifically, the City may consider, among other things: a. Complaints to, or final orders entered by, the Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission (OSHRC), against the proposer for violations of OSHA regulations within the past three (3) years. b. Citations (as defined below) from an Environmental Protection Agency (as defined below) for violations within the past five (5) years. Environmental Protection Agencies include, but are not necessarily limited to, the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACOE), the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (USFWS), the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ), the Texas Natural Resource Conservation Commission (TNRCC) (predecessor to the TCEQ), the Texas Department of State Health Services (DSHS), the Texas Parks and Wildlife Department (TPWD), the Structural Pest Control Board (SPCB), agencies of local governments responsible for enforcing environmental protection or worker safety related laws or regulations, and similar regulatory agencies of other states of the United States. Citations include notices of violation, notices of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, and judicial final judgments. c. Convictions of a criminal offense within the past ten (10) years, which resulted in bodily harm or death. d. Any other safety related matter deemed by the City Council to be material in determining the responsibility of the offeror and his or her ability to perform the services or goods required by the proposal documents in a safe environment, both for the workers and other employees of offeror and the citizens of the City of Lubbock. In order to obtain proper information from offerors so that City of Lubbock may consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding proposals on City contracts, City of Lubbock requires that offerors answer the following three (3) questions and submit them with their proposals: QUESTION ONE Has the offeror, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the offeror, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of OSHA within the past three (3) years? YES NO X If the offeror has indicated YES for question number one above, the offeror must provide to City of Lubbock, with its proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such citation: Date of offense, location of establishment inspected, category of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty assessed. Offe o ' r r s Initials .I' QUESTION TWO F", Has the offeror; or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the offeror, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation,, partnership or institution, received citations for violations of environmental protection laws or regulations, of any kind or type, within the past five years? Citations include notice of violation, notice of enforcement, suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses, or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final. orders, and judicial final judgments. i YES NO R If the offeror has indicated YES for question number two above, the offeror must provide to City of Lubbock, with its proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction: Date of offense or occurrence, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, if any, and penalty assessed. QUESTION THREE Has the offeror, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by offeror, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership, or institution, ever been convicted, within the past ten (10) years, of a criminal offense which w resulted in serious bodily injury or death? YES NO X If the offeror has indicated YES for question number three above, the offeror must provide to City of Lubbock, with its proposal submission, the following information with respect to each such conviction: Date of offense, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, in any, and penalty ; assessed. QUESTION FOUR .88 Provide your company's. Experience Modification Rate and supporting information: ACKNOWLEDGEMENT THE STATE OF TEXAS j� COUNTY OF LUBBOCK 1J I certify that I have made no willful misrepresentations in this Questionnaire nor have I withheld information in my C1 statements and answers to questions. I am aware that the information given by me in this questionnaire will be investigated, with my full permission, and that any misrepresentations or omissions may cause my proposal to be rejected. ;Aature zny R. Pharr �1 Vice President Title 2 f ��FY —AT -HE T Cameron Cremeens, CRIS 1.� Cameron.Cremeens@boleyfeatherston.com _iff a Phone: (940)723-7111 - Toll Free, 800-234.1167 - Fax: (940)322-9549 • P.O. Box 97513 • 701 Lamar - Wichita Falls, Texas 76307 7513 • www.holayfeatherston.com March 17th, 2015 Jimmy Pharr Pharr Construction Company Dear Jimmy, For the policy period of July 31, 2014 to July 31, 2015, because of your long-term commitment to safety in the workplace, experience credits on your workers' compensation policy provide an EMR of .88. Thank you for your continued business, as well as for making employee safety a top priority. Regards, Cameron Cremeens, CRIS ry A Member of K & S GROUP, INC Independent Insurance Agents of Texas - Texas Alliance of Energy Producers - National Association of Surety Bond Producers i ., Page Intentionally Left Blank SUSPENSION AND DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION Federal Law (A-102 Common Rule and OMB Circular A-110) prohibits non -Federal entities from contracting with or making sub -awards under covered transactions to parties that are suspended or debarred or whose principals are suspended or debarred. Covered transactions include procurement contracts for goods or services equal to or in excess of $25,000 and all non -procurement transactions (e.g., sub -awards to sub -recipients). Contractors receiving individual awards of $25,000 or more and all sub -recipients must certify that their organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. Before an award of $25,000 or more can be made to your firm, you must certify that your organization and its principals are not suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. I, the undersigned agent for the firm named below, certify that neither. this firm nor its principals are suspended or debarred by a Federal agency. COMPANY NAME: Pharr do Company FEDERAL TAX ID or SOCIAL SECURITY No. 25-2182285 Signature of Company Printed name of company official signing above: Jimmy R. Pharr Date Signed: April 1, 2015 I PaLye Intentionally Left Blank PROPOSED LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS Minority Owned Company Name Location Services Provided Yes No 1. ❑ ❑ 2. ❑ ❑ 3. Pharr & Company Lubbock Concrete Work ❑ x 4. D Byer Pavement Lubbock pavement ❑ Qf 5. T&S Plastering Lubbock EFTS ❑ 6. Hallgren Co. Lubbock Door - Hardware ❑ X 7. Architectural Cabinetry Lubbock Millwork - Solid Surface ❑ x 8. Henley Interiors Lubbock Acoustical/Ceiling/Insulatibn K 9. ABF Roofing Lubbock Roofing ❑ K 10. K K Class, Inc. Lubbock Glass -Windows ❑ x 11. Paul Graham Lubbock Flooring ❑ R 12. Hargrove Painting Lubbock Paint ❑ � 13. ABCo Fire Protection Lubbock Fire Suppression ❑ rX 14. Precision Services Lubbock Plumbing/HVAC ❑ ❑ 15 Bright Star Lubbock Electrical ❑ ❑ 16. ° ❑ x THIS FORM SHALL BE COMPLETED AND RETURNED ALONG WITH YOUR PROPOSAL IF NO SUB -CONTRACTORS WILL BE USED PLEASE INDICATE SO SUBMITTED BY: PHARR do COMPANY (PRINT NAME OF COMPANY) PROPOSAL 15-12208-MA - Renovations to the Senior Citizens Center Pate Intentionally Left Blank I POST -CLOSING DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS The below -listed document must be received in the Purchasing Manager Office Not Later Than SEVEN BUSINESS DAYS after the close date when proposals are due. FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS t Pate Intentionally Left Blank FINAL LIST OF SUB -CONTRACTORS Minority Owned Company Name Location Services Provided Yes No 1. ❑ x 2. Grant Hill Lubbock Demolition ❑ x 3. Pharr & Company Lubbock Concrete ❑ x 4. D Byer Lubbock Pavement ❑ x 5. T & S Plastering Lubbock EFTS ❑ x 6. Architectural C. Millworks Lubbock Millwork ❑ R 7. A13F Roofing Lubbock Roofing ❑ K 8. Hallgresa Lubbock Doors/Hardware ❑ R 9. RK Glass Lubbock Glazing ❑ R 10. Grant Hill Lubbock Acoustical/Insulation ❑ 11. Paul Graham Lubbock Flooring ❑ 12. Anson Hargrove Lubbock Painting ❑ R 13. RSM Lubbock Toilet Conapt./Accessor. ❑ g 14. Precision Services Lubbock HVAC/Plumbing ❑ R 15. Greer Electric Lubbock Electrical ❑ K 16. ABCO Lubbock Fire Suppression ❑ N SUBMITTED BY: PHARR do COMPANY (PRINT NAME OF COMPANY) THIS FORM SHALL BE COMPLETED AND RETURNED NOT LATER THAN SEVEN BUSINESS DAYS AFTER THE CLOSE DATE WHEN PROPOSALS ARE DUE IF NO SUB -CONTRACTORS WILL BE USED PLEASE INDICATE SO PROPOSAL 15-12208-MA - Renovations to the Senior Citizens Center I Page Intentionally Left Blank 3 6. 2 t a i J �77 gg€ t__8 I PAYMENT BOND I I Page Intentionally Left Blank Bond #106273944 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $50,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that PHARR & COMPANY (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of ONE MILLION TWO HUNDRED THIRTY THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS ,$1,230,500.00) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee. dated theigh day of May. 2015,,for RFP 15-12200-MA - Renovations to the Senior Citizens Center and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said :ontract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the some extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 2oth day of may 2015. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America Surety �ltle)Attorney-in-Fact Pharr & Company (Company Name) By. JR. Pharr R. tore) Vice President (Title) No Text b The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and here designates Arthur J. Gallagher an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices m be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyshi . Travelers casualty and Surety City of By: Company of America Surety •-J� L4A.- itle}Pttorney-in-Fact an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws shown authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power 2 No Text STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO S CTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT DE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $5 ,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that PHARR & COMPAN/Y (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and e s (hereinafter called the Sur ty( ), as S uret y(s), are held and Obligee), in the amount of ONE MILLION TWO HUNT ($1,230,500.00) lawful money of the United States for themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, s presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a ert May. 2015. for RFP 15-12208-MA - Renovation to t1 y bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the THIRTY THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind ors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these written contract with the Obligee, dated thel4th day of 3 i_ and said Principal under the law is required efore commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contr t is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CO ITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and mate 'al to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be oid; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, at this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all 1' bilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it wdre copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHERE , the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this day of 2015. Surety *By: (Title) (Company Name) By: (Printed Name) (Signature) (Title) 1 ® g a The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to o business in Texas, and hereby designates an agent resident in Lubbock County to om any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such s etyship. 1 Surety By: (Title) rf Approved as to form: City of Lubbock By: City Attorney * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there inust be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. rill t _i 2 PERFORMANCE BOND 1 Pate Intentionally Left Blank Bond #106273944 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that PHARR &c COMPANY (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of ONE MILLION TWO HUNDRED THIRTY THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS ($1,230,500.00) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated thel4th day of May, 2015, for= 15-1220kh_U - Renovations to the Senior Citizens Center and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (a) have signed and sealed this instrument this 20th day of May 2015. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America Pharr & Company Surety (Company Name) * By By; Jimmy R. Pharr C) Attorn y-in-Fact Z"N e) ignatUr'C) ' Vice President (Title) 0 a The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designateskrthur J . Gallagher an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices maybe delivere and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Travelers Casualty and Surety (Title) At�rny-in-Fact� Approved *to City By: * No4: ;IZijrd,, an ofcer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showin that hauthority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power c srPauL TRAVELERS St. Paul Travelers Bond 1301 E. Collins Blvd Richardson TX 75081 Phone: 800-842-0812 Fax: 214570-6405 Il"ORTANT NOTICE TO OBTAIN INFORMATION OR MAKE A COMPLAINT: You may contact Travelers Casualty & Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty & Surety Company, Travelers Indemnity Company, Standard Fire Insurance Company and/or Farmington Casualty Company for information or to make a complaint at: Travelers Bond Attn: Claims 1500 Market Street West Tower, Suite 2900 Philadelphia, PA 19102 (267) 675-3057 (267) 675-3102 Fax You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain the information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: Texas Department of Insurance P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 (800) 252-3439 ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR BOND. This notice is for information only and does not become a part or a condition of the attached document and is given to comply with Section 2253-021, Government Code, and Section 53.202, Property Code, effective September 1, 2001. WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTQRNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER POWER OF ATTORNEY TRAVELERSFarmington Casualty Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company Attorney -In Fact No. 226008 Certificate No. 005959579 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Farmington Casualty Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut, that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint Steve Burleson, Staci Gross, and Julie Smith of the City of _ Wichita Falls , State of Texas , their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this day of _June 2014 Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Pall Guardian Insurance Company 24th St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company GASU,� NT••.• `f\RE 6 RN i/� \...�•��•'"w„ �Y Ay 's 9JP O� �110 �Wth• �4i�Y'1k0 � o � �r A dp°f�'O i .. �y a•: '• t ��:: ..,h`s Z GG,, � �- = 1951 �`• S E A 'n i i � o r CONN. �COI�p7. N 7898 S8ALi3 ° ��......•;t� �i day � n`' d *� °` �� ccc d�........:vaf� is•. a +ore State of Connecticut City of Hartford ss. By: Robert L. Raney, enior Vice President On this the 24th day of June 2014 before me personally appeared Robert L. Raney, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Suety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. 3 �.TlT In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. � My Commission expires the 30th day of June, 2016. �jOtIBUG Marie C. Tetreault, Notary Public 58440-8-12 Printed in U.S.A. THE 20th day of MaY , 20 15 This Power"of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, which resolutions are now in full force and effect, reading as follows: RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking, and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company, provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that any bond, recognizance, contract of indemnity, or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary; or (b) duly executed (under seal, if required) by one or more Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of each of the following officers: President, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents, Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys -in -Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. I, Kevin E. Hughes, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary, of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force and'effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, l have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this illC (5�-- /4t� Kevin E. Hughes, Assistant Sec tary p2. tmsu q+,�} 9JPLiY 4hp8 �1RR �_.,lY 3 - of [\ � H��t�tttr� F �9 ,tQZpRPON���!.s � G� pPORgT �°jn ....° W coHa B N 7896 SSALfa W�o ofs�....r;,+" To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, call 1-800-421-3880 or contact us at www.travelersbond.com. Please refer to the Attorney -In -Fact number, the above -named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached. WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE \ (CONTRACTS MORE THAN %100,0001 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE as Principal(s), and that PHARR & COMPANY (hereinafter called the Principal(s), (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of ONE MILLION O HUNDRED THIRTY THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS ($1,230,500.00) lawful money of the United tates for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, exec ors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a ceri`a.n written contract with the Obligee, dated thel4th day of 115_ fnr RFP 15-122(1R-MA - Rennvatinnc to a fieninr Citizens ('enter 'i and said principal under the law is required before commencing \tod rk provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred madea part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGA ION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications anX contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the g Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have day of 2015. I; Surety (Title) of Section 2253.021(a) of the ce with the provisions of said sealed this instrument this _ (Compare Name) By: (Printed Nam (Signature) (Title) 1 . t j The undersigned surety company represents that it is d ly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates an agent resident ' Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matter arising out of such suretyship. Approved as to Form City of Lubbock By: City Attorney * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, tl that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If attorney for our files. Surety *By: (Title) must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing - ied by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of 2 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE Page Intentionally Left Blank CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE t� a I TO: CITY OF LUBBOCK DATE: P.O. BOX 2000, Room 204 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 TYPE OF PROJECT: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT (Name and Address of Insured) is, at the date of this certificate, insured by this Company with respect to the business operations hereinafter described, for the typed of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by this company, the further hereinafter described. Exceptions to standard policy noted hereon. TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER EFFECTIVE EFFECTIVE LIMITS DATE DATE GENERAL LIABILITY Commercial General Liability General Aggregate $ _.. Claims Made Products-Comp/Op AGG $ Occurrence Personal & Adv. Injury $ Owner's & Contractors Protective Each Occurrence $ ❑ Fire Damage (Any one Fire) $ Med Exp (Any one Person) $ AUTOMOTIYELIABILITY Any Auto Combined Single Limit $ 01 All Owned Autos Bodily Injury (Per Person) $ Scheduled Autos Bodily Injury (Per Accident) $ Iv Hired Autos Property Damage $ Non -Owned Autos GARAGE LIABILITY Any Auto Auto Only - Each Accident $ Other than Auto Only: Each Accident $ Aggregate $ BUILDER'SRISK L 100% of the Total Contract Price $ G INSTALLATIONFLOATER $ EXCESS LIABILITY Umbrella Form Each Occurrence $ Aggregate $ Other Than Umbrella Form $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY The Proprietor/ 1] Included Statutory Limits Partners/Executive ❑ Excluded Each Accident $ Officers are: Disease Policy Limit $ Disease -Each Employee $ OTHER The above policies either in the body thereof or by appropriate endorsement provide that they may not be changed or canceled by the insurer in less than the legal time required after the insured has received written notice of such change or cancellation, or in case there is no legal requirement, in less than five days in advance of cancellation. FIVE COPIES OF THE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE MUST BE SENT TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK (Name of Insurer) L-IN Title: The Insurance Certificates Furnished shall name the City of Lubbock as Additional Insured on Auto /General _ Liability and provide a Waiver of Subrogation in favor of the City of Lubbock, IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S. THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT SHALL INCLUDE PRODUCTS AND COMPLETE OPERATIONS. t CONTRACTORCHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of t coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS ADDITIONAL INSURED ON AUTO/GENERAL LIABILITY ON A PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY BASIS TO INCLUDE PRODUCTS OF COMPLETE OPERATIONS. PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. COPIES OF THE ENDORSEMENTS ARE REQUIRED. A- REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512-305-7238 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (D) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and ( (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (F) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (G) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. Page Intentionally Left Blank CONTRACT Page Intentionally Left Blank CONTRACT 12208 STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 14 day of May , 2015 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Pharr & Company of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain nnprovements described as follows: PROPOSAL 15-12208-MA - Renovations to the Senior Citizens Center and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. Pharr & Company's proposal dated April 1, 2015 is incorporated into and made a part of this agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. f CONTRACTOR: r . Pharr & Company .. II-0 HUM COMPLETE ADDRESS: Company: Pharr & Company Address: P.O. Box 2791 City, State, Zip Lubbock, Texas 79408 ATTEST: Cqcforate S reta _r Page Intentionally Left Blank GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT Page Intentionally Left Blank GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative Wesley Everett, Director of Facilities Management, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, - supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative Freese and Nichols, Inc., so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or Resident Project Representatives as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular way under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or Resident Project Representatives will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Offerors, General Instructions to Offerors, Proposal, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificates, and all other documents made available to Offeror for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Offerors. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. The City reserves the right to approve or disapprove the selection of any subcontractor(s). 7. Q 0 10 11 12. 13 WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. The pipeline must be backfilled, tested, final grading and seeding performed for substantial completion. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished ten copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. LINES AND GRADES The Contractor is responsible for construction layout based on the control provided in the construction documents. All lines and grades shall be furnished whenever Owner's Representative (as distinguished from Resident Project Representative(s)) deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract 2 7 documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, s such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative (as distinguished from Resident Project Representative(s))has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors, as distinguished from Resident Project Representative, as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING 18. [us 20 21. It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the t `' terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor.. Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Contractor is responsible for construction quality control testing, cost, and reporting of the type and extent required by the contract documents. The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location 4 where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests 1 will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in ' the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy { such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the 1--= accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations in Paragraph 23. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the observation of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of F4"1 the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the , compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent to the firm actually performing the work, and additional higher -tier markups limited to 5% to cover additional overhead and insurance costs; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work, as estimated by the Engineer and approved by the Owner.. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C) (1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the proposal, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that I 3 -, such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the proposals are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of proposals, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before offering of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than seven (7) calendar days prior to the opening of proposals. In the absence of a requested clarification for a conflict in the documents prior to proposals being reviewed, it will be assumed that the Contractor proposes the higher cost alternative on conflicts identified after proposals are reviewed. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and Engineer and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self- insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERFICATE OF INSURANCE ALONG WITH A COPY OF THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS A ADDITIONAL INSURED ON AUTO/GENERAL LIABILITY ON A PRIMARY AND NON CONTRIBUTORY BASIS TO INCLUDE PRODUCT-COMP/OP-AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKER'S COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR. THE ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT SHALL INCLUDE PRODUCTS AND COMPLETE OPERATIONS. A. Commercial General Liability Insurance (Primary Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation required) The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: E Products & Completed Operations Hazard Personal Injury & Advertising Injury B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $1,000,,000 Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation Required) The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance. DELETED E. Umbrella Liability Insurance. DELETED F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation required) Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least STATUTORY AMOUNTS f 6 4 1. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC- 82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the 0 F. project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and I i report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; _ and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; rA (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 i- days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and i (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 1 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance ' Regulation. Providing false or misleading infonnation may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor ' does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. Proof of Coverage j 10 Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the proposal specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other 11 a commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30-point bold type and text in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee. " "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 800-372-7713 or 512-804- 4000 (we vmtdi.state.tx.us) to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage, " and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: __ (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; E (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: iI (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and 12 3 (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and Engineer and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, material men and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner and Engineer, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to offering. 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES 13 33 34. 35. The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner and Engineer and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to proposing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising there from. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the Notice to Proceed and contract documents, respectively, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $150 (ONE HUNDRED AND FIFTY) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION 14 It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this i r contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the proposal; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative (as distinguished from the Resident Project Representative) may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than within twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by - Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in ._ securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except 'I where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their proposals offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are ._s expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, 15 39. 41 42 payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project, provided that the over run or under run of estimated quantities note exceed 15% of the estimated quantity. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner and Engineer, and any of its officers, agents and employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The detennination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Payment for materials on hand and delivered to the project site will be limited to 100 percent less the 5 percent standard retainage until actually incorporated into the project. 16 t--, Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work perfonned, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's 1 Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete f the work within the time provided in this contract. 44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's (. Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and ' Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time but not to exceed 30 days after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall pay all claims, cost, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of the engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution cost) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed, (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims, (c) Damage to another contractor, 17 47 (d) Notification to owner of failure to make payments to Subcontractors or Suppliers, (e) Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required, (f) Failure to submit monthly progress schedule updates or revised scheduled as requested by Owner, (g) Failure to provide Project photographs required by Specifications. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum 18 �r 4 s which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed proposals, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. - 50. BONDS 19 The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by a Surety Company listed on the State Treasury's "Approved" list and authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not 1_ be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions i conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the 1-J prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority 1 to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, 4 Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same i-- may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in r any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the 3 Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or i_ i other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) } days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. , 20 i In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper ' performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 56. NONAPPROPRIATION All funds for payment by the City under this contract are subject to the availability of an annual appropriation for this purpose by the City. In the event of non -appropriation of funds by the City Council of the City of Lubbock for the goods or services provided under the contract, the City will terminate the contract, without termination charge or other liability, on the last day of the then -current fiscal year or when the appropriation made for the then -current year for the goods or services covered by this contract is spent, whichever event occurs first. If at any time funds are not appropriated for the continuance of this contract, cancellation shall be accepted by the Seller on thirty (30) days prior written notice, but failure to give such notice shall be of no effect and the City shall not be obligated under this contract beyond the date of termination. 57. THE CITY RIGHT TO AUDIT At any time during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years thereafter the City or a duly authorized audit representative of the City, or the State of Texas, at its expense and at reasonable times, reserves the right to audit Contractor's records and books relevant to all services provided under this Contract. In the event such an audit by the City reveals any errors/overpayments by the City, Contractor shall refund the City the full amount of such overpayments within thirty (30) days of such audit findings, or the City, at its option, reserves the right to deduct such amounts owing the City from any payments due Contractor. 58. NON -ARBITRATION The City reserves the right to exercise any right or remedy available to it by law, contract, equity, or otherwise, including without limitation, the right to seek any and all forms of relief in a court of competent jurisdiction. Further, the City shall not be subject to any arbitration process prior to exercising its unrestricted right to seek judicial remedy. The remedies set forth herein are cumulative and not exclusive, and may be exercised concurrently. To the extent of any conflict between this provision and another provision in, or related to, this document, this provision shall control. 21 Page Intentionally Left Blank DAVIS-BACON WAGE DETERMINATIONS Page Intentionally Left Blank EXHIBIT A General Decision Number: TX150334 01/02/2015 TX334 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20140334 State: Texas Construction Type: Building Counties: Crosby and Lubbock Counties in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Executive Order (EO) 13658 establishes an hourly minimum wage of $10.10 for 2015 that applies to all contracts subject to the Davis -Bacon Act for which the solicitation is issued on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification ( listed on this wage determination at least $10.10 (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract. The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number 0 BOIL0074-003 01/01/2014 Publication Date O1/02/2015 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER ......................$ 23.14 21.55 ---------------------------------------------------------------- CARP0665-001 05/01/2014 --= Rates Fringes CARPENTER ........................ $-20_81-------------6.76-_ ELEC0602-008 09/01/2014 I- " Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN ......................$ 20.84 3%+8.15 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ENGI0178-005 06/01/2014 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR. (1) Tower Crane .............$ 29.00 10.60 (2) Cranes with Pile Driving or Caisson Attachment and Hydraulic Crane 60 tons and above ..... $ 28.75 10.60 (3) Hydraulic cranes 59 Tons and under ..............$ 27.50 10.60 ---------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0084-011 06/15/2014 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL ........... $ 22.02 6.35 ---------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0263-003 12/01/2013 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL ........... $ 22.70 5.35 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PLUM0404-026 07/01/2013 Rates Fringes PIPEFITTER .......................$ 22.80 7.16 PLUMBER ..........................$ 22.80 7.16 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SHEE0049-001 06/01/2014 Rates Fringes SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Duct Installation Only) ...............$ 22.49 11.14 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SUTX2014-060 07/21/2014 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER .......................$ 20.04 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER ... $ 19.60 0.00 INSULATOR - MECHANICAL (Duct, Pipe & Mechanical System Insulation) ...............$ 19.77 7.13 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING .......... $ 12.27 0.00 LABORER: Common or General ...... $ 12.35 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Brick ... $ 11.36 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Cement/Concrete..................$ 10.58 0.00 LABORER: Pipelayer..............$ 12.49 2.13 LABORER: Roof Tearoff........... $ 11.28 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe....... $ 14.25 0.00 s OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader ............. .$ 13.93 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer .............$ 18.29 1.31 OPERATOR: Drill .................$ 16.22 0.34 OPERATOR: Forklift ..............$ 14.83 0.00 <. OPERATOR: Grader/Blade .......... $ 13.37 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader ................$ 13.55 0.94 OPERATOR: Mechanic ..............$ 17.52 3.33 OPERATOR: Paver (Asphalt, Aggregate, and Concrete) ......... $ 16.03 0.00 PAINTER (Brush, Roller, and Spray) ...........................$ 14.27 0.00 ROOFER ...........................$ 13.75 0.00 SHEET METAL WORKER, Excludes HVAC Duct Installation ........... $ 21.13 6.53 TILE FINISHER ....................$ 11.22 0.00 TILE SETTER ......................$ 14.00 2.01 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck ........ $ 12.39 1.18 TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck ..... $ 19.65 8.57 TRUCK DRIVER: Semi -Trailer -, Truck.,.,..,. ... $ 12.50 0.00 --< TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck ....... ---------------------------------------------------------------- $ 12.00 4.11 WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. k Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" or "UAVG" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 6 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the "SU" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non -union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. pH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current 1 negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis -Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division ' U.S. Department of Labor t 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an _ interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the _t interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ---------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------- END OF GENERAL DECISION EXHIBIT B Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. EXHIBIT C Prevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. SPECIFICATIONS Page Intentionally Left Blank PROJECT MANUAL RENOVATIONS TO THE SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER (2001 19TH STREET) FOR THE CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK, TEXAS PROJECT # 92323 ARCHITECTS PROJECT NO. 898-14A r X DIRKS DATE: 10/28/2014 SET NO. ARCHITECTS PC AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS 1710 15TH STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 TEL 806/762-1226 FAX 806/762-1257 TABLE OF CONTENTS NOTE: These documents have been arranged in accordance with the CSI Format for Construction Specifications. 1"" DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS REFERENCE CITY REQUIREMENT DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02230 SITE CLEARING 02300 EARTHWORK 02361 TERMITE CONTROL 02751 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02755 ASPHALT PAVING RECLAMATION PATCHING 02760 ASPHALT SEALCOAT DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03301 MISCELLANEOUS CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DIVISION 5 - METALS 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06105 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06160 SHEATHING 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07190 WATER REPELLENTS 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07215 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION 07415 COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 07535 FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07591 MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION 07620 SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 898-14A TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS, CONT DMSION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08411 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08800 GLAZING DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09310 CERAMIC TILE 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09651 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09680 CARPET 09910 PAINTING 09960 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09972 CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS DMSION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10350 FLAGPOLES 10440 SPECIALTY SIGNS 10521 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12494 ROLLER SHADES DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT APPLICABLE 898-14B TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 2 SECTION 02070 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section..R p 1.2 SUMMARY 11 A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building and structures. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements and walls. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused. it B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below -grade improvements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off -site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to snake progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 898-14A SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 -1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION CONT 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's on -site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building. B. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA -approved certification program. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on -site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXA.MINATION A. Verify that utilities and services within the limits of the project have been disconnected, turned off, rerouted, or capped before starting selective demolition operations. 898-14A SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION CONT B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. -, f C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. D. Perform or engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations. 1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing and HVAC systems, equipment, and electrical systems and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. C. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris -removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." ; 1; 898-14A SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION CONT B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. S. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame - cutting operations. Maintain portable fire -suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. S. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin -infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off -site. 7. Remove structural fraining members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end -of -Project rates for reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval. 1. Building Structure and Shell: Selected area as indicated on the drawings. 1 898-14A 9 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 4 SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs -on -grade, walks, pavements, turf and grasses, and plants. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 4. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures. 5. Base course for concrete pavements. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below -grade improvements and utilities. 2. Divisions 2, 15, and 16 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical utilities and t buried mechanical and electrical structures. ff 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low -strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot -mix asphalt paving. C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill. E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices and changes in the Work. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 20 feet in length. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. 898-14A EARTHWORK 02300 -1 EARTHWORK CONT H. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the to surface of a fill or backfill iminediatel below 1� Pp P Y t • subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials. I. Utilities: On -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required: 1. Controlled low -strength material, including design mixture. 2. Warning tapes. B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below: 1. Warning Tape: 12 inches long; of each color. C. Material Test Reports: For each on -site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557. D. Compaction Test Results: Submit reports of compaction tests for fill and backfill at all municipal utility services lines to the Contractor, Engineer, Architect and Municipal Authority. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspection Service: The General Contractor will employ a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to classify proposed on -site and off -site borrow soil to verify that soils comply with specified requirements and to perform required field and laboratory testing. B. Erosion Control: The Contractor will ensure that the proper TPDES General Permit TXR150000 has been obtained prior commencement of grading activity. The Contractor will refer to and properly construct and maintain all stormwater pollution prevention plan measures set forth in the TPDES General Permit and the separate SWPPP Plan. C. Traffic Control: Contractor will coordinate scheduling with the City of Lubbock Traffic Safety Department for any activities that inay disrupt normal traffic. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth moving operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct approaches, parking, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before beginning earth moving operations. 1. Contact DIG TESS (1-800-DIG-TESS) for utility locates prior to commencing grading/construction activity. 898-14A EARTHWORK 02300 - 2 EARTHWORK, CONT , Do not commence earth moving operations until required temporary erosion- and sedimentation -control C. g P q P �' measures are in place. D. Existing Improvements: Maintain utility existing lines in place. Provide protection, underpiping, and shoring as required to maintain existing service lines in place. 1. The Contractor shall repair all existing items which are disturbed or damaged as a result of the Work under this contract. 2. All damages will be repaired to preexisting conditions acceptable to the governing municipal authorities and the Architect. E. Trench Safety: 1. Trench safety design, planning, and implementation is solely the responsibility of the Contractor and is beyond the scope of these plans. Wherever trench depths exceed 48", or when trench protection is required for any reason, trench protection shall be provided by meeting applicable requirements of Department of Labor/OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926, "Occupational Safety and Health Standards — Excavations". 2. At all times that work is progressing, the Contractor shall have a designated competent person on - site who shall be responsible for supervising the work and whose duty it will be to perform required safety inspections and to direct all required construction safety activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils for Building Fill: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, or SM according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. 1. Liquid Limit: 30. 2. Plasticity Index: 5 to 12. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone or crushed caliche, and natural or crushed sand with plasticity index of 4 to 12; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not inore than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. E. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural pea gravel or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. F. Backfill and Fill (outside of building lines): Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter with plasticity index not to exceed 15. 898-14A EARTHWORK 02300 - 3 ;f } EARTHWORK CONT G. Sand: Clean blow sand with no organic materials or clay clods with plasticity index of 8 or less. H. Topsoil: Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface -soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials. 1. Topsoil containing nutgrass or other objectionable growth shall be removed and replaced by the contractor at the contractor's own expense including all irrigation, plant materials and other improvements installed in or adjoining the objectionable growth. 1. Trench Backfill: Granular material or `Backshot" to be used to backfill new utility lines entering the building and a minimum of 10 feet beyond the building line. Select granular material from excavation or barrow may be used beyond the 10 feet perimeter from the structure as approved by the engineer. No stones retained on a 2-inch sieve, frozen lumps, chunks of high plasticity clay or other material objectionable to the engineer. Utility excavations through the select fill backfill beneath the structure shall be backfilled with select fill and compacted as specified for the building pad. Utility Trench Plug: A utility trench plug is to be installed for all utilities entering the building footprint including, but not limited to, electrical, gas, water and sewer. The plug should extend a minimum of 2 feet beyond the footing, each way, and from the bottom of the trench to the surface. The plug material should be controlled low -strength lean concrete. 2.2 CONTROLLED LOW -STRENGTH MATERIAL A. Controlled Low -Strength Material: Self -compacting, low -density, flowable concrete material produced from the following: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. 3. Normal -Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, pea gravel, 3/8-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 4. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. B. Produce low -density, controlled low -strength material with the following physical properties: Compressive Strength: Minimum 140 psi consisting of a concrete mixture of pea gravel and sand with a cement content of 1-1/2 sacks per cubic yard, when tested according to ASTM C 495. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali -resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. 898-14A EARTHWORK 02300 - 4 EARTHWORK CONT PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations. }' B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations. C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. , 3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavate 36 inches of subgrade, after topsoil stripping, a minimum of 5 feet beyond the exterior building perimeter. Compact 6 inches of subgrade and each 6-inch layer of select fill to specified limits. 2. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces. 898-14A EARTHWORK 02300 - 5 EARTHWORK, CONT 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. 1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter, hand -excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe or conduit circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 3. For flat-bottomed, multiple -duct conduit units, hand -excavate trench bottoms and support conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A. Notify Architect/Engineer when trench and footing excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Architect/Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. Proof -roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic -tired and loaded 10-wheel, tandem -axle dump truck weighing not less than 10 tons to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof -roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Completely proof -roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof -rolling in direction perpendicular w_ to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Geotechnical Consultant, and replace with compacted backfill or fill in loose lifts of 6 inches ► and compact to 100% of standard proctor density (ASTM D-698-91) when tested in accordance .-- with ASTM D 2922. D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation. 898-14A i EARTHWORK 02300 - 6 EARTHWORK. CONT 3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect. i 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect. 3.10 ADDITIONAL EXCAVATIONS A. When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Geotechnical Consultant, who will make an inspection on conditions. If it is determined that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are unsuitable, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are encountered and replace excavated material as directed. 1. The Contract Sum may be adjusted by an appropriate Contract Modification. 2. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of Conditions of the contract relative to changes in Work. 3.11 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. 3.12 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.13 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with controlled low -strength concrete; fill to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 898-14A f t EARTHWORK 02300 - 7 1 EARTHWORK, CONT D. Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch- thick, concrete -base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase course. Concrete is specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." E. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing. F. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material or satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit. z 1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. G. Controlled Low -Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low -strength material to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. H. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation at unpaved areas. I. Controlled Low -Strength Material: Place final backfill of controlled low -strength material to final subgrade elevation or minimum 6" thickness with compacted backfill above as required at paved areas including drives, parking and traffic areas. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.14 SOIL FILL A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fill. B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory top soil material. 2. Under asphalt pavements, use satisfactory soil material and caliche base material. 3. Under concrete pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. 3.15 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and' is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. a. Stockpile or spread and dry removed wet satisfactory soil material. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture level is reduced to satisfactory value. 898-14A EARTHWORK 02300 - 8 EARTHWORK. CONT 3.16 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 6 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 698-91 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2922-91: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 6 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 3. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95 percent. 3.17 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish grade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. 3.18 BUILDING SLAB LEVELING COURSE A. Place fill material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross- section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting material during placement operations. 1. When a compacted course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or less, place material in a single layer. When indicated to be more than 6 inches thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6 inches or less than 3 inches in thickness when compacted. 2. Level top of fill course with blue tops at a maximum of 25 feet on center. 3. Hand tamp comers or locations where equipment cannot reach. No loose fill or uncompacted soil will be allowed under slabs. 3.19 SAND COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS -ON -GRADE A. Place sand course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 898-14A EARTHWORK 02300 - 9 EARTHWORK CONT B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact sand course under cast -in -place concrete slabs -on -grade as follows: 1. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Place 2-inch sand cushion with a plasticity index of 8 or less. 3. Compact sand course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 3.20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements. 2. Determine that fill material and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements. 3. Determine, at the required frequency, that in -place density of compacted fill complies with requirements. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1. A qualified field technician is to be on site during all soil processing and placement. C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. 1. Perform at least one moisture -density (Proctor) test, Atterberg Limits test and percent finer than #200 sieve test per soil type for subgrade and fill. D. Footing Subgrade Bearing Test: At footing subgrades, at least one test for each 50 linear feet of continuous footing of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Perform ' one test for each major spot footing. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. E. Testing agency will field test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556 (sound cone method), ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937 (dry cylinder method), as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than seven tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for every 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests. 3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for every 100 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests. F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 898-14A EARTHWORK 02300 - 10 EARTHWORK CONT 3.21 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. S. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.22 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02300 898-14A EARTHWORK 02300 -11 SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Soil treatment with termiticide. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood preservative treatment by pressure process. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of termite control product. 1. Include the EPA -Registered Label for termiticide products. B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. C. Product Certificates: For termite control products, from manufacturer. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products from single manufacturer. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA -Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground -supported slabs before construction. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA -Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required 898-14A TERMITE CONTROL 02361 -1 TERMITE CONTROL CONT for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA -Registered Label. L Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bayer Environmental Science; Premise 75. b. Syngenta; Probuild TC. 2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning application of termite control treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by teriniticide manufacturer. 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA -Registered Label for products. 3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA -Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly. 1. Slabs -on -Grade: Under ground -supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating 898-14A TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 2 TERMITE CONTROL CONT the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground -supported slabs are installed Use waterproof barrier according to EPA -Registered Label instructions. D. Post warning signs in areas of application. E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. 3.5 INSTALLING METAL MESH BARRIER SYSTEM A. Install metal mesh barrier system where indicated to provide a continuous barrier to entry of subterranean termites according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fit mesh tightly around pipe or other penetrations, and terminate at slab and foundation perimeters. 2. Install mesh under the perimeter of concrete slab edges and joints after vapor barrier and reinforcing steel are in place, and comply with manufacturer's written installation methods. B. Inspect annually for termite activity and effectiveness of metal mesh barrier system according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 02361 �. 898-14A TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 3 S SECTION 02751 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Driveways. 2. Curbs and gutters. 3. Walks. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast -furnace slag. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Other Action Submittals: 1. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. C. Field quality -control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide a minimum 48 hour notification to the Architect/Engineer before placing any concrete. B. Ready -Mix -Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 941C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. E. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated. 898-14A CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 1 -- CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT CONT 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 4 A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. B. Pavement -Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil -based materials, 55 deg F for water -based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal -framed plywood, or other approved panel -type materials to provide full -depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet or less. Do not use notched and bent forms. B. Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. B. Deformed -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet. C. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed. D. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain -steel bars. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. E. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. F. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive g : strength than concrete specified, and as follows: 1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, gray portland cement Type I or Type H. a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C. Maximum 15%. b. Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. 898-14A CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 2 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT. CONT B. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4M, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a ' single source with documented service -record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar paving applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal. P C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M. D. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. E. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material. y 1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 1 2.4 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete paving, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches long. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Monofilament Fibers: 1) Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Fiberstrand 100, Fiberstrand 150. 2) FORTA Corporation; FORTA ECONO-MONO or FORTA Mighty -Mono. 3) Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.; Grace MicroFiber, 4) Metalcrete Industries; Polystrand 1000. 2.5 CURING MATERIALS A. Water: Potable. B. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ChemMasters; Spray -Film. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar. C. Kaufman Products, Inc.; VaporAid. d. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON. e. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid. f. Vexcon Chemicals Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist. 2.6 RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint Fillers: ASTM. D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips with removable top cap which forms sealant cavity. IN B. Rock Salt: Sodium chloride crystals, kiln dried, coarse gradation with 100 percent passing 3/8-inch sieve and 85 percent retained on a No. 8 sieve. 898-14A CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 3 1 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT CONT. ~" 2.7 PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Pavement -Marking Paint: Alkyd -resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with AASHTO M 248, Type N; colors complying with FS TT-P-1952. 1. Color: Yellow as indicated. 2.8 WHEEL STOPS A. Wheel Stops: Precast, air -entrained concrete, 2500-psi minimum compressive strength, 6 inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and holes for anchoring to substrate. 1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 inch in diameter, 10-inch minimum length. 2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal -weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method. B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal -weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3500 psi. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. C. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal -weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows: 1. Air Content: 4-1/2 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1 inch nominal maximum aggregate size. D. Chemical Admixtures: Use adtnixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage by weight of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements as follows: 1. Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 15 percent. F. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd.. y' 898-14A CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 4 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT. CONT a 2.10 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. -? 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances. B. Proof -roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. 1. Completely proof -roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Proof -roll with a pneumatic -tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem -axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. 3. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form -release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B. Support reinforcing with manufactured chairs. Stone, brick or wood supports will not be allowed. C. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond -reducing materials. D. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. 898-14A CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 5 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT CONT E. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. La adjoining pieces at least one full � g p P J g mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated. 1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated. B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints. 1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated. 3. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint -filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 30 feet unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 4. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint -filler sections together. 5. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks. 2. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate edging -tool marks on concrete surfaces. Y 898-14A 4 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 6 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT CONT 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast -in. B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing. F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. G. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off. H. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open -textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments. Cold -Weather Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following: 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures. J. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI305R and as follows when hot -weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water -soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.7 FLOAT FINISHING A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed -water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power -driven floats or by hand 898-14A CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 7 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT CONT floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Medium -to -Fine -Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft -bristle broom across float -finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine -line texture. 3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection. C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing. D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, curing compound or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Continuous water -fog spray. 2. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas that have been subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period 3.9 PAVING TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows: 1. Elevation: 1/4 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/8 inch. 4. Alignment of Tie -Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/2 inch per 12 inches of tie bar. 5. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch. 6. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch. 7. Aligmment of Dowel -Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch per 12 inches of dowel. 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus. 3.10 PAVEMENT NL RKING A. Do not apply pavement -marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. B. Allow concrete paving to cure for a minimum of 28 days and be dry before starting pavement marking. 898-14A CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 8 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT CONT r <: C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce markings of dimensions indicated with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils. Apply two (2) coats. Apply graphic symbols and lettering with paint -resistant, die -cut stencils, firmly secured to concrete surface. Mask an extended area beyond edges of each stencil to prevent paint application beyond stencil. Apply paint so that it cannot run beneath stencil. 3.11 WHEEL STOPS A. Securely attach wheel stops to paving with not less than two galvanized -steel dowels located at one - quarter to one-third points. Install dowels in drilled holes in the paving and bond dowels to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notification: Provide 48 hour inspection notification to the Architect prior to placing concrete. All reinforcing, expansion joints and forms to be in -place prior to inspection. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 25 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive -strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. Maintain slump cone on site during concrete pours for additional testing if required. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when it is 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. Hold one specimen for future testing, if required 6. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one specimen at seven days and two specimens at 28 days. Hold on specimen for future testing, if required. D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, air temperature at time of placement, amount of additional water added on site, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 898-14A CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 9 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT CONT E. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. F. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. H. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.13 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect. B. Protect concrete paving from dainage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. C. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. END OF SECTION 02751 898-14A CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 -10 SECTION 02755 - ASPHALT PAVING RECLAMATION PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. In -place cement stabilized base reconstruction. 2. Hot -mix asphalt patching. 3. Pavement -marking paint. 4. Wheel stops. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 2 Section "Asphalt Sealcoat" for sealcoating of existing and patched asphalt pavement areas. 1.3 DEFINITION A. Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. 1. Job -Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work. B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. C. Material Certificates: For each paving material, from manufacturer. D. Material Test Reports: For each paving material, indicate and interpret test results for compliance of materials with requirements indicated. E. Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to Architect from the testing services, with copy to Contractor 1. Asphalt Paving Stability and Density. 2. Flexible Base PI and field density. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pavement -marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture, and directions for storage. 898-14A ASPHALT PAVING RECLAMATION PATCHING 02755 - 1 ASPHALT PAVING RECLAMATION PATCHING, CONT B. Store pavement -marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met: I. Prime Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 2. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 3. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations in ASTM D 3910. 4. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of placement. 5. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement. B. Pavement -Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil -based materials and 55 deg F for water -based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BASE MATERIALS A. Base Course: Cold mill existing asphalt layer and 6 inches of existing base material. B. Cementitious Material: Use the following Cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, gray Portland cement Type I or Type IL C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M. 2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320 or AASHTO MP la, PG 64-22. B. Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime coat complying with TXDOT standard specifications "Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions" Item 310 "Type RC-2". C. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 emulsified asphalt, or ASTM D 2397 cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. D. Sand: ASTM D 1073, Grade Nos. 2 or 3. 2.3 MIXES A. Hot -Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot -laid, hot -mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction and complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located. 2. Stabilize Base Course: Crushing and mixing of existing asphalt paving and 6 inch caliche base course with 6 percent Portland cement added to total volume and water mist. 3. Surface Course: TXDOT Item 302 "Type D", 2" thickness. 898-14A ASPHALT PAVING RECLAMATION PATCHING 02755 - 2 ASPHALT PAVING RECLAMATION PATCHING CONT B. Emulsified -Asphalt Slurry: ASTM D 3910, Type 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that paving is dry and in suitable condition to begin milling. 3.2 COLD MILLING BASE COURSE A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold milling. 1. Saw cut perimeter of patch area. 2. Mill patch area to a depth of 8 inches. 3. Mill pavement and base course for full depth reclamation with rotor cutting head equipment. 4. Mix Portland cement and water mist during milling. 5. Remove excess milling, shape and compact for new asphalt base course. 6. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold milling. 3.3 PATCHING A. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot -mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-nux asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. 3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. B. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound -aggregate base course at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd.. Apply enough material to penetrate and seal but not flood surface. Allow prime coat to cure. 1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated. 2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving. 3.5 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PLACING A. Machine place hot-inix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 1. Place hot -mix asphalt surface course in single lift. 2. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F. 3. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphalt -paving mat. i_ 898-14A ASPHALT PAVING RECLAMATION PATCHING 02755 - 3 ASPHALT PAVING RECLAMATION PATCHING CONT i; B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required. 1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course. C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable band tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot -mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. 3.6 COMPACTION A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot -mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot -mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory -plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F. B. Breakdown Rolling; Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements. C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot -mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot -mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: 1. Average Density: A minimum of 92 percent (8 percent air voids) and a maximum of 97 percent (3 percent air voids) of maximum theoretical specific gravity. Density to be verified by core samples. D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot -mix asphalt is still warm. E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly. F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot -mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness. G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. 3.7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: L Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 898-14A ASPHALT PAVING RECLAMATION PATCHING 02755 - 4 ASPHALT PAVING RECLAMATION PATCHING CONT B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the -, following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. Base Course: 1/4 inch. 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch. 3.8 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Do not apply pavement -marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. B. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking. C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils. Minimum 2 coats. 3.9 WHEEL STOPS A. Securely attach wheel stops to pavement with not less than two galvanized -steel dowels embedded at one - quarter to one-third points. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Thickness: In -place compacted thickness of hot -mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549. C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot -mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances. D. In -Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979. 1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four samples of hot -mix asphalt -paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job -mix specifications. 2. In -place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726. a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken. b. Field density of in -place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726. E. Replace and compact hot -mix asphalt where core tests were taken. F. Remove and replace or install additional hot -mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. 898-14A ASPHALT PAVING RECLAMATION PATCHING 02755 - 5 ASPHALT PAVING RECLAMATION PATCHING CONT 3.11 DISPOSAL A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally x dispose of them in an EPA -approved landfill. I . Do not allow milled materials to accumulate on -site. F END OF SECTION 02755 898-14A ASPHALT PAVING RECLAMATION PATCHING 02755 - 6 SECTION 02760 —ASPHALT SEALCOAT PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1..2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Design, testing, and quality control required for the proper production of an asphalt sealcoat product and all materials, equipment and workmanship required for the application of an asphalt sealcoat to an existing asphalt pavement as shown on the plans, as specified in these specifications and the special provisions. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 2 Section "Asphalt Paving Reclamation Repairs" for aggregate subbase and base courses and repairs. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Asphalt sealcoats shall be manufactured by uniformly blending asphalt emulsions, aggregates, water, and various admixtures in a central plant capable of producing a minimum of 750 gallons per hour of finished product. B. Components shall be measured by electronic or mechanical controls that consistently add all additives as required by these specifications. C. Blending the admixtures with the base asphalt emulsion shall be by mechanical means to provide a uniform mixture. D. Asphalt sealcoat shall be stored in a tank equipped with power driven mixing or agitation equipment capable of keeping the asphalt sealcoat thoroughly and uniformly mixed. The stored material shall be protected from freezing in cold weather conditions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. 1. Job -Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work. B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. C. Material Certificates: For each sealcoat material, from manufacturer. D. Material Test Reports: For each sealcoat material, indicate and interpret test results for compliance of materials with requirements indicated. 898-14A ASPHALT SEALCOAT 02760 - 1 I ASPHALT SEALCOAT CONT 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if surface has standing water, if rain, snow, or freezing temperatures are imminent or expected within 24 hours, or before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met: 1. Sealcoat: Minimum 55 deg. F ambient air temperature with no drop below 50 deg F in 24 hours. 2. Surface Temperature: Minimum 60 deg. F. B. Apply a tack coat when using Asphalt Emulsion based sealcoat over pavement previously treated with Coal Tar. C. Pavement -Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg. F for oil -based materials and 55 deg. F for water -based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg. F. D. Measurement: Asphalt sealcoat will be measured by the gallon (or ton). This may be determined by weight/gallon factors provided and certified by the manufacturer. The quantity of sealcoat will be by the gallon (or ton) before dilution with water or any add mixture not included in the manufacturing process. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALCOAT A. Basis of Design Product: MasterSeal Concentrate Asphalt Based Pavement Sealer by MasterSeal Pavement Products and Equipment. B. Manufacturer offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but not limited to, the following: 1. Martin Asphalt Company SS-lh. 2.2 MATERIALS A. The materials for asphalt sealcoat immediately prior to mixing shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Asphaltic Emulsion shall meet the performance standards ASTM D 2939. 2. Sealant shall not contain asbestos. 3. Water based pavement sealer to contain less than 15 grams per liter volatile organic content (V06). 4. Mineral Aggregate components shall be 100% passing the #16-mesh sieve. These components shall be a natural or materials and other deleterious substances. 5. The sieve analysis of the mineral aggregate components shall be determined in accordance with ASTM test method C 136. B. Mix Procedures: 1. Mix in accordance with the following mix design (based on 100 gallons for ease of calculation): a. MasterSeal Concentrate: 100 gals. b. Water: 15-25 gals. C. Zetac or Top Tuff Polymer, Additive: 1-2 gals d. Sand (40-70 mesh AFS rating): 300-5001bs. 898-14A ASPHALT SEALCOAT 02760 - 2 ASPHALT SEALCOAT CONT , 2. Mix design is a typical recommendation. Alternative mix designs may be substituted to account for local pavement conditions and use of other pavement sealer additives. However, in all cases sand shall be used in the mix design.. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIAL A. Sand: ASTM D 1073, Grade Nos. 2 or 3. B. Joint Sealant: ASTM D 6690, Type II or III, hot -applied, single -component, polymer -modified bituminous sealant. C. Pavement -Marking Paint: Alkyd -resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with AASHTO M 248, Type N: colors complying with FS TT-P-1952. 1. Color: Yellow [, as indicated] at typical parking stripes. 2. Color: 6" red stripe with 5" white letters at fire lane markings. 3. Color: Blue at accessible striping and parking. 4. Color: Accessible symbols to be blue with white background. D. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1. E. Wheel Stops: Precast, air -entrained concrete, 2500-psi minimum compressive strength, 6 inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered corners, drainage slots on underside, and holes for anchoring to substrate. 1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 34-inch diameter, 10-inch minimum length. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Surface to receive asphalt sealcoat must be free of all foreign and loose material. Dry immediately prior to sealcoat application. B. Pavement surface repairs should be made prior to sealcoating. C. Areas of structurally unsound asphalt such as alligator cracking, low spots (birdbaths) or rutting must be properly repaired prior to placement of the asphalt sealcoat. D. Cleaning may be by air blowing, vacuum, mechanical sweeper, washing, or other techniques as approved by the Architect. 1. If washing the existing surface is used, the surface shall not have any standing water prior to application of the sealcoat. Salt, deicing agents, fertilizers, hard water deposits and other such chemicals will promote lack of bonding of the sealcoat to the existing surface any may require extraordinary cleaning measures. E. Cracks in excess of '/a inch, but less than one inch in width must be sealed prior to application of the sealcoat. 1. Cracks must be cleaned of all weeds and debris prior to crackseaing with crackfiller. j 2. The crackfiller shall be applied per manufacturer's recommendations and must be dry to the touch prior to application of the sealcoat. 898-14A ASPHALT SEALCOAT 02760 - 3 ASPHALT SEALCOAT CONT 3. Cracks that contain weed and other live vegetable matter must be treated with locally approved non -oil based sterilant prior to application of crackfiller. F. Cracks wider than one inch shall be filled with a fine aggregate hot, dense graded asphalt concrete. l . Crackfiller shall be a hot or cold applied product designed for use in asphaltic concrete made from petroleum asphalt, modified polymers, and suitable inert fillers. 2. The properties of the crackfiller shall be such as to be compatible with asphalt sealcoat. G. Prior to application of sealcoat, deposits of grease or oil shall be cleaned by scraping, burning, and/or the use of approved detergents in order to promote adhesion of the sealcoat. After cleaning, the areas shall be sealed with an oilseal. 1. Oilseal shall be a quick drying latex emulsion with suitable admixtures manufactured specifically for the purpose of isolating the asphalt sealcoat from any residual oils, petroleum grease, and gasoline stained pavement. 2. The properties of the oilseal shall be such as the compatible with the asphalt sealcoat. 3. In areas where the foreign oil or grease has penetrated the asphalt such that cleaning as described above is not effective, the affected areas shall be removed to the depth necessary but not less than 3/4 inch. The removed asphalt concrete shall be replaced with new asphalt concrete. H. On excessively weathered surfaces or areas such that cleaning operation leave a film of dust, a tack coat of SS-lh emulsion shall be applied. 1. The tack coat shall consist of one (1) part anionic slow setting asphalt emulsion with four (4) parts water or two (2) parts asphalt sealcoat with one (1) part water applied at a rate of 0.05 to 0.10 gal/sq.yd. 2. The tack coat must be dry prior to application of the asphalt sealcoat. I. Asphalt sealcoat shall not be placed on new asphalt until after a 30-day minimum cure period or as directed by the Architect. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Apply two (2) coats of properly mixed sealcoat at parking areas. Apply a third coat at high traffic areas such as entrance and exit approaches. B. Application of the asphalt sealcoat shall be by mechanical means using rubber faced squeegees, brooms, distributor bar/wand combinations of these or other techniques approved by the Manufacturer. 1. Parking area sealcoat material sampled at the project site shall be sealed within 30 minutes of placement and shall be finished, undiluted material. C. Asphalt sealcoat being applied shall be uniform and free flowing, free of lumps and other inconsistencies. 1. Potable water may be added as necessary as per manufacturer's recominendation, for consistency and spreadability but shall not exceed 15% by volume. 2. If after the addition of the maximum allowable water volume the sealcoat is unsuitable, the materials shall be rejected and removed from the site. D. The sealcoat must be thoroughly dry prior to application of the second or subsequent coats. E. Application of asphalt sealcoat in temperatures in excess of 80 degrees Fahrenheit shall require pretreatment of the asphalt concrete surface with a water mist. 898-14A ASPHALT SEALCOAT 02760 - 4 ASPHALT SEALCOAT. CONT 1. The water must not be standing, but the surface should be damp prior to sealcoat application. 2. Where approved this treatment can be used for application on porous surfaces where the water , within the sealcoat may be absorbed too quickly by the existing pavement surface. j F. Asphalt sealcoat shall be applied uniformly over the prescribed are in continuous parallel lines in a manner so that no ridges or uncoated areas shall exist. 1. Application rates will vary depending on the texture of the existing asphalt surfaces requiring more sealcoat than smooth surfaces. 3.3 APPLICATION RATES A. Asphalt sealcoat application rates: Based on one coat undiluted material. 1. Smooth, Dense Surface: 10 gals. per 1,000 sq.ft. 2. Medium Surface: 15 gals. Per 1,000 sq.ft. 3. Rough, Aged Surface: 20 gals. Per 1,000 sq.ft. 4. Excessively Rough, Aged Surface: 25 gals. Per 1,000 sq.ft. B. When the asphalt sealcoat is to be placed on a severely weathered pavement surface with a very rough texture, provide addition #30-mesh sand with additional binder for the first coat. 1. The addition of sand shall not exceed 3 pounds per gallon. 2. Additional binder shall consist of 1/10 gallon of anionic slow setting asphalt emulsion or 1-3% Liquid Latex binder per gallon of undiluted asphalt sealcoat or as directed. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Traffic shall not be allowed on the asphalt sealcoat until the sealcoat is thoroughly cured. 1. Warm weather conditions is approximately 24 hours. 2. Cooler temperature to be a minimum of 48 hours. B. Irrigation watering shall be kept off for at least 24 hours prior to and after the application of asphalt sealcoat. C. Contractor shall supply owner with scale tags for the project containing the following information: product naive, product name or location, gallons/tons supplied for the project. 3.5 MEASUREMENT END OF SECTION 07620 898-14A ASPHALT SEALCOAT 02760 - 5 SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast -in -place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Footings. 2. Foundation walls. 3. Slabs -on -grade. 4. Limits of work are shown on the drawings. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for fill under slabs -on -grade. 2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement and walks. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. E. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form -release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Curing compounds. 898-14A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CONT a 7. Floor and slab treatments. 8. Bonding agents. 9. Vapor barriers. 10. Semirigid joint filler. 11. Joint -filler strips. 12. Repair materials. F. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: 1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity. G. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances. H. Field quality -control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.6 A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer. D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. F. Notifications 1. Provide a minimum 48 hour notification to the Architect/Engineer before placing any concrete. 2. All reinforcing and accessories are to be completely installed prior to notification. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 898-14A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CONT PART2-PRODUCTS f' 2.1 FORM -FACING MATERIALS is A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass -fiber -reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum E. Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form -release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form -facing materials. F. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, removable or snap -off metal or glass -fiber -reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish ties with integral water -barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 61.5M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 80, plain -steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. 898-14A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CONT B. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 (Exterior Exposure Only). 2.6 2.7 B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. A. A. 1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. FIBER REINFORCEMENT Synthetic Micro -Fiber: Fibrillated polypropylene micro -fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches long. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fibrillated Micro -Fibers: 1) Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; Fibrasol F. 2) Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Fiberstrand F. 3) FORTA Corporation; FORTA Ultra -Net. 4) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Grace Fibers. 5) Nycon, Inc.; ProConF. 6) Propex Concrete Systems Corp.; Fibermesh 300. VAPOR BARRIERS Sheet Vapor Barrier: ASTM E 1745, Class A, except with maximum perm rating of .01. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure -sensitive tape. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15. b. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil. C. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15. d. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A. j 898-14A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CONT 2.8 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm. C. ChemMASTERs; SprayFilm. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor -Aid. i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE. 1. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. M. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM. n. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm. o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film. p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid. q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM. r. Unitex; PRO -FILM. S. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set. B. Water: Potable. C. Clear, Solvent -Borne, Membrane -Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal 25 LV. b. ChemMASTERs; Spray -Cure & Seal Plus. C. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Sealcure 1315. d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day -Chem Cure and Seal (J-22UV). e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Cureseal 1315. f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear; LusterSeal 300. g. Kaufinan Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25. h. Lambert Corporation; UV Super Seal. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Luiniseal Plus. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; CS-309l30. k. Metalcrete Industries; Seal N Kure 30. 2.9 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. 898-14A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CONT 2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Overlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Limit water-soluble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement. C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water -reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy -use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 2.1.2 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Footings: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 5.0 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: 5.0 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. B. Foundation Walls: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 5.0 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. : 898-14A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6 j : CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CONT 5. Air Content: 5.0 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. T C. Slabs -on -Grade: Proportion nominal -weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 lb/cu. yd.. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 5.0 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel -finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 6. Synthetic Micro -Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd.. 2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.14 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and fumish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough -formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust -stained steel form -facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. 898-14A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CONT I G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of-> concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior comers and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form -release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by forin-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form -facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form -release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 VAPOR BARRIERS A. Sheet Vapor Barriers: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor barrier according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor barrier. Repair damage and reseal vapor barrier before placing concrete. 898-14A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 8 j CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CONT B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.6 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint -filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full -width joint -filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint -filler strips in. lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 898-14A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 9 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CONT 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT i A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. ! B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high -range water -reducing admixtures to mixture. D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to tune necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open -textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. F. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. 898-14A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 10 j s CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CONT G. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an } orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities. Apply to concrete surfaces to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull -floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in one direction. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to receive concrete floor toppings or mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes. C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power -driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to interior surfaces exposed to view. 2. Finish surfaces across the full length and operational width of future fold wall partitions to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 45; and of levelness, F(L) 35; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 24. Furnish surface flatness and levelness measurements for specified tolerance. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch. D. Trowel and Fine -Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel -finished floor surfaces. 898-14A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -11 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CONT E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing,. slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI306.1 for cold -weather protection and ACI301 for hot -weather protection during curing. B. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Continuous water -fog spray. 2. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.12 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until. concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw -cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. i 898-14A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 12 F' CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CONT 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry -pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one- half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form -tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color snatch before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify a, surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 6. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. 898-14A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -13 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CONT r, t F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Contractor will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. a. A slump cone and rod are to be on the job site at all times while concrete is being placed. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for nonnal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one cured specimen cylinder at 7 days and one cylinder at 28 days. a. Hold one cylinder for additional testing as instructed by the Architect. 7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if compressive -strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength. 8. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 9. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 10. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 11. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 03300 898-14A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 14 SECTION 03301 - MISCELLANEOUS CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 6 l PARTI-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast -in -place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1. Regular weight concrete at footings and ground floor slabs. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs -on -grade. 2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement and walks. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Other Action Submittal: 1. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ready -Mix -Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. Comply with the following sections of ACI301, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. "General Requirements." 2. "Formwork and Formwork Accessories." 3. "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports." 4. "Concrete Mixtures." 5. "Handling, Placing, and Constructing." C. Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 1.5 NOTIFICATIONS A. Notify Architect and Engineer a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours prior to any concrete pours and after all forms have been set and reinforcing is placed. 898-14A MISCELLANEOUS CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03301 - 1 MISCELLANEOUS CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CONT t i PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type IL a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. B. Normal -Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded, 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2.5 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Water: Potable. C. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES Ij A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. B. Normal -Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 898-14A MISCELLANEOUS CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03301 - 2 -- MISCELLANEOUS CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CONT 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, infix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. I. When air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. 3.4 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to lire with aces pgLper uicul"r to urface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Locate and install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with. groover tool to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. D. Isolation Joints: Install joint -filler strips at junctions with slabs -on -grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Comply with ACI 301 for placing concrete. 898-14A r: MISCELLANEOUS CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03301 - 3 MISCELLANEOUS CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CONT B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement. 3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view. B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open -textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface. 1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations. C. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film -finish coating system. 3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot -weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the following methods: Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Continuous water -fog spray. 898-14A j MISCELLANEOUS CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03301 - 4 MISCELLANEOUS CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CONT t ' 2. CuringCompound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation b power spray or roller according to P PPY Y� P by p Y g .,, manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL }: A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301. 1. Testing Frequency: One composite sample shall be obtained for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 3.10 REPAIRS A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section. END OF SECTION 03301 898-14A MISCELLANEOUS CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03301 - 5 SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES i PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. .' 1.2 SUMMARY__ A. Section Includes: I. Concrete masonry units. 2. Face brick. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Steel reinforcing bars. 5. Masonry joint reinforcement. 6. Ties and anchors. 7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 8. Embedded flashing. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel shelf angles for unit masonry. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing and for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net -area compressive strengths at 28 days. 1. Determine net -area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, 'Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." 2. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end -dam units, and other special applications. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Colored mortar. 898-14A UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 1 '- UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES CONT _f D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of _., ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, t ? and ASTM C 91 for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. E. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net -area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net -area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. F. Cold -Weather and Hot -Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture -resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal iterns, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof . 3 sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place. 898-14A ry' UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 2 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES CONT 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three - days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold -weather construction requirements contained in- ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold -Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. E. Hot -Weather Requirements: ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL Comply with hot -weather construction requirements contained in A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square -edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated. B. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive strength of 2800 psi. 2. Density Classification: Normal weight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 898-14A UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 3 1' UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES CONT 2.3 MASONRY LINTELS A. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built -in -place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs with i reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built -in -place lintels until cured. 2.4 BRICK g A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of 9 exposed faces of adjacent units: 1. Where shown to "match existing," provide face brick matching color range, texture, and size of existing adjacent brickwork. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. l 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated _.. into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Masonry Cement. B. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. b. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. c, Solomon Colors, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors. C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. E. Water: Potable. 2.6 REINFORCEMENT _. A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951 M. 1. Exterior Walls: Hot -dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet. 898-14A a UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 4 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES CONT 2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual", Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows: 1. Fabricate through -wall flashing with sealant stop where indicated. Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch at exterior face of wall and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC. B. Preformed Control -Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. C. Weep/Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV -resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. 2.9 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard -strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water- repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type N. 3. For exterior, above -grade, load -bearing and non -load -bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load -bearing walls; for interior non -load -bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. C. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required Do not add pigments to colored cement products. 1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight. 898-14A UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 5 f � t UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES CONT 3. Mix to match Architect's sample. 4. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units: t a. Decorative CMUs. b. Cast stone trim units. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 2. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. B. Before installation, examine rough -in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor -driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. C. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry. D. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 898-14A UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 6 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES CONT 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed joint and head joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. 5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less -than -half- size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow brick and CMUs as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. 898-14A UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 7 E_ r-- UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES CONT B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 COMPOSITE MASONRY A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following methods: 1. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder -type reinforcement extending across both wythes. B. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, bond walls together as follows: 3.7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete to comply with the following: 1. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 2. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. 3.9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in -plane wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Install preformed control joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3.10 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. 898-14A UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 8 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES CONT B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. i__ C. In -Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. I D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean brick by bucket -and -brush hand -cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04810 898-14A E UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 9 i f SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS E PART 1-GENERAL l 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 3. Shelf angles. 4. Miscellaneous steel trim including loose edging angles and. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. B. SUBMITTALS C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. I. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1 A QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. 898-14B METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1 METAL FABRICATIONS CONT B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless -steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc - plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Hot -dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. D. Machine Screws: ASME B 18.6.3. E. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1. F. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1. G. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1. H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1. I. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. J. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot -dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. 898-14B METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 is METAL FABRICATIONS CONT K. Post -Installed Anchors: Torque -controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. ^= 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless - steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc -rich primer. C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. D. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for normal -weight, air -entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after fmishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat -head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 898-14B METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 METAL FABRICATIONS. CONT H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc -rich primer where indicated. 2.7 SHELF ANGLES A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. z Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and - 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint. B. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc -rich primer. C. Furnish wedge -type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast -in -place concrete. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim. 898-14B METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4 METAL FABRICATIONS CONT 2.9 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES a A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Prime plates with zinc -rich primer. 2.10 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated. C. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with universal shop primer. 2.11 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Shop prime iron and steel items unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless indicated. C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 898-14B METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5 METAL FABRICATIONS CONT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL r A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in -place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns. 3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 898-14B METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 6 METAL FABRICATIONS CONT 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC- PA l for touching up shop -painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05500 898-14B METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 7 SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Power -driven fasteners. 2. Powder -actuated fasteners. 3. Expansion anchors. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria": 1. Dimension lumber. 2. Miscellaneous lumber. 3. Plywood. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. 898-14A MISCELLANDOUS CARPENTRY 06105-1 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY CONT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A_ Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. L Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are iminimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide dry lumber with fifteen percent (15%) maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Blocking. 3. Nailers. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber with fifteen percent (15%) maximum moisture content and any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Hem -fir or Hem -fir (north); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce -pine -fir (south) or Spruce -pine -fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods; NELMA. 5. Northern species; NLGA. 6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. 898-14A MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 2 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY CONT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate haring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. C. Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized standards. D. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler. E. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill inembers when necessary to avoid splitting wood. 3.2 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 06105 898-14A MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 3 .y i SECTION 06160 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch. B. Glass -Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C I I77/1177M. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens -Glass Gold. b. United States Gypsum Co.; Securock. 2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation. 2.2 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. L For wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Power -Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. C. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. 898-14A SHEATHING 06160 - 1 SHEATHING, CONT 2.3 SHEATHING JOINT -AND -PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass -fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners. 1. Sheathing Tape: Self -adhering glass -fiber tape, minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass -mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power -driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICUs "International Building Code." D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint -sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 WOOD PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural -use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Nail to wood framing. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at edges of wall sheathing panels. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 898-14A SHEATHING 06160 - 2 r - SHEATHING. CONT 2. Underlayment: a. Nail to subflooring and non -removable deck. Tack nail at removable deck. 3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold -formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non -load -bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. ' B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. pp Y g Y g g, g C. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. D. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply glass -fiber sheathing tape to glass -mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. END OF SECTION 06160 898-14A SHEATHING 06160 - 3 SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Interior frames and jambs. 3. Wood cabinets. 4. Plastic -laminate cabinets. 5. Plastic -laminate countertops. 6. Solid -surfacing -material countertops. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, solid - surfacing material, cabinet hardware and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures faucets soap dispensers and other items installed in architectural woodwork. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Plastic laminates. 2. Solid -surfacing materials. D. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. 898-14A INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK CONT 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork, coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Match species and cut identical to existing wood work located in the same building area, unless otherwise indicated.. C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed -grain hardwood. D. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium -Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. 818-14A INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 2 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK CONT 4. Veneer -Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. ft E. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Lamin-Art, Inc. C. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. d. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. F. Solid -surfacing material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation b. Meganite Inc.; a division of the Pyrochem Group. C. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. d. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. e. Corian 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)." B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self - closing. C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4'/z inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter unless noted otherwise on drawings. D. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: K&V 255 with K&V 256 E. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 1. Standard Duty (Grade 1): Side mounted; full -extension type; zinc -plated steel with polymer rollers 2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24 inches wide. 3. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches wide. G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. I. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2 1/2-inch OD„ molded -plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. Color as selected from manufacturer standard. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "OG series" by Doug Mockett & ` Company, Inc. 898-14A INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 3 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK, CONT J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. Reference drawings on types and locations. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. 2. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. K. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed -steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled -in -place anchors. C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Urea formaldehyde or Resorcinol. I. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot -melt adhesive. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom -grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid -Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. 3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid -Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch. D. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. E. Shop -cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. I. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 898-14A INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 4 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK CONT 2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Custom. B. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut identical to existing wood located in adjoining building area. C. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. D. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work E. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. F. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together. 2.6 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Grade: Custom. B. Wood Species: Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine. C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. D. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. E. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together. 2.7 INERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Grade: Custom B. Wood Species: Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine. 2.8 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Custom. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay on face frame or as indicated. C. Drawer Front Style: Reveal overlay. D. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch. E. Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: Match existing adjoining species. 1. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. 2. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Slip match. 898-14A INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 5 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK CONT F. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: p 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. l' 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. 2.9 WOOD CABINETS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Grade: Custom. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay or as indicated. C. WI Door and Drawer Front Style: Reveal overlay. D. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch. E. Species for Exposed Lumber Surfaces: Any closed -grain hardwood. F. Panel Product for Exposed Surfaces: Medium -density overlay. G. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid -hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. 2.10 PLASTIC -LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Grade: Custom. B. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGP. C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range in the following categories: a. Solid colors, gloss or matte finish. b. Wood gains, gloss or matte finish. C. Patterns, gloss or matte finish. D. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. ' E. Core Material: Particleboard or medium -density fiberboard. F. Core Material at Sinks or Wet Equipment: Exterior -grade plywood. } G. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic -laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. g 2.11 SOLID -SURFACING -MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS = A_ Grade: Custom. B. Solid -Surfacing -Material Thickness: 1/2 inch. 898-14A INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 6 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK CONT C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid -surfacing material complying with the following requirements: i- -. 1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid -surfacing -material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate tops with shop -applied edges of materials and configuration indicated. 2. Fabricate tops with shop -applied backsplashes. E. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing equipment and other built-in items in shop. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 96 inches long, except where shorter single -length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. i 1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished. 7 2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. 898-14A INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 7 t INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK CONT G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1 /8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer -head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood blocking, or hanging strips; No. 10 wafer -head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish; toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. H. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid -surfacing -material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive. 4. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." I. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. J. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 06402 898-14A INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 8 SECTION 07190 - WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL s 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes penetrating water-repellent treatments for the following vertical and horizontal surfaces: 1. Concrete unit masonry. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint fillers and sealants. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Water repellents shall meet performance requirements indicated without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation. 1. Water Repellents: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing on manufacturer's standard substrate assemblies representing those indicated for this Project. B. Water Absorption: Minimum 90 percent reduction of water absorption after 24 hours in comparison of treated and untreated specimens. 1. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 140. C. Water -Vapor Transmission: Comply with one or both of the following: 1. Maximum 10 percent reduction in rate of vapor transmission in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, according to ASTM E 96/E 96M. D. Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: Minimum 90 percent reduction in leakage rate in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, according to ASTM E 514. E. Durability: Maximum 5 percent loss of water-repellent properties after 2500 hours of weathering according to ASTM G 154 in comparison to water -repellent -treated specimens before weathering. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include manufacturer's printed statement of VOC content. 2. Include manufacturer's recommended number of coats for each type of substrate and spreading rate for each separate coat. B. Product Certificates: For each type of water repellent, from manufacturer. �r I 898-14A WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 1 WATER REPELLENTS CONT C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted weather and substrate conditions permit water repellents to be applied according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements: 1. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for not less than 28 days. 2. Building has been closed in for not less than 30 days before treating wall assemblies. 3. Ambient temperature is above 40 deg F and below 100 deg F and will remain so for 24 hours. 4. Substrate is not frozen and substrate -surface temperature is above 40 deg F and below 100 deg F. S. Rain or snow is not predicted within 24 hours. 6. Not less than seven days have passed since surfaces were last wet. 7. Windy conditions do not exist that might cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be treated. 1.7 WARRANTY t A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Applicator agree(s) to repair or replace materials that fail to maintain water repellency specified in "Performance Requirements" Article within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS A. Silane/Siloxane-Blend, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, silane and siloxane blend with 400 g/L or less of VOCs. 1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "PROSOCO Siloxane WB Concentrate" or comparable procuct by one of the following: a. Advanced Chemical Technologies, Inc.; Sil-Act Dri-Treat. b. Degussa Corporation; Protectosil Aqua-Trete EM. C. Fabrikem Manufacturing Ltd.; Fabrishield 900 Series. d. Kryton International Inc., Kryton Group of Companies (The); Hydrostop WB. e. LymTal International, Inc.; Iso-Flex 628. f. Pecora Corporation; KlereSeal 910-W or K1ereSea1920-W. g. SaverSystems; DEFY All -Purpose Heavy -Duty Water Repellent. h. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikagard 701 W. 898-14A WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 2 WATER REPELLENTS CONT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent manufacturer's requirements. Check moisture content in three representative locations by method recommended by manufacturer. 2. Inspect for previously applied treatments that may inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents. 3. Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be trapped beneath the application of water repellent. 4. Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water repellent. B. Test pH level according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure chemical bond to silica -containing or siliceous minerals. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect people, vehicles, property, plants, windows and all surfaces not set for treatment from product, splash, residue, fumes and wind drift. 1. Use polyethylene or other tested material for protecting nonmasonry surfaces. 2. Protect/divert pedestrian and auto traffic. 3. Ensure fresh air entry and cross ventilation during application and drying. - 4. Extinguish all flames, pilot lights and other potential sources of ignition during use and until all vapors are gone. When applying to exteriors of occupied buildings may sure all windows exterior intakes and air conditioning vents are covered and air handling equipment is shut down during application and until vapors have dissipated. B. Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could impair penetration or performance of product according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Concrete Unit Masonry: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other substances that inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents according to ASTM E 1857. C. Protect adjoining work, including mortar and sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow -over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live vegetation. D. Coordination with Mortar Joints Do not apply water repellent until pointing mortar for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment has been installed and cured. E. Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured. 898-14A WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 3 1 WATER REPELLENTS CONT I"- F. Surface and air temperatures must be at least 40°F during application and for 8 hours following: 1. If freezing conditions exist before application, let masonry thaw. G. Surface and air temperatures should not exceed 90°F. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Dilution: Dilute with clean, potable water only. Mixing vessels must be clean, dry and free of contaminants. When added to water, Siloxane WB turns milky white. Mix lightly to produce a uniform consistency. Prepare and apply within 8 hours of dilution. 1. One gallon of Siloxane WB concentrate produces up to 20 gallons of water repellent (on dense vertical surfaces). Always test for most appropriate coverage rates. a. Vertical Surfaces: Porous 1 part concentrate: 9 parts water Semi -porous: 1 part concentrate: 14 parts water Dense 1 part concentrate: 19 parts water b. Horizontal Surfaces: Porous 1 part concentrate: 7 parts water Semi -porous: 1 part concentrate: 9 parts water Dense 1 part concentrate: 14 parts water B. Apply a heavy -saturation coating of water repellent, on surfaces indicated for treatment, using 50 psi - pressure spray with a fan -type spray nozzle to the point of saturation. Avoid atomization of material. Apply coating in dual passes of uniform, overlapping strokes. Remove excess material; do not allow material to puddle beyond saturation. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application procedure unless otherwise indicated. C. Apply a second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions. 3.4 CLEANING A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water- repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades caused by water- repellent application, as approved by Architect. B. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions. END OF SECTION 07190 898-14A WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 4 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass -fiber blanket insulation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.4 1.5 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface -Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS -FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Building Products, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Insulation. 5. Owens Coming. B. Unfaced, Glass -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame -spread and smoke - developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Above New Ceiling Panels: 6 inches thick. 2. Fill wall cavity with single thickness at new exterior and interior walls. 898-14A BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1 BUILDING INSULATION CONT C. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass -fiber blanket insulation as follows: 1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde. 2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Glass -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For wood -framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows: a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION A. Where glass -fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install blanket insulation over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated Extend insulation 48 inches up either side of partitions. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210 898-14A BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2 SECTION 07215 - ROOF AND DECK INSULATION l PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Related Work 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Requirements / Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Sections in Division 01 of these Specifications. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) 1. C 177-85 Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded -Hot -Plate Apparatus. 2. C 209-84 Methods of Testing Insulating Board (Cellulosic Fiber), Structural and Decorative. 3. C 728-89a Perlite Thermal Insulation Board 4. D 41-85 Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 5. D 312-89 Asphalt Used in Roofing. 6. D 1621-73 (1979) Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 7. D 4601-86 Asphalt Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used in Roofing. B. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) C. (ANSI/SPRI) D. ASCE 7 wind uplift criteria 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements Classified by Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) as Class A roof covering. Follow local, state, and federal regulations, safety standards, and codes. B. Installation 1. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's current published application procedures, NRCA general recommendations, and ASCE 7 wind uplift criteria. 2. Roof system manufacturer's technical specifications shall be considered part of this specification and shall be used as reference for specific application procedures. 1.4 SUBMITTALS __ A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's product data sheets for each product. B. Shop Drawings: Layout of roof plan showing tapered design, tapered insulation pattern, direction of slope, amount of slope, spot elevations indicating thicknesses at high and low points. C. Certification: Submit roof manufacturer's certification in writing that insulation is acceptable as substrate for application of specified roof system. 898-14A ROOF AND DECK INSULATION 07215 - 1 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION CONT 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. When stored outdoors: 1. Tarp and shield insulation from moisture and ultraviolet rays. 2. Elevate insulation above substrate four inches minimum. 3. Secure insulation to resist high winds. 4. Distribute insulation stored on roof deck to prevent concentrated loads that would impose excessive stress or stain on deck or structural members. Verify that structure can accommodate additional loading. 5. Wet insulation, or insulation that has been wet but which has dried, may not be used and shall be removed completely and immediately from the job site. 6. Do not double stack bundles of insulation on the roof top. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Substrate Acceptance: Roof system manufacturer's representative shall inspect roof deck and associated substrates and provide written acceptance of conditions. B. Manufacturer's approved roofing contractor shall inspect and approve deck and substrates. C. Plan roof layout with respect to roof deck slope to prevent rainwater drainage into completed roofing. D. Do not install more insulation than can be covered with complete roof system in same day. 1.7 PRODUCT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Apply roofing and insulation in dry weather. 2. Do not proceed with roof construction during inclement weather or when precipitation is predicted 40% or more possibility. 3. Do not apply insulation over wet or moist deck or in foggy conditions. 4. Days with wind speeds of 30 mph or greater shall be considered "Bad Weather" days. B. Emergency Equipment: Maintain on -site equipment and material necessary to apply emergency temporary seals I the event of sudden storms or inclement weather. C. Costs for emergency roofing shall be borne by Contractor. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION A. All insulation shall be approved in writing by the membrane manufacturer as to thickness, type, and g manufacturer. All insulation must be approved for the specific application, Underwriters Laboratory approved, and be listed in the FM Global Approval Guide. 898-14A ROOF AND DECK INSULATION 07215 - 2 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION CONT B. Tapered Polyisocyanurate Roof Insulation (New Construction Areas Only): Shall be tapered polyisocyanurate board per Federal Specification No. HH-I-1972/1 or 2, with a 20 psi minimum compressive strength and 2.0 pcf density minimum. Insulation shall be of thickness required for one-fourth inch (1/4") slope per foot to roof drains as shown on drawings. Insulation shall be surfaced on two (2) sides with a non -asphaltic facer material C. Cover Board: Non-structural glass mat faced, non-combustible, moisture resistant, silicone treated gypsum core panel, manufactured to conform to ASTM C-1177. Thickness shall be 1/2" = R of .56 with a nominal board size of 4` x 8', Dens -Deck as manufactured by Georgia Pacific, or approved equal. 2.2 BITUMEN A. Shall be ASTM D 312 Type IV extra steep asphalt. 2.3 ASPHALT ROOF PRIMER A. Quick -dry asphalt -based primer for priming of asphalt roof surfaces, as manufactured by GAF, or approved equal. Applicable Federal Specification SS-A-70113 ASTM D 41 Flash Point 1050 F Viscosity at 80' F (ASTM D 217) 50-60 K.U. Weight per gallon 7.4 pounds Drying time (to touch) Min. 4 hours 2.4 FASTENERS A. Fasteners and fastening plates and/or termination bars shall be FM Approved and shall be listed in the FM Global Approval Guide, and as recommended by the insulation/ fastener manufacturer for the specific application to meet the minimal requirements for wind uplift as required by the local jurisdiction and/or FM Global. B. Heavy Duty Fastener for Steel Applications for 18-22 gauge Steel & Wood Substrates: Shall be a #14 fastener with a minimum .190 diameter shank and a thread diameter of .245 with ten (10) threads per inch and a 30 degree spade point. Fasteners shall be fluorocarbon coated with CR-10 corrosion resistant coating when subjected to 30 Kesternich cycles (DIN 50018) shows less than 15% red rust which surpasses FM Global Approval Standard 4470, as manufactured by OMG Roofing Products, Agawam, MA or approved equal. All fasteners shall be used in conjunction with the manufacturers approved round pressure plate. Fasteners, plates, and/or bars shall be FM approved and listed in the FM Global Approval Guide. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A. Provide special protection from traffic on yet to be removed roofing. B. Provide special protection from traffic on completed work. 898-14A ROOF AND DECK INSULATION 07215 - 3 ; { i ROOF AND DECK INSULATION CONT 3.2 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Do not install until defects are corrected and deck substrate meets roof system manufacturer's requirements. B. Do not apply insulation unless asphalt application temperature, EVT of approximately 375 degrees F to 425 degrees F, can be maintained or when water or moisture is present on substrate. Do not heat asphalt above flashing point, or 525 degrees F. C. Examine substrate and related surfaces, and verify that there are no conditions such as inadequate anchorage, foreign materials, moisture, ridges, depressions, or other conditions which would prevent satisfactory installation of roof system. D. Start of work constitutes acceptance of deck substrate and site conditions. E. Sweep deck substrate clean of dust and debris immediately prior to installation of insulation. 3.3 INSULATION A. Manufacturer's Instructions: In regard to attachment, the manufacturer's instructions or specifications shall determine the suitability for an application. Installation must meet ASCE 7 criteria and meet local governing building codes. B. Precautions: The surface of the insulation must not be ruptured due to overdriving of fasteners. C. Thermal insulation boards shall be laid on the substrate in parallel rows with end joints staggered and butted as close as possible. All joints shall be tight and at the roof perimeter and roof penetrations, insulation shall be cut neatly and fitted to reduce openings to a minimum. All openings one-fourth inch (1/4") or larger shall be filled with insulation. D. No more insulation shall be installed than can be covered by the completed roof system by the end of the day or the onset of inclement weather. 3.4 MECHANICALLY FASTENED INSULATION (NEW CONSTUCTION AREAS ONLY) A. Specified insulation shall be mechanically fastened to conform to the ASCE 7 criteria for wind uplift as dictated by wind zone applicable to location of project. Fasteners and fastening patterns shall be determined by building height, location and geographical area of the United States. It is the contractor's responsibility to consult current publications, literature, and bulletins of IBC and the manufacturer that are in effect at the time of this project. Boards shall be staggered and butted as close as possible with voids over one-fourth inch (1/4") to be filled. B. Insulation shall be laid with edges parallel to flutes and bearing on deck surface/flats. The long dimension of base insulation layer must be fully supported by the top flange of the metal deck. The edges of insulation boards must not cantilever over the flutes of the metal deck. C. The top surface of the first layer of insulation shall be coated with hot asphalt using twenty-five pounds (25#) per one hundred (100) square feet of surface, and a one -eighth inch (1/8") tapered layer of insulation shall be applied using offset joints, so that each layer breaks joints to a minimum of six inches (6") both ways with the preceding layer, and immediately walked in place. 898-14A ROOF AND DECK INSULATION 07215 - 4 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION CONT 3.5 FULLY ADHERED INSULATION (REROOFING AREAS ONLY) A. Specified insulation shall be staggered and butted as close as possible with voids over one-fourth inch (1/4") to be filled. B. The top surface of the existing roof membrane shall be coated asphalt primer and the substrate board shall be adhered with hot asphalt using twenty-five pounds (25#) per one hundred (100) square feet of surface, and immediately walked in place. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Remove insulation which has been damaged (broken, cracked, punctured, wet, etc.) and install acceptable new units before installation of roof system. 3.7 CLEANING A. Remove debris and material wrappers from jobsite. Leave insulation clean and dry, ready to receive roofing membrane. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Provide special protection from traffic on completed work. END OF SECTION 07215 898-14A ROOF AND DECK INSULATION 07215 - 5 r i p SECTION 07415 - COMPOSITE WALL PANELS r PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes fiber cement composite wall panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking. 2. Division 6 Section "Sheathing" for exterior plywood sheathing. 3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for field -formed flashings and other sheet metal work not part of fiber cement composite wall panel assemblies. 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants". 1.3 DEFINITION A. Panelized Fiber Cement Composite Wall Panel Assembly: Fiber cement composite wall panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight wall system. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Fiber cement composite wall panel assemblies shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Must comply with ASTM C 1186, Type A requirements. B. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: No water penetration observed into wall cavity when tested according to ASTM E 331. C. Structural Performance: Provide fiber cement composite wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM, E 330: 1. Follow manufacturer's guidelines for installation of fasteners and attachment clips for wind zone 4 (250 mph). a. Minimum lateral deflection: U120 D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. E. Weather Resistant: No cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, or other detrimental effects observed, based on testing according to ASTM G 23. 1. Water Tightness: No water droplets observed on any specimen. 2. Freeze -thaw: No damage or defects observed. 898-14A COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 07415 - 1 COMPOSITE WALL PANELS. CONT 3. Warm Water: No evidence of cracking, delamination, swelling, or other defects observed. 4. Heat -Rain: No crazing, cracking, or other deleterious effects, surface or joint changes observed in any specimen. F. Surface Burning: 1. Flame Spread: 0 and Smoke Development: 5, based on testing according to UL723/ASTM E-84. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of fiber cement composite wall panel and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of fiber cement composite wall panels; details Ti of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish among factory-, shop-, and field -assembled fJ work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fiber cement composite wall panel indicated with factory - applied color finishes, wood type finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. D. Maintenance Data: For fiber cement wall panels to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All fiber cement panels specified in this section to be supplied by a manufacturer experienced in fabricating and supplying cement cladding systems. I. Provide technical and design support as needed regarding installation requirements and warranty compliance provisions. B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer trained by manufacturer or representative. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of fiber cement composite wall panel spacers, fasteners, starter track and miscellaneous accessories from single source from single manufacturer. 1. Obtain all wall panels from single production lot to maintain color consistency. 1.7 .DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, sheets, fiber cement composite wall panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package fiber cement composite wall panels for protection during transportation and handling. P B. Panels must be stored flat and kept dry before installation. A waterproof cover over panels and accessories should be used at all times prior to installation. I C. If panels are exposed to water or water vapor prior to installation, allow to completely dry before installing. Failure to do so may result in panel shrinkage at ship lap joints, and such action may void warranty. 898-14A COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 07415 - 2 COMPOSITE WALL PANELS CONT -, D. Panels MUST be carried on edge. Do not carry or lift panels flat. Improper handling may cause cracking or panel damage. E. Direct contact between the panels and the ground should be avoided at all times. It is necessary to keep panels clean during installation process. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions y permit assembly of fiber cement composite wall panels to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. WE B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by field measurements before fiber cement composite wall panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. A. COORDINATION Coordinate fiber cement composite wall panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fiber cement composite wall. panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: a. 50 year warranty from date of Substantial Completion against manufactured defects in fiber cement panels. b. 15 year warranty from date of Substantial Completion against manufactured defects in panel finish. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL MATERIALS A. Fiber cement composite walls panels manufactured from a pressed, stamped, and autoclaved mix of Portland cement, fly ash, silica, recycled rejects, and wood fiber bundles. Basis of Design Product: Nichiha Vintage Wood a. Profile and Panel Color: Cedar b. Profile: 3/8" grooves running lengthwise, space 5-5/8" apart. C. Manufactured corners with 3-1 /2" returns. d. Dimensions: 18" wide and 10'-0" high e. Panel Thickness: 5/8" f. Factory sealed on six sides. 2. Substitutions: Approved equal. Submit for approval prior to bid. t- s 3. Surface: Prefinished and machine applied. 4. Panels profiled along all four edges, such that horizontal and vertical joints between installed panels are ship -lapped. 898-14A COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 07415 - 3 COMPOSITE WALL PANELS CONT i 5. Factory -applied sealant gasket added to to and right panels edges; all joints contain a factor b P g P g J Y sealant. B. Panel Sealants: 1. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in fiber cement composite wall panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by panel manufacturer. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING A. Zee Clips: 0.079-inch nominal thickness. 1. Basis of Design Product: Nichiha JES 301 (High Wind Load) B. Base or Start Track. 0.079-inch nominal thickness. 1. Basis of Design Product: Nichiha FA 300T (High Wind Load) C. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: 1. Depth: As indicated in construction documents. D. Miscellaneous Clips: 1. Basis of Design Product: Nichiha (High Wind Load) a. Joint Clips: JEJ 555; Long — JEL 552 b. Corner Clips: JE 550C C. Single Flange Sealant Backer: FHK 1110 d. Double Flange Sealant Backer: FH 1010 e. Corrugated Shim: FS 1005 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant fasteners, such as hot -dipped galvanized screws appropriate to local building codes and practices must be used. Do not use aluminum fasteners, staples, or fasteners that are not rated or designed for intended use. See manufacturer's instructions for appropriate fasteners for construction method used. B. Flashing: Flash all areas specified in manufacturer's instructions. Do not use raw aluminum flashing. Flashing must be galvanized, anodized, or PVC coated, and finish to match color of cladding panels. C. Sealant: Sealant shall be polyurethane, or hybrid, and comply with ASTM C 920. 1. Color to match color of cladding panels where visible. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete fiber cement composite wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fascia, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of fiber cement composite wall panels unless otherwise indicated. i 898-14A COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 07415 - 4 1 t COMPOSITE WALL PANELS, CONT B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.018-inch- minimum thickness, zinc -coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum -zinc alloy -coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and tri n as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Finish flashing and trim with same color to match finish of fiber cement composite wall panels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, fiber cement composite wall panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Examine wall framing and furring to verify that channels, studs, plywood sheathing and other structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by fiber cement composite wall panel manufacturer. 2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by fiber cement composite wall panel manufacturer. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Do not install panels or components that appear to be damaged or defective. Do not install wet panels. 3.2 FIBER CEMENT COMPOSITE WALL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Install products in accordance with the latest installation guidelines of the manufacturer and all applicable building codes and other laws, rules, regulations and ordinances. Review all manufacturer installation, maintenance instructions, and other applicable documents before installation. B. Panel Cutting: 1. Always cut fiber cement panels outside or in a well -ventilated area. Do not cut the products in an enclosed area. 2. Always wear safety glasses and NIOSH/OSHA approved respirator whenever cutting, drilling, sawing, sanding or abrading the products. Refer to manufacturer MSDS for more information. 3. Use a dust -reducing circular saw with a diamond -tipped or carbide -tipped blade. a. Recommended circular saw: Makita 7-1/4" Circular Saw with Dust Collector (#5057KB). b. Recommended blade: Tenryu Board -Pro Plus PCD Blade (#BP-18505) 4. Silica Dust Warning: Fiber cement products may contain some amounts of crystalline silica, a naturally occurring, potentially hazardous mineral when airborne in dust form. Consult product MSDS. 3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 898-14A COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 07415 - 5 COMPOSITE WALL PANELS CONT B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fiber cement composite wall panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On Y, completion of fiber cement composite wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. After fiber cement composite wall panel installation, clear drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. C. Replace fiber cement composite wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. D. Review manufacturer guidelines for detailed care instructions. END OF SECTION 07415 898-14A COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 07415 - 6 SECTION 07535 - FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Related Work: 1, Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Requirements / Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Sections in Division 01 of - these Specifications. 1.2 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A. Roofing Installer must be: 1. Currently prequalified with the Owner in accordance with Owner's prequalification requirements. 2. Currently in good standing with the manufacturer. B. It shall remain each Contractor's responsibility to determine his current status with the manufacturer's certification plan. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: l . A qualified manufacturer that has been UL Listed and has FM Approvals for membrane roofing systems similar to that used in this project for a minimum of twenty (20i years. 2. The roofing membrane manufacturer shall be defined as a company that make the primary roofing membrane and flashing membrane in its own factories from raw materials. 3. Provide Thermoplastic Fleece -Backed Elvaloy Roofing Membrane with a minimum Elvaloy Polymer Content of 30% with the following approvals: a. Underwriters Laboratories Class A Rating b. Factory Mutual I-90 c. Miami/Dade County Florida NOA d. ICC-ES e. Energy Star Partner f. TDI — Texas Department of Insurance Product Evaluation B. Applicator/Installer: I. Acceptable to roof material manufacturer for the manufacturer's warranty requirements. 2. Five (5) years successful experience on projects similar in size and scope. 3. Experienced in the type of roofing work required. 4. Successfully completed previous projects warranted by the manufacturer. C. Testing Laboratory Services: Test results shall meet or exceed established standards. D. Comply with governing local, state, and federal regulations, safety standards, and codes. 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 1 FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT 1.4 REFERENCES (INCLUDING LATEST REVISIONS) A. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM B 209 90, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate 2. ASTM C 719 - 86, Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cycle Movement (Hockman Cycle) 3. ASTM C 794 - 80 (1986), Test Method for Adhesion -in -Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants 4. ASTM C 920 - 87, Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 5. ASTM D 312 - 89, Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing 6. ASTM D 1863 - 86, Specification for Mineral Aggregate Used on Built-up Roofs 7. ASTM D 2178 - 89, Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing 8. ASTM D 2824 - 85, Specification for Aluminum - Pigmented Asphalt Roof Coatings 9. ASTM D 4586 - 86, Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free 10. ASTM A 361 - 90, Sheet Steel, Zinc -Coated (Galv.) by the Hot -Dip Process for Roofing and Siding 11. ASTM C 177, Test for Thermal Laboratory Services 12. ASTM C 728, Perlite Thermal Insulation Board B. Federal Specifications: 1. LLL-I-535B 2. SS-A-701B 3. SS-C-153 4. SS-C-153C 5. SS-R-620B 6. TT-C-498C 7. TT-P-320D 8. TT-S-00227E 9. TT-S-00230C 10. SS-S-001534 (GSA-FSS) 11. L-P-375 C. Industry Standards: 1. The National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) - Roofing and Waterproofing Manual 2. Single -ply Roofing Institute (SPRI) - A Professional Guide to Specifications Manual 3. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning .Contractors National Association (SMACNA) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 4. American Society of Civil Engineers - ASCE 7 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Samples and Manufacturer's Submittals: Submit prior to delivery or installation. 1. Samples of all roofing system components including all specified accessories. 2. Submit samples of proposed warranty complete with any addenda necessary to meet the warranty requirements as specified. 3. Submit latest edition of manufacturer's specifications and installation procedures. Submit only those items applicable to this project. 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 2 FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT 4. A written statement from the roofing materials manufacturer approving the installer, specifications and drawings as described and/or shown for this project and stating the intent to guarantee the completed project. 5. Manufacturer's Equiviscous Temperatures (EVT) for the specified bitumens. B. Shop Drawings: Provide manufacturer's approved details of all perimeter conditions, projection conditions, and any additional special job conditions which require details other than indicated in the drawings. C. Maintenance Procedures: Within ten days of the date of Substantial Completion of the project, deliver to the Owner three copies of the manufacturer's printed instructions regarding care and maintenance of the roof. L6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and rolls with all labels intact and legible including labels indicating appropriate warnings, storage conditions, lot numbers, and usage instructions. Materials damaged in shipping or storage shall not be used. B. Deliver materials requiring fire resistance classification to the job with labels attached and packaged as required by labeling service. C. Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of work. D. Handle and store material and equipment in such a manner as to avoid damage. Liquid products shall be delivered sealed, in original containers. E. Handle rolled goods so as to prevent damage to edge or ends. F. Select and operate material handling equipment so as not to damage existing construction or applied roofing. G. Moisture -sensitive products shall be maintained in dry storage areas and properly covered. Provide ' continuous protection of materials against wetting and moisture absorption. Store roofing and flashing materials on clean raised platforms with weather protective covering when stored outdoors. H. Store rolled goods on end. I. Protect materials against damage by construction traffic. The proper storage of materials is the sole responsibility of the contractor and any wet or damaged roofing materials shall be discarded, removed from the project site, and replaced prior to application. K. Comply with fire and safety regulations, especially with materials which are extremely flammable and/or toxic. Use safety precautions indicated on labels. L. Products liable, such as emulsions, to degrade as a result of being frozen shall be maintained above 40' F in heated storage. M. No storage of materials shall be permitted on roof areas other than those materials that are to be installed the same day. 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 3 FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT 1.7 SITE CONDITIONS A. Job Condition Requirements: 1. Apply roofing in dry weather. 2. Do not apply roofing when ambient temperature is below 40' F (4° Q. 3. Coordinate the work of the contractor with the work to be performed by the Owner's personnel, to ensure proper sequencing of the entire work. The Owner's personnel will be erecting interior protection for equipment, if required. The contractor is to schedule his work so that adequate time is allowed for the Owner's personnel to perform the work. No roof work shall be performed until the Owner's personnel have completed erection of the interior protection in that area. 4. Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with specifications. 5. Schedule the work so the building will be left watertight at the end of each day. Do not remove more roofing material than can be reinstalled in any working day. 6. All surfaces to receive new roofing shall be smooth, dry, and free from dirt, debris, and foreign material before any of this work is installed. Competent operators shall be in attendance at all times equipment is in use. Materials shall be stored neatly in areas designated by the Owner. Load placed on the roof at any point shall not exceed the safe load for which the roof is designed. 7. The contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the roof mat and deck from damage. The contractor shall be responsible for repairing all new areas of damage caused by the negligence of the contractor, at the contractor's expense. The Owner's on -site representative shall determine damage caused by contractor negligence. 8. The contractor shall follow local, state, and federal regulations, safety standards, and codes for the removal, handling, and disposal of asbestos containing materials, if present. When a conflict exists, use the stricter document. 9. Follow insurance underwriter's requirements acceptable for use with specified products or systems. 10. Due caution should be exercised so as not to alter the structural integrity of the deck. When cutting through any deck, care should be taken so as not to damage the deck or any part of the deck, such as post tension cables, etc. 11. All kettles shall have an automatic thermostat control, and temperature gauge, all in working order. 12. The contractor is to verify the location of all interior ducts, electrical lines, piping, conduit, and/or similar obstructions. The contractor is to perform all work in such a manner as to avoid contact with the above mentioned items. 13. Surface and air temperatures should be a minimum 45' F during applications of cleaner and waterproof coating and remain above 45' F for a minimum of four (4) hours following applications. Verify compatibility of cleaner with coatings, paints, primers and joint sealers specified. Advise Owner's representative of any problems in this regard prior to commencing cleaning operations. 14. Temporary Sanitary Facilities: The contractor shall furnish and maintain temporary sanitary facilities for employees use during this project. These will be removed after the completion of the project. All portable facilities shall comply with local laws, codes, and regulations. 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 4 FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT B. Protection of Work and Property: 1. Work: The contractor shall maintain adequate protection of all his work from damage and shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from injury or loss arising from this contract. He shall provide and maintain at all times any OSHA required danger signs, guards, and/or obstructions necessary to protect the public and his workmen from any dangers inherent with or created by the work in progress. All federal, state, and city rules and requirements pertaining to safety and all EPA standards, OSHA standards, NESHAP regulations pertaining to asbestos as required shall be fulfilled by the contractor as part of his proposal. 2. Property: Protect existing planting and landscaping as necessary or required to provide and maintain clearance and access to the work of this contract. Examples of two categories or degrees of protection are generally as follows: a) removal, protection, preservation, or replacement and replanting of plant materials; b) protection of plant materials in place, and replacement of any damage resulting from the contractor's operations. 3. Twenty-four Hour Call: The contractor shall have personnel on call 24 hours per day, seven (7) days per week for emergencies during the course of a job. The Owner's Project Manager is to have the 24 hour numbers for the contact. Contractor must be able to respond to any emergency call and have personnel on -site within two (2) hours after contact. Numbers available to the Owner's Project Manager are to be both home and office numbers for: a. Job Foreman b. Job Superintendent C. Owner or Company Officer C. Damage to Work of Others: The contractor shall repair, refinish, and make good any damage to the building or landscaping resulting from any of his operation. This shall include, but is not limited to, any damage to plaster, tile work, wall covering, paint, ceilings, floors, or any other finished work. Damage done to the building, equipment, or grounds must be repaired at the successful contractor's expense holding the Owner harmless from any other claims for property damage and/or personal injury. D. Measurements: It will be the contractor's responsibility to obtain and/or verify any necessary dimensions by visiting the job site, and the contractor shall be responsible for the correctness of same. Any drawings supplied are for reference only. E. Use of Premises: 1. The contractor is advised that the Owner will occupy the building at all times, and the contractor must provide all safeguards required to protect personnel and to keep noise levels as low as reasonably possible for each operation. 2. The contractor shall: a. Coordinate work in such a manner as to not interfere with the normal operation of the building. b. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products stored on premises. C. Agree to hold the Owner harmless in any and all liability of every nature and description which may be suffered through bodily injuries, including death of any persons by reason of negligence of the contractor, agents, employees, or subcontractors. 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 5 FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT F. Cleaning and Disposal of Materials: 1. Contractor shall keep the job clean and free from all loose materials and foreign matter. Contractor shall take necessary precautions to keep outside walls clean and shall allow no roofing materials to remain on the outside walls. 2. All waste materials, rubbish, etc., shall be removed from the Owner's premises as accumulated. Rubbish shall be carefully handled to reduce the spread of dust. A suitable scrap chute or hoist must be used to lower any debris. At completion, all work areas shall be left broom clean and all contractor's equipment and materials removed from the site. 3. All bituminous or roofing related materials shall be removed from ladders, stairs, railings, and similar parts of the building. 4. Debris shall be deposited at an approved disposal site. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Twenty (20) Year NDL with no exclusion for 2" hail occurrence and wind speeds up to 72 mph Warranty: The complete roofing system shall be guaranteed for a minimum of twenty (20) years from the date of Substantial Completion for this project. Guarantee responsibilities shall be as follows: 1. The manufacturer's warranty shall will include a 72 mph Wind Rider for the field of the roof and the perimeter. 2. Roofing contractor shall guarantee the entire roofing system for a period of two (2) years from the date of Substantial Completion. 2. The materials manufacturer shall guarantee the entire roofing system for a total period of twenty (20) years from the date of substantial completion. 3. Membrane manufacturer shall provide the written warranty as specified. 4. The entire roofing system shall be guaranteed to be watertight and against any failures of workmanship and materials. Repair of the system, including materials and labor, shall be done at no cost to the Owner. B. During the proposal period each Contractor shall make arrangements with the materials manufacturer to provide the required warranty. Refer to paragraph 1.05 SUBMITTALS for requirements concerning submittals of warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide materials that are recommended by manufacturers to be fully compatible with indicated substrates, or provide separation materials as required to eliminate contact between incompatible materials. B. Materials herein specified shall be supplied or approved in writing by the manufacturer issuing the warranty. C. The white polyester reinforced fleece backed adhered Elvaloy® roofing system shall only be applied by manufacturer approved and trained roofing contractors. 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 6 FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT D. The manufacturer shall have 15 years UL listing for the membrane to be used on the project. Membrane manufacturer shall have a minimum of 15 years FM approval, and 15 years manufacturing experience with the roofing membrane specified for this project. E. All roofing and roof accessories shall be installed in compliance with manufacturer's current specifications and details. F. All materials used on the project shall be asbestos free. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Fully Adhered Multi -Ply Roof System: a. Carlisle Syntec. b. Flex Membrane International. C. Johns Manville. d. Mule -Hide Roofing Systems. e. Versico Roofing Systems. C. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE A. The white 87-mil polyester reinforced fleece backed Elvaloy membrane shall have the following minimum physical properties. 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 7 FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT Prope Color Thickness Minimum Roll Width Breaking Strength Tearing Strength Elongation Heat Aging Low Temperature Bend Water Vapor Permeability Wt. Change After Immersion Seam Strength Puncture Resistance Static Puncture Resistance Dynamic Puncture Resistance Dimensional Stability Accel. Weathering (Xenon Arc) Fungi Resistance Underwriters Laboratories Factory Mutual Solar Reflectivity Solar Emissivity Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) 2.4 FLASHING MEMBRANE Test Procedure Physical Properties , White ASTM D 751 80 mil Nominal Membrane (Excluding Fleece Backing) 10' Minimum ASTM D 751 632 x 511 lbf ASTM D 751 85 x 83 lbf ASTM D 751 45% x 42% ASTM D 3045 >90% of Original ASTM D 2136 -400 C ASTM E 96 3.5g/m2/day ASTM D 570 0.41 % max. ASTM D 751 > 90 % of sheet FTMS 101 C 448 lbs ASTM D 5602 Pass @ 33 lbs ASTM D 5635 Pass @ 20 J ASTM D 1204 0.2% a ASTM D 2565 l OM hrs. (No Change) ASTM G 21 pass no growth Class A Class 1-90 ASTM E 903 0.811 ASTM E 903 0.919 ASTM E 1980 109 A. The flashing membrane shall be a white Elvaloy© polyester reinforced flexible sheet, as follows: Prope Test Procedure Physical Properties Color White Thickness ASTM D 751 .063" Nominal Breaking Strength ASTM D 751 412 x 538 lbf Tearing Strength ASTM D751 Ill x 110 lbf Elongation ASTM D 751 29% x 31 % Heat Aging ASTM D 3045 >90% of Original Low Temperature Bend ASTM D 2136 Pass @ -40°C Seam Strength ASTM D 751 100 % Accel. Weathering ASTM D 2565 l OM hrs. (No Change) Linear Dimensional Change ASTM D 1204 0.5% maximum Wt. Change after Immersion ASTM D 570 0.41% maximum Static Puncture Resistance ASTM D 5602 Pass @ 33 lbs Dynamic Puncture Resistance ASTM D 5635 Pass @ 20 J Underwriters Laboratories Class A Factory Mutual Class 1-90 Solar Reflectivity ASTM E 903 0.811 Solar Emissivity ASTM E 903 0.919 Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) ASTM E1980 109 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 8 i FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT 2.5 NON -REINFORCED MEMBRANE A. The non -reinforced membrane shall have the following minimum properties, as follows: 1. Description: Non -reinforced thermoplastic white membrane, thickness approximately 45 mils. 2. Use: Inside/outside corners, multiangled intersections, sealant pockets and other conditions where molding of the membrane is required. 2.6 BITUMEN A. Shall be ASTM D 312 Type IV steep asphalt. 2.7 CAULKS A. Sealant for use at coping joints, reglet joints, etc., shall be a one -component urethane non -sag, gun grade sealant designed for use in active exterior joints, and shall meet or exceed Federal Specification No. 1 TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class A, ASTM C 920. Where joint surfaces are contained or are contaminated with bituminous materials, provide manufacturer's modified -type sealant (modified with coal -tar or asphalt as required), or approved equal. 2.8 FELTS A. Shall be Underwriters Laboratory approved and listed in the FM Global Approval Guide. B. Shall be SBS base sheet, tested in accordance with ASTM D 5147, as approved by field membrane manufacturer. 2.9 INSULATION A. All insulation shall be in compliance with Section 07215 Roof and Deck Insulation. B. All insulation shall be approved in writing by the membrane manufacturer as to thickness, type, and manufacturer. All insulation must be approved for the specific application, Underwriters Laboratory approved, and be listed in the FM Global Approval Guide. 2.10 FASTENERS A. Fasteners and fastening plates or bars shall be listed in the FM Global Approval Guide, and be as recommended by the fastener manufacturer for the specific application. B. Fastener for Brick: Shall be one-fourth inch by two inches (1/4" x 2"), zinc with plated steel or stainless steel nail, one piece unit, flat head, as manufactured by Rawl Zamac Nailin, or approved equal. C. Fasteners, plates, and/or bars shall be listed in the FM Global Approval Guide. 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 9 L FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT , 2.11 BONDING ADHESIVE FOR FLASHING A. Description: Adhesive is a bonding cement of synthetic rubber for fully adhering membranes to various substrates, produced by Ashland Chemical, or approved equal. Typical Liquid Properties (Room Temperature) Color Amber/Yellow Base Product Neoprene Solids 25% Specific Gravity .87 Pounds/Gallon 7.25 Viscosity (CPS) 2500 Solvents Ketone, Toluene, Aliphatic Hydrocarbon, Zylene Estimated Coverage 2 Sided Application 55/70 sq. ft. (2/2.5 inils dry) DOT Label Required Flammable Liquid Code - 584661 B. Handling: Contains ingredients which could be harmful if mishandled. Contact with skin and eyes should be avoided and necessary protective equipment and clothing should be worn. 2.12 ASPHALT ROOF PRIMER A. Quick -dry asphalt -based primer for priming of asphalt roof surfaces, as manufactured by membrane manufacturer, or approved equal. Applicable Federal Specification SS-A-701B ASTM D 41 Flash Point 1050 F Viscosity at 80' F (ASTM D 217) 50-60 K.U. Weight per gallon 7.4 pounds Drying time (to touch) Min. 4 hours 2.13 CANT STRIP A. Shall be wood fiber where used for non-structural purposes. Shall be treated solid wood where used for structural purposes meeting NRCA, FM Global and Underwriters Laboratory guidelines. If solid wood cant is used where insulation exists, cant is to be toe nailed into treated solid wood nailer the same height as insulation. 2.14 WOOD A. All nailers, cants and wooden curbs shall be lumber as required by NRCA, FM Global and Underwriters Laboratory guidelines. 2.15 TRIM STRIP A. The trim strip shall have the following minimum properties: 1. Six inch (6") wide non -reinforced 60 mil thermoplastic used for capping butted ends of rolls. 2. The trim strip is seamed with the use of hot-air welding. I_ S 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 10 FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT 2.16 CORNERS A. Inside and outside corners shall be supplied by the membrane manufacturer and shall be of the same base material as the roof membrane. 2.17 PIPE BANDS A. Stainless steel bands with self-locking heads. B. Tighten with hand tool for tension control and flush cut off. 2.18 PRE -MOLDED BOOTS A. Non -reinforced thermoplastic tapered molds for various pipes, heat welded to field membrane and sealed at top with stainless steel pipe bands and seam sealer. 2.19 PITCH PAN SEALANT A. Shall be one -part, self -leveling polyurethane sealant meeting Federal Specification No. TT-S-00230C, Type I, Class A, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for use in new pitch pans. 2.20 PIPESTANDS (6" OR SMALLER - LESS THAN 9" OFF ROOF SURFACE) A. Black, polycarbonate construction with stainless steel roller pin assembly suitable for gas lines and conduit set in finished roof assemblies, Model No. 24R, sized accordingly, as manufactured by Miro Industries, Inc. 2.21 PIPE HANGERS (6" AND LARGER — 9" TO 12" OFF ROOF SURFACE) A. Shall be pre -assembled portable pipe hangers constructed of high density polypropylene plastic and UV inhibitors, sized according to outside pipe dimension, as manufactured by Portable Pipe Hangers, Houston, TX, 800.797.6585. 2.22 LEAD JACKS A. Shall be four pound (4#) lead, and of dimensions required to completely cover existing plumbing stack. 2.23 LEAD FLASHING DRAINS A. Shall be four pound (4#) lead, minimum thirty-six inches by thirty-six inches (36" x 36"), used for flashing of internal drains. 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 11 FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT 2.24 WALKWAY PAD A. The walkway pad shall have the following minimum physical properties, and be applied with edges heat or solvent welded. Pro e Test Procedure Physical Properties Color Gray Size 36" wide x 60' long Thickness ASTM D 638 .080" nominal Reinforcement 1000 Denier Polyester Tear Strength ASTM D 751 210 X 200 lbf Puncture Resistance 96 lbs Cold Resistance ASTM D 1043 -400 C Shore A Durometer 85 Hydrostatic Resistance 400 psi Dimensional Stability ASTM D 1240 <_ 1% Ultraviolet Stability 12,000 hrs. Excellent 2.25 TERMINATION/PRESSURE BARS A. Aluminum strip shall be extruded channel bar with a mill finish, width one inch (1"), thickness 0.100" f .008", leg height one-fourth inch (1 /4") top and bottom, leg angle ninety degrees (90"), for perimeter and curb anchorage, having predrilled holes six inches (6") on center, as manufactured by Olympic Fasteners, or approved equal. 2.26 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. All materials shall be delivered with appropriate carton and can labels indicating appropriate warnings, storage conditions, lot numbers, and usage instructions. Materials damaged in shipping or storage shall not be used. 2.27 PRECAUTIONS A. Some of the indicated materials are extremely flammable and/or toxic. Use precautions indicated on can and carton labels. 2.28 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Other materials shall be as specified or of the best grade for the proposed use as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REFERENCE A. The manufacturer's Technical Specifications shall be considered a part of this specification and should be referred to for more specific application procedures and recommendations. 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 12 FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT B. Application of materials shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. In the instance of a conflict between these specifications and those of the manufacturer, the more stringent specifications shall take precedence. C. General Installation: 1. Protect adjacent areas with tarpaulin or other durable materials. 2. Contractor shall prevent overspray, and be responsible for parking lot areas and/or adjoining areas not part of this contract. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for sealing, as required, all openings that may allow bitumen migration or drippage, i.e. pitch dams, envelopes, and filler strips. 4. Prepare surfaces according to manufacturer's or applicator's published instructions. All metal that is to receive bitumen, or come in contact with bitumen or adhesive, shall be first primed with appropriate primer. Any prefnished sheet steel that is to receive bitumen, or come in contact with bitumen or adhesive, shall be scored, scuffed or abraded prior to receiving primer. 5. Use cleaning materials or primers necessary to render an acceptable surface/substrate. 6. All surfaces/substrates shall be clean and dry prior to application of materials. 7. Prior to application of felts and membrane, all foreign matter, gravel, etc., shall be removed from the insulation and/or substrate. Gravel or debris between the insulation/substrate and plies is not acceptable. 8. Bitumen kettle shall have a visible thermometer and thermostatic control or soine other means to provide positive monitoring of the bitumen temperature when it is heated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 9. Ambient temperature shall be 45' F and rising. 10. The maximum heating temperature of Type III asphalt shall be 500' F. 11. The temperature of Type III asphalt shall be approximately 430' F f at the point of application or as recommended by the membrane manufacturer. 12. Maintain kettle and/or tanker temperature at least 25' F below the actual flash point of the bituminous materials used. 13. Never heat the bituminous materials at high temperatures for prolonged periods of time. 14. Do not allow bituminous materials to stand in luggers for long periods. 15. Circulate bituminous materials. 16. Insulate hot transport lines if required. 17. Wrinkles, buckles, kinks, and fishmouths are not acceptable when laying membrane. 18. Where deteriorated base flashing is removed, primed cant strips shall be installed at the intersection of the deck and the vertical surfaces. All flashings shall be mechanically top -fastened with a termination bar a minimum of six inches (6") on center at the top leading edge, and be a minimum of eight inches (8") in height from finished membrane. 19. Provide a water test of each roof section prior to substantial completion. The test should simulate rainfall of one inch (1") per hour minimum. 20. On slopes greater than one inch (I") in twelve inches (12"), refer to NRCA and/or manufacturer's guidelines for backnailing procedures and follow the more stringent guidelines for all specified materials. 3.2 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. All substrate preparation shall be in accordance with Section 07591 Membrane Reroofing Preparation. 3.3 INSULATION 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 13 FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT A. Installation of roof insulation shall be in accordance with Section 07216 Roof and Deck Insulation. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: In regard to attachment, the manufacturer's instructions or specifications shall determine the suitability for an application. Installation must meet ASCE 7 criteria and meet local governing building codes. C. Precautions: The surface of the insulation must not be ruptured due to overdriving of fasteners. D. Insulation shall be tapered or feathered at drains and scuppers to provide proper drainage (if applicable). E. No more insulation shall be installed than can be covered by the completed roof system by the end of the day or the onset of inclement weather. 3.4 NAILERS A. All nailers shall be installed in accordance with Section 06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry. B. Wooden milers shall be installed at gravel stops, drip edges, and expansion joints on outside perimeter of building according to NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory and IBC guidelines. C. All Construction: Nailers shall be the same height as the new recovery board being installed where required. Nailers shall be raised if necessary by anchoring an additional nailer of appropriate height to the existing nailer if the existing nailer is not to be replaced. Nailers shall be anchored to resist a pull-out force of one hundred seventy-five pounds (175#) per foot. Fasteners shall be no less than two (2) per nailer, and be spaced at three feet (T) on center maximum. Expansion joint milers shall extend upward a minimum of eight inches (8") above finish roof height. 3.5 WOOD CANTS A. All wood cants shall be installed in accordance with Section 06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry. B. Toe of cant shall be level with the surface to receive new roof membrane and in all cases anchored according to NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory and IBC guidelines. 3.6 APPLICATION OF PLY SHEET A. Substrate Board shall be covered with SBS base sheet fully adhered as follows: All layers shall be solid mopped at the nominal rate of thirty pounds (30#) f 20 percent per one hundred (100) square feet using asphalt Type III as required by slope, properly heated. Specified layers shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with general practices as set forth by the NRCA Roofing Manual. 3.7 APPLICATION OF FLEECE BACKED MEMBRANE A. Fully Adhered Application: Fully adhere membrane to acceptable substrate with hot asphalt applied at the rate specified by the manufacturer. 1. The roof surface must be clean, dry and free of foreign material. 2. Position sheets as indicated on approved shop drawings. 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 14 FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT 3. Fold one end of the Elvaloyg sheet on top of itself until both ends meet. Apply hot asphalt to the prepared roof surface.. The sheet can then be pulled and laid into the bonding material using care not to create any wrinkles. 4. Carefully push into place from fold line to overlap, avoiding wrinkles and air pockets. Roll or broom membrane flat. 5. Repeat procedure for other sheet half. 6. Lap seams shall be done by lapping the two inch (2") selvedge edge over the non -selvedge edge of the previous roll. The selvedge edge seam shall be made with the heat gun method. 7. Roll ends are butted together and capped with a six inch (6") wide trim strip. The trim strip is then seamed with the heat gun. 8. Seam sealer shall be applied to all non -factory edges. B. Lap Seaming Procedure: Overlap membrane for attachment method specified and hot-air welded with manufacturer's approved equipment. 1. All surfaces to be weld shall be clean, dry and free of foreign material. 2. All seams must then be checked with a needle probe and any voids repaired with the heat gun. 3. Caulk all exposed cut edges with seam sealer. 3.8 FLASHING A. Flash all penetrations, metal edge systems, walls, curbs, expansion joints, drains as shown on details and approved shop drawings with white reinforced Elvaloy® flashing membrane. 1. Use prefabricated flashing accessories or components such as sealant pockets, premolded vent/pipe flashing. 2. Mechanically fasten flashing at terminations according to approved details. 3. Fastening membrane flashing through metal counterflashing is not acceptable. B. Any lumber or shimming required for attachment or to make material flashing flush or level with offsets and/or transitions shall be incorporated in the flashing specifications. 3.9 BASE FLASHING (APPROXIMATELY 8" IN HEIGHT MINIMUM) A. Base flashings shall be installed using the flashing membrane, with length of run not to exceed twenty linear feet (20'). B. Wooden nailers or curbs shall be installed at all edges and openings in the roof, mechanically fastened to the deck. C. Cant strips shall be installed at the intersection of the deck and all vertical surfaces. D. The roofing field membrane shall extend up over and two inches (2") above the top of cant strips at all vertical intersections or out to the roofs edge. E. All existing substrates receiving flashing membrane shall be clean and primed with primer, prior to application as required. F. All flashings shall be mechanically fastened with a termination bar a maximum of six inches (6") on center, be a maximum of eight inches (8") above finished roof height, extend a minimum of four inches (4") onto the field of horizontal roof membrane, and not exceed twenty linear feet (20') of run in length. 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 15 FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT G. After proper ternination of the base flashing at a minimum eight inch (8") height (or maximum eighteen inch (18") height), a saw cut reglet with counterflashing shall be installed according to NRCA and SMACNA guidelines. 1 " H. All vertical flashing lap seams of the flashing membrane shall be hot-air welded. I. All flashing membrane shall be adhered with flashing bonding adhesive to the vertical substrate and hot-air welded to the field of roof membrane; hot-air weld vertical laps. J. Flashing laps shall be minimum two inch (2") width, no maximum. Hot-air weld of flashing lap shall be minimum two inch (2") width, no maximum. K. Hot -Air Welding of Flashing Laps: 1. When using a hand-held hot-air welder, the seams should be pressed together using a hand-held roller. The speed and temperature settings of the welding equipment can be affected by the weather conditions at the site of application, therefore, these parameters should be set by trial and error using two (2) pieces of the flashing membrane. Minimum width of hot-air weld two inches (2" ), no maximum. 2. Lay the laps together and apply pressure to the welded seam to ensure full adhesion. 3. Allow the seams to set fully, and probe the entire length for voids. Reseam voids immediately with a hot-air gun and roller. L. All hot-air welded seams/laps shall be tested daily with a probe for inte rg_ity, no variance. 3.10 VERTICAL WALL FLASHING (FOR USE APPROXIMATELY 8-18" ABOVE THE FINISHED ROOF LINE AND EXTENDING UPWARD) A. Flashing membrane shall be installed on the vertical be ig nning a minimum of eight inches (8") above the finished roof line (where the base flashing is terminated), with length of run not to exceed twenty feet (20'). Flashing shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. The termination bar used to terminate the minimum eight inch (8") high base flashing shall be used to terminate the lower edge of the vertical flashing. This will cause the termination bar to be buried at the termination point. Care should be taken to ensure the top edge of the base flashing and bottom edge of the vertical flashing are both secured. C. All existing substrates receiving flashing membrane shall be clean and primed with asphalt primer, prior to application. D. All substrates receiving welded -seam flashing membrane shall be clean and pruned with primer, prior to application when applicable. E. The vertical wall flashing membrane shall be set in flashing bonding adhesive according to manufacturer's guidelines. F. All vertical flashing lap seams of the flashing membrane shall be hot-air welded. G. Flashing laps shall be minimum two inch (2") width, no maximum. Hot-air weld of flashing lap shall be minimum two inch (2") width, no maximum. 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 16 j FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT H. Immediately following the laying of the flashing membrane, it shall be pressed or rolled in the width direction of the membrane. This will prevent excessive entrapment of air beneath the membrane. The pressing or rolling shall be in the width direction and with the laps so as not to buck the laps. I. Any flashing extending further than eighteen inches (18") up onto a vertical surface shall be installed using the strapped method and must be fastened with a termination bar or installed up and over the parapet wall and fastened to the nailer on the outside of the wall. J. The flashing membrane shall be run up the wall in sheet widths, run under the coping cap and be terminated on the outside of the wall six inches (6") on center; then the coping cap shall be reset. All side laps are to be hot-air welded. K. Hot-air Welding Laps: 1. When using a hand-held hot-air welder, the seams should be pressed together using a hand-held roller. The speed and temperature settings of the welding equipment can be affected by the weather conditions at the site of application, therefore, these parameters should be set by the contractor by using two (2) pieces of flashing membrane. Minimum width of hot-air weld shall be two inches (2"). 2. Lay the laps together and apply pressure to the welded seam to ensure full adhesion. 3. Allow the seams to set fully, and probe the entire length for voids. Reseam voids immediately with a hot-air gun and roller. L. All hot-air welded seams/laps shall be tested daily with a probe for integrity, no variance. M. Any lumber or shimming required for attachment or to make material flashing flush or level with offsets and/or transitions shall be incorporated in the flashing specifications. 3.11 PERIMETER FASTENING A. Wood nailers are required for perimeter gravel stops or drip edges. Field membrane and all plies shall be mechanically fastened to nailer on twelve inch (12") centers maximum. 3.12 EDGING FLASHINGS A. An NRCA-approved gravel stop/fascia system shall be installed in strict accordance with published instructions to meet ES-1. 3.13 ROOF DRAINS A. Inspect and test drain and drain lines prior to start of work in contact area. Open if blocked or clogged and repair/replace all broken, missing drain components and lines as required. Verify in writing that all drains and lines are free flowing and watertight prior to substantial completion. Comply with local plumbing codes. B. Remove strainer and clamping ring. Repair (or replace if damaged) and reset. C. Insert Drains (If Required): Install new drain inserts with permanent gaskets between insert and drain wall to prevent backflow of water and leakage. 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 17 FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT D. Replacement Drains If Required): Sized to match existing drains stem. Install watertight to existing p �g Y g g lines. Follow drain manufacturer's installation requirements. 3.14 WALKWAY PADS ` A. Fully adhere and heat weld walkway pads where shown on drawings or where required to provide protected pathways from rooftop access points to mechanical or other equipment requiring rooftop maintenance. 3.15 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of excess cement, adhesive, sealants, mortar and paint associated with the new work. B. Clean work area of excess roofing materials and installation debris daily. C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by the work. 3.16 MEMBRANE CLEANING A. After all membrane has been installed, it shall be cleaned with a cleaning agent compatible with the membrane to return the membrane to like new appearance. 3.17 PROTECTION A. Protect all building surfaces against damage from roofing work. B. Where traffic must continue over finished, installed roofing system, protect membrane, underlayment accessories and finishes from damage. 3.18 MEMBRANE PROTECTION A. Where equipment pads, wood sleepers, or walkway slabs are to be installed over the roofing membrane, an additional layer of the roofing membrane shall be installed between the roofing membrane and the pad, sleeper, or slab. Due caution shall be exercised to prevent roofing membrane damage during placement. Where required, membrane shall be welded to field membrane to prevent slippage. 3.19 PIPING/CONDUIT A. Piping/conduit shall be raised to NRCA recommended heights, and new supports furnished. Permanent supports shall be installed upon pads approved by membrane manufacturer. Coordinate work with Owner's representative. B. All gas lines and piping shall be coated with specified corrnuercial grade yellow paint. 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 18 FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT 3.20 PIPE/EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS I A. Pipe supports shall be placed approximately ten feet (10) on center. New supports shall be set on a double layer of membrane, and attached to the pipe with suitable strapping. Double layer of membrane shall be adhered to the roof surface. 3.21 OVERNIGHT SEAL A. Shall be performed according to accepted roofing practice as outlined in the NRCA Roofing Manual, SPRI and membrane manufacturer's recommended procedure. B. The roofing membrane shall be sealed to the roof deck or existing roof at the end of the day or at the onset of inclement weather to prevent water from flowing into the completed roofing system. Temporary seals shall be removed upon resumption of work. 3.22 COPING JOINTS, REGLET JOINTS, CAULK JOINTS, WALL JOINTS, AND WALL CRACKS ABOVE THE ROOF LINE A. All reglet and coping joints shall be raked clean of loose materials and debris, and sealed with caulk sealant. Sealant shall be properly installed and tooled in a workmanlike manner to ensure permanent seal. B. All open coping and masonry tenninations and intersections shall be cleaned out and sealed with backer rod and caulk sealant. Backer rod shall be minimum one and one-half (1-1/2) times the width of the opening to be sealed. Caulk sealant thickness shall be minimum of one-half (1/2) of the width of the opening to be sealed. C. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of gaskets, sealant or caulking compound. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, existing sealant, moisture, and other substances which could interfere with seal of gasket or bond of sealant or caulking compound. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Roughen vitreous and glazed joint surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer. D. Prime or seal joint surfaces where indicated, and where recommended by sealant manufacturer. Confine primer/sealer to areas of sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. E. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical representative directs otherwise. F. Install sealant backer rod for liquid -applied sealants, except where shown to be omitted or recommended to be omitted by sealant manufacturer for application indicated. G. Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants are deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of joint to bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. s 898-14A S FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 19 fi FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM CONT H. For normal movingjoints to be sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic fill joints to a J J � J depth equal to fifty percent (50%) of joint width, but neither more than one-half inch (1/2") deep nor less than one-fourth inch (1/4") deep. rij, END OF SECTION 07535 898-14A FULLY ADHERED MULTI -PLY ROOF SYSTEM 07535 - 20 j I SECTION 07591 - MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof tear -off. 2. Roof re-cover preparation. 1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terns related to roofing work in this Section. B. Existing Membrane Roofing System: Built-up asphalt & SBS-modified bituminous roofing membrane, surfacing, and components and accessories between deck and roofing membrane. C. Substrate Board: Rigid board or panel products placed over the roof deck that serve as thermal barriers, provide a smooth substrate, or serve as a component of a fire -resistance -rated roofing system. D. Roof Re -Cover Preparation: Existing roofing membrane that is to remain and be prepared for reuse. E. Roof Tear -Off: Removal of existing membrane roofing system from deck. F. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off -site unless indicated to be removed and reinstalled. G. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not indicated to be removed. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Temporary Roofing: Include Product Data and description of temporary roofing system. If temporary roof will remain in place, submit surface preparation requirements needed to receive permanent roof, and submit a letter from roofing membrane manufacturer stating acceptance of the temporary membrane, and that its inclusion will not adversely affect the roofing system's resistance to fire and wind. C. Fastener pull-out test report. 17 898-14A MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION 07591 - 1 MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION CONT D. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site P p g J g improvements, including exterior and interior finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as having been damaged by reroofing operations. Submit before Work begins. E. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes, such as asbestos -containing material, by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer of new membrane roofing system licensed to perform asbestos abatement in the State or jurisdiction where Project is located and approved by warrantor of existing roofing system to work on existing roofing. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning membrane roofing removal. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Preliminary Reroofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Meet with Owner; Owner's representative; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting agency representative; roofing system manufacturer's representative; deck Installer; roofing Installer including project manager, superintendent, and foreman; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects reroofing including installers of roof accessories and roof -mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to reroofing preparation, including membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Review temporary protection requirements for existing roofing system that is to remain, during and after installation. 4. Review roof drainage during each stage of reroofing and review roof drain plugging and plug removal procedures. 5. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 6. Review existing deck removal procedures and Owner notifications. 7. Review procedures to determine condition and acceptance of existing deck and base flashing substrate for reuse. 8. Review structural loading limitations of deck during reroofing. 9. Review base flashings, special roofing details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect reroofing. 10. Review HVAC shutdown and sealing of air intakes. 11. Review shutdown of fire -suppression, -protection, and -alarm and -detection systems. 12. Review.procedures for asbestos removal or unexpected discovery of asbestos -containing materials. 13. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 14. Review existing conditions that may require notification of Architect before proceeding. 898-14A MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION 07591 - 2 MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION CONT D. ReroofingConference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 J PY q Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Meet with Owner, Owner's representative, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, roofing Installer including project manager, superintendent, foreman, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects reroofing including installers of roof accessories and roof -mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to reroofing preparation, including membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Review temporary protection requirements for existing roofing system that is to remain, during and after installation. 4. Review roof drainage during each stage of reroofing and review roof drain plugging and plug removal procedures. 5. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 6. Review existing deck removal procedures and Owner notifications. 7. Review procedures to determine condition and acceptance of existing deck for reuse. 8. Review structural loading limitations of deck during reroofing. 9. Review base flashings, special roofing details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect reroofing. 10. Review HVAC shutdown and sealing of air intakes. 11. Review shutdown of fire -suppression, -protection, and -alarm and -detection systems. 12. Review procedures for asbestos removal or unexpected discovery of asbestos -containing materials. 13. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 14. Review existing conditions that may require notification of Architect before proceeding. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately below reroofing area. Conduct reroofing so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide Owner with not less than 48 hours notice of activities that may affect Owner's operations. 1. Coordinate work activities daily with Owner so Owner can place protective dust or water leakage covers over sensitive equipment or furnishings, shut down HVAC and fire -alarm or - detection equipment if needed, and evacuate occupants from below the work area if desired. 2. Before working over structurally impaired areas of deck, notify Owner to evacuate occupants from below the affected area. Verify that occupants below the work area have been evacuated prior to proceeding with work over the impaired deck area. B. Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings, and landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofing operations. C. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. D. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be reroofed. I Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. E. Limit construction loads on roof for uniformly distributed loads. F. A roof moisture survey of existing membrane roofing system is available for Contractor's reference. _I 898-14A MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION 07591 - 3 MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION CONT G. The results of an analysis of test cores from existing membrane roofing system are available for j Contractor's reference. H. Weather Limitations: Proceed with reroofing preparation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering into existing roofing system or building. I. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials such as asbestos -containing materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. Existing roof will be left no less watertight than before removal. 2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INFILL MATERIALS A. Use infill materials matching existing membrane roofing system materials, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate with Owner to shut down air intake equipment in the vicinity of the Work. Cover air intake louvers before proceeding with reroofing work that could affect indoor air quality or activate smoke detectors in the ductwork. B. Maintain roof drains in functioning condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each workday. Prevent debris from entering or blocking roof drains and conductors. Use roof -drain plugs specifically designed for this purpose. Remove roof -drain plugs at end of each workday, when no work is taking place, or when rain is forecast. 1. If roof drains will be temporarily blocked or unserviceable due to roofing system removal or partial installation of new membrane roofing system, provide alternative drainage method to remove water and eliminate ponding. Do not permit water to enter into or under existing membrane roofing system components that are to remain. C. Verify that rooftop utilities and service piping have been shut off before commencing Work. 898-14A MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION 07591 - 4 MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION CONT ii 3.2 CATEGORY II (NON -FRIABLE) ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS (ACM) REMOVAL ._ NOTE: Asbestos removal procedures are required (if asbestos is present) while removal of ACM roof materials takes place. The following procedures are to be followed as a minimum: A. Roofing contractors who perform asbestos roof tear -off shall use hand tools such as axes, picks, shovels or mechanical equipment such as a "roof warrior" that uses a reciprocating wedge to tear roofing materials. Breaking and/or slicing of material is permitted. Sanding, grinding or abrading during handling is not permitted. B. Wrap all rooftop ducts, vents or exhaust openings with 6 mil poly and tape. C. Provide an Asbestos Hazard Control Supervisor (competent person) to oversee demolition. D. Ensure employees have received OSHA required training in asbestos removal and health hazards associated with exposure to airborne asbestos fibers. E. Roof will be sufficiently wetted down before removal to prevent dust, using pump -up garden sprayer or water hose with spray nozzle. F. Perform personal and area air monitoring for at least the first three (3) days of the project in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1001. Monitoring shall be done by either: 1) in-house certified abatement personnel; or 2) certified asbestos monitoring personnel from a certified outside source. G. Asbestos Warning signs and tape shall be posted in tear -off area. H. Based on air monitoring results, the contractor MUST execute a Written Negative Exposure Assessment Determination and keep on file at the project site along with air monitoring results. I. Use airtight chutes or mechanical means to lower ACM from the roof. The ACM must be wrapped in poly and removed daily. If ACM is NOT wrapped, the disposal container must be enclosed. J. Disposal: Can be disposed of as construction debris at any approved landfill. 3.3 ROOF RE-COVER PREPARATION A. Remove blisters, ridges, buckles, and other substrate irregularities from existing roofing membrane that inhibit new recover boards from conforming to substrate. 1. Remove loose aggregate from aggregate -surfaced, built-up bituminous roofing with a power broom. 2. Broom clean existing substrate. 3. Coordinate with Owner's inspector to schedule times for tests and inspections before proceeding with installation of recover boards. 4. Verify that existing substrate is dry before proceeding with installation of recover boards. Spot check substrates with an electrical capacitance moisture -detection meter. 5. Remove materials that are wet or damp. Removal will be paid for by adjusting the Contract Sum according to unit prices included in the Contract Documents. 898-14A MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION 07591 - 5 fi t MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION CONT 3.4 DISPOSAL A. Collect and place demolished materials in containers. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on -site. 1. Storage or sale of demolished items or materials on -site will not be permitted. B. Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 07591 898-14A MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION 07591 - 6 SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide flashing and sheet metal components for moisture protection. 2. Related accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit shop drawings, product data and mockups of all sheet metal. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers. in satisfactory use in similar service for five (5) years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Reference Standards: Applicable portions of ASCE, SMACNA, ASTM and NAAMM publications 1.4 WARRANTIES A. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard limited product warranty signed by the manufacturer's authorized official, guaranteeing to correct failures in product which may occur during the warranty period, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the Owner/Project Consultant may have under the contract documents. Failure is defined to include product failure which leads to interruption of a watertight installation. Correction may include repair or replacement of failed product. B. Contractor's Warranty Period: For roofing flashing and sheet metal, provide a written warranty which shall warrant work to be free of leaks and defects in materials and workmanship for two (2) years, starting from date of substantial completion. C. Defects of the sheet metal occurring during the warranty period shall be promptly corrected by the contractor, and defects of the roofing shall be promptly corrected by the manufacturer at no additional cost to the Owner. Upon notification from the Owner or the Owner's representative that evidence of a defect exists, the responsible party shall immediately inform the Owner's representative of the date on which corrective work will be scheduled, and shall notify the Owner's representative when the corrective work has been completed. 898-14A SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 07620 - 1 i 1� SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES CONT -< PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIAL A. Hot -dipped Galvanized Steel for use as counterflashings (where not visible from the ground), pitch pans and expansion joints: Minimum 24-gauge, G-90, hot -dipped galvanized metal, commercial quality, ASTM A 525. B. Hot -dipped Galvanized Steel for use as continuous clips: Minimum 22-gauge, G-90, hot -dipped galvanized metal, commercial quality, ASTM A 525. C. Prefinished Galvanized Sheet Steel (where visible from the ground): Shall be 24-gauge flat stock, prefinished with Kynar finish meeting ASTM A 446, forty-five and one-half inches to forty-eight inches width by one hundred twenty inches in length (45-1/2" - 48" x 120") for use as new metal edge gravel guard, downspouts, gutters, coping and miscellaneous metal. Standard color to be selected by Owner/Project Consultant. D. Elvaloy® Cladded Metal: Shall be G-90 galvanized steel with 25 mil Elvaloy® membrane lamination; width shall be four feet, length shall be eight or ten feet. Standard color to be selected by Owner. E. Stainless Steel: QQ-S-766, Class 301, 302, 304, or 316; or ASTM A 167, Type 301, 302, 304, or 316; form and condition most suitable for the purpose. F. Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Plate and Sheet: QQ-A-250; form, alloy, and temper shall be that most suitable for the purpose. G. Sheet Lead: QQ-L-201., Grade B. H. All existing sheet metal shall be replaced with new metal of like gauge and type, or as specified on drawings. 2.2 FASTENERS A. Fasteners shall be same metal as flashing/sheet metal, or other non -corrosive metal as recommended by sheet manufacturer for the specific application. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. B. Fasteners and fastening plates or bars shall be listed in the FM Global Approval Guide. C. Fastener for Brick: Shall be one-fourth inch by two inches (1/4" x 2"), zinc with plated steel or stainless steel nail, one piece unit, flat head. D. Screws: Self -taping sheet metal type with neoprene washer, as appropriate. E. Pop Rivets: Full stainless steel Series 42 or 44, as appropriate. F. Continuous Clip: Concealed hold-down clip type; of same materials as coping, gravel guard, sized to suit application. Use a continuous clip, minimum 20-gauge G-90 galvanized. 898-14A SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 07620 - 2 SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES CONT i 2.3 RELATED MATERIAL A. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant, black color. B. Plastic Cement: FS SS-C-153, cutback asphalt type. C. Solder: QQ-S-571 composition best suited for purpose; use high tin content, minimum 60/40, for stainless steel and monel alloy. D. Copper, Sheet, and Strip: QQ-C-576, ASTM B 370, light cold -rolled temper. E. Lead -coated Copper: ASTM B 101, Type I or II, Class A. F. Sealant (for Sheet Metal): One -component polyurethane, conforming to requirements of FS TT-S- 230C, non -staining and non -bleeding. G. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Downspout Boots: Cast iron by Neenah Foundry Company, or pre -approved equal, provide and install. 2. Splash Blocks: Concrete, 3000 psi, 28 days. Provide and install with protection pads at all downspouts. Dimensions shall be a minimum eighteen inches wide by thirty-six inches long (18" x 36"). 3. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, non -corrosive, size, and gauge required for performance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place, substrates are smooth and clean and nailing strips located. B. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed and secure. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. Provide all shop drawings and mock-ups one month prior to installation to the Owner/Project Consultant for approval. B. Install starter and edge strips and cleats before starting installation. 898-14A SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 07620 - 3 SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES CONT 3.3 FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Shop -fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown, and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather -resistant performance; with expansion provisions for ( running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil -canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels as indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Fabricate gravel stops/fascia, gutters/downspouts, counterflashings, pitch pans, expansion joints, and copings with new galvanized sheet metal as specified. Fabricate gravel guard and fascia to size and dimensions as indicated on the drawings. Fabricate light metal coping, gutters and downspouts as indicated. C. Form sheet metal on bending brake. D. Shape, trim and hand seam metal on bench insofar as practicable. E. Form materials with straight lines, sharp angles and smooth curves. F. Fold back edges on concealed side of exposed edge to form hem (1/2" minimum). G. Weld or solder joints on parts that are to be permanently and rigidly assembled. H. Submit sheet metal models for approval by the Owner/Project Consultant. Limit single -piece lengths to ten feet (10'). Fabricate corner pieces with eighteen inch (18") extensions, metered and sealed by forming as one piece. K. Surface sand flange prior to applying any primers on Kynar metal. L. Backpaint flashing in contact with masonry or dissimilar materials with bituminous paint. M. All existing or missing metal rooftop projections shall be replaced. New rooftop projection details shall be as recommended in NRCA or SMACNA handbooks. All rooftop projections shall be cleaned, all joints sealed, and painted with a rust inhibitive paint. Standard color to be selected by the Owner/Project Consultant. N. All sheet metal shall be sealed and watertight. O. Metal work should be secured so as to prevent damage from buckling or wind. Where clips are shown, these are to be continuous. P. All metal to receive bitumen or adhesive shall be first primed with asphalt primer. Q. All prefinished metal shall be sanded and/or abraded prior to receiving primer. 898-14A eSHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 07620 - 4 SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES CONT R. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat -lock seams. For metal other than aluminum, tin edges are to be seamed, form seams, and solder. S. Expansion Provisions: Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than one inch (1") deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). T. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non -expansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, forth metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with industry standards. U. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non -compatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator. V. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General: All sheet metal termination to vertical wall shall have a through -wall with receiver installed on masonry walls or prefabricated "Z" bar flashing pre -installed to fluid applied wall finished prior to installation of sheet metal termination. This applies to edge metal, base flashing closures and all vertical surface intersections. Refer to NRCA, SMACNA, and metal manufacturer's guidelines. B. Elvaloy® cladded metal shall be fabricated as needed; follow these specifications and standard sheet metal practice for attachment to roof details. C. Gravel Guard/Fascia: 1. Shall be installed with expansion joints, ten feet (10') on center, one-fourth inch (1/4") expansion leeway, with a cover plate. 2. Secure metal flashings per specifications. 3. Lock seams and end joints. 4. Form sections identical to profiles as shown or approved similar, to match existing building. 5. Fabricate corner pieces with minimum eighteen inch (18"), maximum forty-eight inch (48") extensions, formed and sealed with rivets and sealant, as one piece. 6. Hem exposed edges three -fourths inch (3/4") minimum. 7. Backpaint flashing in contact with masonry or dissimilar materials with bituminous paint. Surface sand before applying primers. 8. Integrate flashing in a manner consistent with detailing. 9. Provide and install continuous clip around perimeter. 10. Shall be fabricated in accordance with all SMACNA provisions. D. Coping: l . Remove existing and replace with new metal coping as required for a permanent watertight installation. 2. All coping shall be manufactured with low profile standing seam metal to meet ES-1. f 3. Shall be minimum 24-gauge prefinished Kynar installed in ten foot (10') sections maximum. } 4. Vertical fascia shall extend minimum two and one-half inches (2-1/2") or be minimum one and one-half inches (1-1/2") below bottom of nailer, whichever is greater. =i 898-14A SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 07620 - 5 J e- SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES CONT 5. Secure metal flashings per specifications. 6. Lock seams and end joints. 7. Form sections identical to profiles as shown or approved similar, to match existing building. 8. Fabricate corner pieces with minimum eighteen inch (18"), maximum forty-eight inch (48") extensions, formed and sealed with rivets and sealant, as one piece. 9. Hem exposed edges three -fourths inch (3/4") minimum. 10. Backpaint flashing in contact with masonry or dissimilar materials with bituminous paint. Surface sand before applying primers. 11. Integrate flashing in a manner consistent with detailing. 12. Provide and install continuous clip, minimum 22-gauge. 13. Shall be fabricated in accordance with all SMACNA provisions. E. Counterflashing: 1. Remove existing and replace with new metal counterflashing as required for a permanent watertight installation. 2. Saw cut brick mortar joint to receive friction fit reglet and removable counterflashing as detailed in SMACNA Figure 4-3E. F. Overflow Scupper, Collector Head and Downspout: 1. Fabrication: a. Fabricate overflow scupper, collector head and downspout of profile and size indicated, taking care that the roof drain leader fits properly into the back of the collector head. Seal the pipe to the collector head for watertightness. b. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. c. Fabricate with required connection pieces. d. Fabricate section square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths and free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. e. Hem exposed edges of metal. f. Form and seal all metal joints; provide for expansion joints per SMACNA. 2. Installation: a. Install collector head, downspout, and accessories. b. Join lengths with seams pop riveted and sealed watertight. Flash and seal collector head to downspouts and accessories. c. Seal all metal joints watertight for full metal surface contact. d. Collector Head: SMACNA style profile; submit detail for approval. e. Downspouts: Rectangular profile. Seal all joints, four inches by six inches (4" x 6"). f. Support Brackets, Joint Fasteners: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. g. Anchorage Devices: SMACNA requirements. Type recommended by fabricator. h. Collector Head Support: Kynar. Color and Finish to match, as recommended by SMACNA. i. Downspout Supports: Straps, Kynar. Color and Finish to match. 898-14A SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 07620 - 6 1._: SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES CONT G. Pitch Pans: I. Install pitch pans of 24-gauge, G-90 galvanized steel with a 25 Mil Elvaloy® Kee membrane lamination according to NRCA standards, minimum of six inches by six inches (6" x 6"). 2. Pitch pans shall be fabricated to a minimum of six inches (6") above the finished roof membrane. The top vertical edge of the thermoplastic clad metal must be folded over to conceal the uncoated side of the metal inside the pitch pan. The pitch pan flange must be a minimum of three and one half inches (3.5") wide in contact with the horizontal roof plain or field of roof membrane. 3. Approved caulking or water block shall be applied under the pitch pan flange prior to securing the flange to the deck with approved fasteners a minimum of 4" on center. 4. All projections enclosed in pitch pans shall be cleaned in any manner suitable and coated with a rust inhibitive coating as approved by the Owner/Project Consultant. Coating shall be allowed to dry prior to pitch pan fill. 5. Base of pitch pans shall be filled with grout or cementitious binder to proper height and allowed to cure. i d 6. Top finish fill shall be self -leveling, one -part urethane, with maximum fill to within three -eighths inch (3/8") of top of pitch pan sides. 7. Strip the thermoplastic clad metal flange of the pitch pan to the field membrane with one strip of -a flashing membrane. The flashing membrane must extend from the outer edge of the pitch pan Range onto the field membrane a minimum of three inches (3") and butt to the vertical sides of the pitch pan on all 4 sides. The flashing membrane shall be hot air welded to the thermoplastic_ clad metal pitch pan and to the field membrane. Hot air welds shall be a minimum of two inches (2") wide. 8. Install preformed outside corners by hot air welding in place at all four (4) corners of the pitch pan. 9. Apply seam sealer to the edges of the flashing membrane. ' �a H. Bonnets/Hoods: I. Fabricate and install above all pitch pans, where necessary, or reinstall as applicable, metal bonnets over all pitch pans, NO EXCEPTIONS. 2. Bonnets/Hoods shall be manufactured with metal compatible with metal to which bonnet is to be attached. 3. On beams and other steel weld in place bonnets fabricated from one-fourth inch (1/4") steel plate. 4. Draw band bonnets fabricated from 22-gauge galvanized steel may be used on circular projections. 3.05 FINISH A. Backpaint concealed metal surfaces with bituminous paint where expected to be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals. Exposed surfaces to be provided with a factory applied fluorocarbon Kynar finish meeting ASTM A 446 and AAMA specification 605.2 for high performance coating. 898-14A SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 07620 - 7 SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES CONT B. New 24-gauge hot -dipped galvanized metal shall be painted on all locations visible from the ground with an industrial grade paint to match existing, or standard color selected by Owner/Project Consultant. Galvanized metal surface must be properly prepared by removing all oil, grease, and/or protective mill coatings by solvent cleaning surface in accordance with SSPC-SP1, and according to paint manufacturer's recommendation, to ensure proper adhesion of paint to metal. END OF SECTION 07620 898-14A SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 07620 - 8 t�_. t ...� SECTION 07920 -JOINT SEALANTS i PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS [A I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. B. Section included the following applications: 1. Sidewalk joints. 2. Pavement and sidewalk joints. 3. Concrete construction joints. 4. Wall joints (exterior) 5. Flashing and coping joints. 6. Window and door joints. 7. Interior wall and ceiling joints. 8. Joints at plumbing fixtures. 9. Fire resistant joint sealers. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 2. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters with acoustical sealants. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints. 4. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for sealing the joints. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide manufacturer's standard joint colors. D. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer. E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. �1 898-14A JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1 JOINT SEALANTS CONT B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer. -, 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint -sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint -sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint - sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Liquid -Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid -applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. C. Stain -Test -Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. 898-14A JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2 JOINT SEALANTS CONT D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. E. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew -Resistant, Single -Component, Acid -Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT; formulated with fungicide for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates around ceramic tile, showers, sinks and plumbing fixtures. Non -staining, non -bleeding, non - sagging. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Coming Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCSI 700. C. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary. 2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Single -Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT; for sealing at exterior and interior door and window joints. Non -staining, non -bleeding. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I -XL. b. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic. B. Single -Component, Nonsag, Traffic -Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T; for sealing sidewalk joints and joints adjoining vertical surfaces. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1. b. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116. C. Single -Component, Pourable, Traffic -Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T; for sealing concrete paving joints.. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic SL 1. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem -Calk 950. C. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-201. d. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 45. I'm 898-14A JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 3 1 JOINT SEALANTS CONT D. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT; for sealing exterior and interior door and window joints. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated f._ into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation: Dynatrol II. b. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-270 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF, formulated to be paintable and recommended or exposed applications on interior wood framing. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem -Calk 600. C. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. 2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2.6 FIRE-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS Ir A. Provide sealant and accessory material with fire -resistance rating indicated which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire endurance has been determined by testing per ASTM E 814 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Foamed -in -Place Fire Stopping Sealant: Two-part, foamed -in -place, silicone sealant formulated for use as part of a through -penetration fire -stop system for filling openings around cables, conduit, pipes, ducts and similar multiple penetrations through walls and floors. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation: Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam b. General Electric Co.: Pensil 851 898-14A JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 4 JOINT SEALANTS CONT C. One -Part Fire -Stopping Sealant: One part elastorneric sealant formulated for use as part of a through - penetration fire -stop system for sealing openings around cables, conduit, pipes and similar single penetrations through walls and floors. r!", 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation: Dow Corning Fire Stop Sealant b. Electrical Products Div./3M.: 3M Fire Barrier Caulk CP-25 2.7 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed -cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint -sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 898-14A JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 5 JOINT SEALANTS CONT 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. C. Exterior insulation and finish systems. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. C. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required. to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. 898-14A JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 6 JOINT SEALANTS CONT D. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. G. Installation of Preformed Silicone -Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements: l . Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system. 2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with preformed silicone -sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch. Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch inside masking tape. 3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate. 4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife. H. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound -rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. " Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 07920 898-14A JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 7 SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard hollow metal frames. 2. Standard hollow metal door frames. B. Related Sections l . Division 4 Section "Concrete Unit Masonry Assemblies" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into masonry construction. 2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 3. Division 9 Sections "Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. (Galvanized) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire -resistance rating, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 898-14A STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES CONT f 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project - site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. ri 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory -finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide: Republic DL 416 Flush Steal Doors and ME416 welded frames. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Republic Builders Products 2. Fenestra Corporation 3. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating. 898-14A STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES CONT D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Conunercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into masonry walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or i..= ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Powder -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated. G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. H. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral -board, or vertical steel -stiffener core. 3. Vertical Edges for Single -Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 4. Vertical Edges for Double -Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch radius. 5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 6. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic -coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSUSDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSUSDI A250.4 for physical performance level: l . Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold -rolled steel sheet unless metallic -coated sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSUSDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSUSDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). 2. Level 4 and Physical Performance Level A (Maximum Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSUSDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. 898-14A STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES CONT E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot -rolled steel sheet. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES i A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic -coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 4 Steel Doors: 16 gage (0.067-inch) thick steel sheet. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold -rolled steel sheet unless metallic -coated sheet is indicated. I. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 2. Frames for Level 4 Steel Doors: 16 gage (0.067-inch) thick steel sheet. 3. Frames for Wood Doors: 18 gage (0.053-inch) thick steel sheet at individual door opening and 16 gage 0.067-inch- thick steel sheet at doors with sidelights or transoms. 4. Frames for Borrowed Lights: Same as adjacent door frame. D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap -and -stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In -Place Concrete or Masonry: Miniinuin 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip -type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from saine material as door face sheet in which they are installed. B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated. C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed 898-14A STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 4 I STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES CONT s 2.7 LOUVERS A. Provide galvanized louvers for doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch-thick, cold -rolled steel sheet set into 0.32-inch-thick steel frame. 1. Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Exterior Doors: Provide weep -hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire -performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted. D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and snake smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jainbs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. b. Stud -Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 2) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 3) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal -stud partitions. C. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 898-14A STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 5 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES CONT 5. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single -Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double -Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot -rolled steel sheet. F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping. 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface -mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI Al 15 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 16 Sections. G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width. between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. 2.10 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. I. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field -applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting perfonnance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 898-14A STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 6 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES CONT 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire -protection -rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. C. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. e. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. f. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder -actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 4. In -Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 5. In -Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 898-14A STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 7 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES CONT 6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and ' plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 1, C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non -Fire -Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. C. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 2. Fire -Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 11 D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section Glazing and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval -head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying, rust -inhibitive primer. D. Metallic -Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 08110 898-14A STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 8 SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1-GENERAL x1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid -core doors with wood -veneer faces. 2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 9 Sections "Painting" for field finishing doors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate fire -protection ratings for fire -rated doors. 4. Indicate veneer species has been verified to match existing doors within space. C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated." 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. C. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252, UL 1 OB or UL 1 OC. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. 898-14A FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS CONT C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS a A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid -Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Buell Door Company Inc. 3. Eggers Industries. 4. VT Industries Inc. 5. Weyeshauser Company 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Particleboard -Core Doors: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 , made with binder containing no urea -formaldehyde resin. B. Fire -Protection -Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire -protection rating indicated. 2.3 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Interior Solid -Core Doors: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Faces: Medium -density overlay. a. Apply medium -density overlay to standard -thickness, closed -grain, hardwood face veneers. 898-14A FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS CONT 3. Core: Particleboard, 4. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 5. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame -opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. l . Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire -rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI- WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al 15-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal and wood frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80. 2. Job -Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 3. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire -rated doors. 4. Bevel non -fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 5. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. 898-14A FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3 FLUSH WOOD DOORS CO&T \\ 3.3 ADJUSTING � A Operation: k¢tana or replace doors that d not swing 7 operate Rely {\ B. Finished Doors: Replacedoors that are damaged or that d not compl with requirements. Doors may be repaired 7 refinished / work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair 2 a£6Sbn. \} END OFSECTION 0 211 � j � � � � ! .\ � � j � � � ) ; � � \ � � \} :2 i"A 8 8 14A FLUSH WOOD DOORS 0 211-4 \ L; SECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior storefront framing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." B. TAS Texas Accessibility Standards. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum -framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. C. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. B. Deflection of Framing Members: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. C. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum -framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and ' framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static -air -pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. 898-14A ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 1 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS CONT --, D. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum -framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static -air -pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind -load design pressure, but not less than 81bf/sq.ft. E. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum -framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2. Interior Ambient -Air Temperature: 75 deg F. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum -framed systems. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum -framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements. D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. C. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and TAS. D. Source Limitations for Aluminum -Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum -framed systems by field-' measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 898-14A ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 2 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS CONT 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum -framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. C. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer 7225 non -thermal windows or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. 2. Kawneer North. America; an Alcoa company. 3. Tubelite. 4. United States Aluminum. 5. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, .Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/13 308M. B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc -rich, corrosion -resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Provide closure panels and plates at existing framing where existing hardware is removed or relocated. 1. Construction: Non -thermal 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: As indicated. 898-14A ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 3 _z ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS CONT B. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot -dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable -iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS g_ A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. D. Glazing Sealants: For structural -sealant -glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and as follows: 1. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single - component neutral -curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural -sealant, weatherseal- sealant, and aluminum -framed -system manufacturers for this use. a. Priority Product: Dow Coming 795 with 20 year guarantee. b. Color: Matching framing material. 2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum -framed systems, as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied, asphalt -mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. C. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 898-14A ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 4 j ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS CONT 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M 12C22A3 1, Class 1I, 0.010 mm or thicker to match existing frames. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Install high performance interlocking sill flashing with end dams at all vertical terminations. E. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. F. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. G. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." r, J H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. END OF SECTION 08411 898-14A ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 5 SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: a. �iwmgmg doors. B. Related Sections: I. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for cabinet door hardware provided as part of architectural woodwork. 2. Division 8 Section "Steel .Doors and Frames" for door silencers provided as part of hollow -metal frames. 3. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the products listed below. Coordinating and scheduling the purchase and delivery of these products remain requirements of this Section. I. Butts, thresholds, weather stripping, and lock cylinders to be installed under other Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. C. Other Action Submittals: 1. Keying Schedule: Meet with Owner to establish keying requirements and coordination with existing building systems and electronic locking hardware. Prepare by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. 898-14A DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1 �z DOOR HARDWARE CONT 1 B. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and Texas Accessibility Standards. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf . 2. Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements: a. Interior, Non -Fire -Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch. C. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to Project site. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. a. Electromagnetic Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 898-14A DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 2 DOOR HARDWARE CONT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE ri A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled on Drawings to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named .manufacturers' products or products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named 1 products. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in "Door Hardware Schedule" . Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. 2.2 HINGES A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template -produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow -metal doors and hollow -metal frames. 2.3 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw. 2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw. 3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw. C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. D. Lock Trim: 1. Description: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Levers: Cast. 3. Escutcheons (Roses): Cast. 4. Operating Device: Lever with escutcheons (roses). E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. 1. Flat -Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recominended by manufacturer. 1 F. Bored Locks: BHMA Al56.2; Grade 1; Series 4000. Ll G. Push -Pull Latches: Bored, BHMA A156.2; Series 4000; Grade 1; with paddle handles that retract latchbolt; capable of being mounted vertically or horizontally. Ll 898-14A DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 3 DOOR HARDWARE CONT 2.4 SURFACE BOLTS A. Surface Bolts: BHMA Al56.16. 2.5 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS A. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch throw; designed for mortising into door edge. 2.6 AUTOMATIC AND SELF -LATCHING FLUSH BOLTS A. Automatic and Self -Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch throw; designed for mortising into door edge. 2.7 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3. 2.8 LOCK CYLINDERS 2.9 A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA Al56.5; Grade 1; permanent cores that are removable; face finished to match lockset. A. 2.10 A. KEYING Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference with Owner. 1. Master Key System: Change keys and a master key operate cylinders. 2. Existing System: a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. Keys: Nickel silver or Brass. 1. Quantity: provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS Coordinators: BHMA A156.3; consisting of active -leaf, hold -open lever and inactive -leaf release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon -coated strike plates; with built-in, adjustable safety release. Astragals: BHMA A156.22. SURFACE CLOSERS Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key -operated valves and forged -steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recominendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory -sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 898-14A DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 4 DOOR HARDWARE. CONT 2.12 CLOSER HOLDER RELEASE DEVICES ' A. Closer Holder Release Devices: BHMA A156.15; Grade 1; closer connected with separate or integral releasing and fire- or smoke -detecting devices. Door shall become self -closing on interruption of signal ---- to release device. Automatic release is activated by smoke detection system or loss of power. 2.13 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Wall- and Floor -Mounted Stops: BHMA Al56.16; base metal. 2.14 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A1.56.8. 2.15 THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds: BHMAA156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated. 2.16 FABRICATION A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA Al56.18. B. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 3. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 2.17 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire -rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. 898-14A DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 5 DOOR HARDWARE CONT B. Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.S "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors." 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores at substantial completion. E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." F. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. G. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 898-14A DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 6 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 3. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Reference "Hardware Schedule" in the Construction Documents. END OF SECTION 08710 898-14A DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 7 4; SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL -, l.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS T A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Windows. 2. Storefront framing. 3. Spandrel Panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Interspace: Space between. liter of an insulating -glass unit. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches square. 1. Tinted glass. 2. Spandrel panel. C. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer. D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. 898-14A GLAZING 08800 - 1 l__ s GLAZING, CONT C. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." D. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated or required by code, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. E. Insulating -Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least oneM1' component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. ' 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with insulating -glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside t l limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated -Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated -glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from norinal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating -glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 898-14A GLAZING 08800 - 2 i_ GLAZING, CONT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 1/4 inch (6.Omm). 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project. B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat -treated float glass, or Kind FT heat -treated float glass. Where heat -strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat - treated float glass or Kind FT heat -treated float glass. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat -treated float glass. C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic -glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness indicated. 2. For insulating -glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 3. U-Factors: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 4. Solar Heat -Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 5. Visible Reflectance: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite. b. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite. C. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire. B. Heat -Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. C. 1. 2. 1 For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass). Reflective -Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1376, Kind CS; coated by pyrolytic process, and complying with other requirements specified. Basis of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide: Pilkington Eclispe Advantage' Grey Tint Reflective Low-E #2 or comparable product, pre -approved by the Architect prior to bid, by one of the following: a. Guardian Industries. b. PPG Industries. 898-14A GLAZING 08800 - 3 GLAZING, CONT 2.3 2.4 2.5 A. 2. Coating Color: Silver. Solar reflective on number 2 surface. 3. Glass: Tinted float. 4. Tint Color: Grey. 5. Visible Light Transmittance: 50 percent minimum. 6. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 10 percent maximum. INSULATING GLASS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Pilkington Glass 2. Guardian Industries 3. PPG Industries 4. Old Castle Glass. B. Insulating -Glass Unit` dehydrated interspace, specified. Factory -assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements 1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. C. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating -Glass Types" Article. GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: 1. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 2. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115. B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed -cell, integral -skinned EPDM, silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure -glazing stops on opposite side of glazing. C. Lock -Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock -strips, complying with ASTM C 542. GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl -based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 898-14A GLAZING 08800 - 4 GLAZING CONT 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open -cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire -Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire -protection rating indicated. 2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat -grind vertical edges of butt -glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. 2.8 MONOLITHIC -GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type A: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: 1/4" (6.0 mm). 2. Provide safety glazing labeling. B. Glass Type B: Pyrolytic-coated, tinted fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: 1/4" (6.0 mm). 2. Provide safety glazing labeling. C. Glass Type C: Reflective -coated spandrel fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: 1/4" (6.0 mm). 2.9 INSULATING -GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type D1: Reflective -coated, tinted insulating glass. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: I inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 1/4" (6.0 mm). 898-14A GLAZING 08800 - 5 GLAZING, CONT 3. Outdoor Lite: Tinted heat -strengthened float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Argon 5. Indoor Lite: Clear float glass. 6. Coating Location: Second surface. 7. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.30 maximum. 8. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.30 maximum. 9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.29 maximum. B. Glass Type D2: Reflective -coated, tinted laminate spandrel glass with two plies of heat strengthened float glass with inner ply Class 1 (clear) 1. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 1/4" (6.0 mm). 2. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.30 maximum. 3. Sumner Daytime U-Factor: 0.30 maximum. 4. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.66 maximum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass -framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass iimnediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. 898-14A GLAZING 08800 - 6 GLAZING, CONT D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. t E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. 898-14A GLAZING 08800 - 7 GLAZING, CONT i C. Installation with Pressure -Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure -glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 rl� 898-14A GLAZING 08800 - 8 SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Texture finishes. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 9 Section "Painting" for joint treatment and texturing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper -faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 898-14A GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD CONT B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD _. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. National Gypsum Company. 5. Temple-Inland. 6. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. - 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. i 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Moisture- and Mold -Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold - resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10. 2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI Al 18.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: - a. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement BackerBoard. b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. C. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum -coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 898-14A GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 2 ;J GYPSUM BOARD CONT 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. C. LC -Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. i- g. Curved -Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. B. Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Hot -dip galvanized steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC -Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. C. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of assembly. E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. C. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 898-14A GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 3 GYPSUM BOARD CONT F. Thermal Insulation: Ass specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." p g PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow -metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc., except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load -bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide -dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. t� 898-14A GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 4 GYPSUM BOARD CONT J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound -flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: As indicated on Drawings and where required for fire -resistance -rated assembly. B. Single -Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile. B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings and according to ASTM C 840. C. Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non - drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. 898-14A GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 5 GYPSUM BOARD CONT C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09250 898-14A GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 6 SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE €n PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic tile. 2. Stone thresholds. 3. Crack isolation membrane. 4. Metal edge strips. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI Al08 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI Al37.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.113, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. For ceramic mosaic tile in color blend patterns, provide full sheets of each color blend. 2. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. 898-14A CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 1 CERAMIC TILE, CONT 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile from one source or producer. 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions._.) 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Ceramic tile(s) are based on a material allowance as scheduled in "Division 1 Section 01210 Allowances" and specified material indicated in Interior Finish Material Schedule. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI Al08.02, ANSI LJ standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in the installation schedules, and other requirements specified 11 898-14A CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 2 CERAMIC TILE CONT C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. D. Mounting: For factory -mounted tile, provide back- or edge -mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge -mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance. 2.2 THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface. B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. 1. Description: As selected from fiill range of manufacturer's samples. 2.3 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Fluid -Applied Membrane: Liquid -latex rubber or elastorneric polymer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company B 6000 Waterproof Membrane. b. Bostic, Inc.; Hydroment Gold. C. C-Cure; Pro -Red Waterproofing Membrane 63. d. Custom Building Products; Redgard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane. e. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latapoxy 24hr HydroProofrng. f MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic HPG g. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100 Crack Suppression and Waterproofing. 2.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected, from the following, that complies with ANSI Al18.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. 898-14A CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 3 CERAMIC TILE CONT B. Fabric -Reinforced, Fluid -Applied Membrane System consisting of liquid -latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and fabric reinforcement. } 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company; Elastiment 344 Reinforced Waterproofing and Anti- Fracture/Crack Suppression Membrane. b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company; B 6000 Waterproof Membrane with Glass Fabric. C. Bostik, Inc.; Hydroment Blacktop 90210. d. Custom Building Products; 9240 Waterproofing and Anti -Fracture Membrane. e. Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete Blue 92 Anti -Fracture Membrane. f. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic HPG with MAPEI Fiberglass Mesh. g. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; S-9000. 2.5 SETTING MATERIALS A. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI Al 18.4. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. C. C-Cure. d. Custom Building Products. e. . Jamo Inc. f. Laticrete International, Inc. g. MAPEI Corporation. h. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 2. Provide prepackaged, dry -mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI Al 18.4. 2.6 GROUT MATERIALS A. Polymer -Modified Tile Grout: ANSI Al 18.7. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. C. C-Cure. d. Custom Building Products. e. Laticrete International, Inc. £ MAPEI Corporation. g. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. h. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 898-14A CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 4 CERAMIC TILE CONT 2.8 A. 2. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate or acrylic additive, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile -setting materials for installations indicated. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; CeramaSeal Siloxane 220. b. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978. C. Custom Building Products; Grout Sealer. d. MAPEI Corporation; KER 003, Silicone Spray Sealer for Cementitious Tile Grout. e. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer. f TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; TA-256 Penetrating Silicone Grout Sealer. MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile -setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. l . 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin -set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI Al08.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 898-14A CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 5 w CERAMIC TILE, CONT i- 3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. 9; 5. Sandblast or acid etch existing concrete surfaces as required for adhesion of new tile material B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin -set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile -setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. D. Field -Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI Al08 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. Follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in pattern as shown unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniforin joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. t i' 898-14A CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 6 f CERAMIC TILE, CONT 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch. 2. Paver Tile: 1/4 inch. 3. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch. 4. Decorative Thin Wall Tile: 1/16 inch. F. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant -filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw -cut joints after installing files. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." H. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. 1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set). 2. Do not extend waterproofing or crack isolation membrane under thresholds set in dry -set portland cement or latex-portland cement mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds and adjoining tile set on waterproofing or crack isolation membrane with elastomeric sealant. I. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout -sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI Al08.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and hazes from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging. 898-14A CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 7 CERAMIC TILE CONT B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. 3.6 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Tile Installation F113: Thin -set mortar; TCA F113. a. Thin -Set Mortar for Cured -Bed Method: Latex-portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Sand-portland cement grout. B. Interior Wall Installations: Wood Studs or Furring: 1. Tile Installation W244: Thin -set mortar on Cementitious backer units or fiber cement underlayment; TCA W244. a. Tile Type: Reference materials allowance and Interior Finish Material Schedule. b. Thin -Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar C. Grout: Sand-portland cement grout. 3.7 SCHEDULE OF TILE FINISHES See drawings for patterns and extents. TOILETS Tile: Base: Substrate: Mortar: Grout: Remarks: END OF SECTION 09310 FLOOR Ceramic tile Concrete slab Dry Set (Factory sanded) Latex Portland Cement TCA 113 WALLS Ceramic Tile Coved Glazed Wall Cement Backer Board Dry Set Latex Portland Cement TCA W243 t 898-14A CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 8 �1 SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS r_ e PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete at ceilings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AC: Articulation Class. 1 j B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Modification Clips, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch- long Samples of each type, finish, and color. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each acoustical panel ceiling. D. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. 898-14A ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS CONT B. Before installingacoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture ' P P P content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its uitended use. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described. below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Hold -Down Clips: Equal to 1.0 percent of quantity installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795. B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Type I - Mineral Compositions Panels, Water felted with Factory -applied Paint Finish: 1. Armstrong, Fine Textured Dune, #1850 (non -directional) a. Color: White b. Edge Detail: Square Lay -in C. Size: 24" x 24" x 5/8" 898-14A ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -2 f f ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS CONT 2. Armstrong, Medium Texture Georgian High Washability, #793 (non -directional) a. Color: White b. Edge Detail: Square Lay -in C. Size: 24" x 48" x 5/8" 3. Armstrong, Fine Textured Dune, #1850 (non -directional) a. Color: White b. Edge Detail: Square Lay -in C. Size: 24" x 48" x 5/8" 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct -hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory -applied finish for type of system indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc -Coated, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch (10 gage) diameter wire. E. Hold -Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches o.c. on all cross tees. 1. At faceted ceilings provide two (2) hold-down clips on each side of each panel. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Wide -Face, Capped, Double -Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold -rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt -edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel cold -rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white. 898-14A ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 3 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS CONT 2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation 3, USG Interiors, Inc. B. Roll -Formed, Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. A. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bend edge molding at faceted ceilings to match angle of ceiling where it contacts the wall. ACOUSTICAL SEALANT Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro -Series SC-175 Rubber Base Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corporation; BA-98. C. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic -rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. i� 898-14A ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 4 ' ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS CONT 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to muss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast - in -place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power -actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attaclunent of hanger wires. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. 898-14A 1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 5 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS CONT E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. For square -edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 2. For reveal -edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 4. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, at faceted ceilings, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire -resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09511 898-14A ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 6 SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rubber floor tile. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated. C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation indicated. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. 898-14A RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 1 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE. CONT C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket -weave pattern). i D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion joint covers, and similar .t items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to AV cover perimeters. III G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 09651 898-14A RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 4 ' SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient products installed. 898-14A RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 1 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES CONT PART2-PRODUCTS t_ 2.1 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. C. Johnsonite. d. Roppe Corporation, USA. B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Style: Cove (base with toe). C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. D. Height: 4 inches or 6 inches. E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length. �J F. Outside Corners: Preformed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed. H. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 1. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. - 2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY IA A. Resilient Molding Accessory: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. : b. Flexco, Inc. C. Johnsonite. [r d. R.C.A. Rubber Company (The). e. Roppe Corporation, USA. f VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division. B. Description: Carpet edge for glue -down applications. Nosing for carpet. Transition strips. C. Material: Vinyl. j a- D. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated. ! '' 898-14A RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 2 {. t RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES CONT E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 898-14A RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 3 _m RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES CONT V i F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed outside corners before installing straight pieces. H. Job -Formed Corners: 1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09653 898-14A RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 4 It SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1-GENERAL .: 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Carpet selection as selected from allowance or scheduled on the drawings. B. Related Requirements: _ 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II or Master II certification level. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 1.04. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet and carpet cushion until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. C. Do not install carpet and carpet cushion over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. I. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, excess static discharge, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. 898-14A i CARPET 09680 - 1 CARPET, CONT B. Special Warranty for Carpet Cushion: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet cushion installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty includes consequent removal and replacement of carpet and accessories. 2. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual traffic, failure ? of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. l 3. Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or compression. 4. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Fi PART 2 - PRODUCTS k 2.1 CARPET A. Products: Provide carpet(s) and border(s) as selected under carpet allowance. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or recommended by carpet and carpet cushion manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew -resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet and carpet cushion manufacturers. Use adhesives with VOC content not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Seam Adhesive: Hot -melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. D. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with selected finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet cushion manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 898-14A CARPET 09680 - 2 CARPET, CONT ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks; holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet cushion manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. At carpet tile comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. At other carpets comply with CRI 104 and carpet and carpet cushion manufacturers' written installation instructions for the following: 1. Direct -Glue -Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue -Down Installation." 2. Double -Glue -Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 10, "Double -Glue -Down Installation." 3. Preapplied Adhesive Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11.4, "Pre -Applied Adhesive Systems (Peel and Stick)." 4. Install carpet tiles as recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer with releasable, pressure - sensitive adhesive. C. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. At carpet tile, maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. E. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. F. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open -bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Comply with carpet cushion manufacturer's written recommendations. 898-14A CARPET 09680 - 3 CARPET, CONT 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using corm-nercial machine with face -beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16 "Protecting Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet cushion and adhesive manufacturers. END OF SECTION 09680 898-14A CARPET 09680 - 4 SECTION 09910- PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exterior and interior surfaces including but not limited to the following: 1. Exposed interior items and surfaces: a. Walls. b. Ceilings C. Doors d. Frames. e. Wall and ceiling registers and grills. 2. Exposed exterior items and surfaces: a. Doors and Frames b. Soffit. C. Lintels. d. Trim. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified under other Sections. B. Joint treatment, drywall tape, compound treatment and finish texture is part of the work of this section. C. Refer to drawings and schedules (e.g., Finish Schedule) for type, location and extent of interior repainting required, and include all touch-ups necessary to complete work shown, scheduled or specified. D. Paint exposed surfaces except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mentioned an item or surface, paint the item or the surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. E. Do not paint prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory -finished components: a. Architectural woodwork and casework. b. Toilet enclosures. C. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. d. Light fixtures. e. Distribution cabinets f. Prefinished Metal Panels. g. Acoustical ceilings. h. Hardware. 898-14A PAINTING 09910 - 1 PAINTING, CONT 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or g Y ceilings in the followinggenerally inaccessible areas: a. Furred areas. b. Ceiling plenums. C. Utility tunnels. d. Pipe spaces. e. Duct shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces includes the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. C. Chromium plate. d. Copper. e. Bronze and brass. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Motor and fan shafts. C. Linkages. d. Fire sprinkler heads. e. Sensing devices. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriter's Laboratories, (UL) Factory Mutual (FM), or other code -required labels or equipment naive, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. F. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Asphalt Paving" for traffic -marking paint. 2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Paving" for traffic -marking paint. 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. 4. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming interior architectural woodwork. 5. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames. 6. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for surface preparation for gypsum board. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85 degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60 degree meter. 3. Satin refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60 degree meter. 4. Semi -gloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60 degree meter. 5. Full gloss refers to high -sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60 degree meter. 898-14A PAINTING 09910 - 2 PAINTING CONT 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint and joint treatment system specified. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: Provide and inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. B. Samples for finish texture selection shall be submitted on 24-inch square sample of the specified bases material. Textured sample is to be finished with all specified coating applied to represent a finished wall. C. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish -coat material indicated. 1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips or schedule listing manufacturer's number for surfaces to be coated. D. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, at jobsite. 1. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Painted Wood: Provide two 12 inch square samples of each color and material on hardboard. b. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4 by 8 inch samples of natural or stained -wood finish on actual wood surfaces. C. Wall Textures: Provide 24-inch square sample of wall texture on gypsum board with paint finish as scheduled. d. Ceiling Textures: Provide 24-inch square sample of ceiling texture on gypsum board with paint when scheduled. E. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the job. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory -sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. 1. Furnish the Owner with extra paint materials for each applied color in the quantities indicated below: a. Label each container with manufacturer's and local supplier's paint color and paint code. 2. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gallon or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. 898-14A PAINTING 09910 - 3 PAINTING, CONT 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. Clean-up requirements. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well- ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. 2. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 3. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. C. Where toxic and/or volatile / explosive / flammable materials are being used, provide adequate fireproof storage lockers and take all necessary precautions and post adequate warnings (e.g. no smoking) as required. D. Take all necessary precautionary and safety measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion and to protect the environment from hazard spills. Materials that constitute a fire hazard (paints, solvents, drop clothes, etc.) shall be stored in suitable closed and rated containers and removed from the site on a daily basis. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints and joint treatment only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted or treated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F and 90 deg F. B. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces nor during sandstorms. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. 898-14A PAINTING 09910 - 4 E PAINTING, CONT C. Cold Weather Protection: When ambient outdoor temperatures are below 55 degrees F maintain continuous, uniform building temperature of not less that 55 degrees F for a minimum of 48 hours prior to, during and following painting and joint treatment. D. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for drying joint treatment material immediately after its application. Prevent too rapid drying during hot weather. E. Perform no painting work unless a minimum lighting level of 323 Lux (30 foot candles) is provided on surfaces to be painted. Adequate lighting facilities shall be provided by the General Contractor. F. Apply paint only to dry, clean, and adequately prepared surfaces in areas where dust is no longer generated by construction activities such that airborne particles will not affect the quality of finished surfaces. 1.9 SCHEDULING A. Schedule interior repainting operations to prevent disruption of and by other trades when applicable. B. Schedule interior repainting operations to prevent disruption of occupants in and about the building. Obtain written authorization from Consultant / Owner for changes in work schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in the paint schedules. B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses: 1. Benjamin Moore and Co., (Moore). 2. The Glidden Company (Glidden). 3. Kelly Moor Paint (K-M) 4. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG). 5. Pratt and Lambert (P & L). 6. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of 898-14A PAINTING 09910 - 5 PAINTING, CONT equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect. 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials complying with ASTM C 475, ASTM C 840, and recommendations of manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint treatment materials for the application indicated. B. Joint Tape: Reinforcing tape compatible with substraight , unless otherwise indicated. C. Setting -Type Joint Compounds: Factory -prepackaged, job-inixed, chemical -hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. 1. Where setting -type joint compounds are indicated for use as taping and taping compounds, use formulation for each which develops greatest bond strength and crack resistance and is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it. 2. For prefilling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for this purpose. 3. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing board behind base for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for this purpose. D. Drying -Type Joint Compounds: Factory -prepackaged vinyl -based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1. Ready -Mix Formulation: Factory -premixed product. 2. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and flanges of corner beads and edge trim. 3. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third coats. 4. All-purpose compound formulated for use as both taping and topping compound. 2.4 TEXTURE FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Of type recommended by manufacturer of texture finish. B. Aggregate Finish for Walls and Ceilings: Match Architect's sample. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions with the Applicator present, under which joint work and painting will be performed for compliance with preparation, paint and finish application requirements and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of joint work and painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. 898-14A PAINTING 09910 - 6 1-- PAINTING, CONT B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMi1): 12 percent. I - 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Prior to application of finish coating verify the following: 1. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. 2. Spray -Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry. 3. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. 1. Prior to application, notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface -applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. 1. Cover and protect existing landscaping and windows from painting debris and splatter or overspray. Protect roofing from over -spray. 2. Employ measures to protect the Owner's personnel property at all times. 3. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. 4. See Division 4 for masonry restoration and cleaning required prior to painting. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or surface treatments, clean the substrates that could impair the bond of various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning... 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Notify Architect in writing of problems anticipated with using the specified finish -coat material with substrates primed by others. 898-14A PAINTING 09910 7 PAINTING, CONT D. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and surfaces to be painted, Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. 1. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. 2. All plaster surfaces should be tested for moisture content before painting. If the moisture meter test indicates a content of less than eight percent moisture, regular wall primer -sealer may be safely used. If the content is more than eight percent, but not over 12 percent, an alkali -resistant primer -sealer should be used. If the content is over 12 percent, painting should not be done. When it is necessary to use alkali -resistant primer, provide Speedhide Alkali -Resistant Primer, 6-3. Where alkali or dampness is not a problem, provide Speedhide Wall Primer Sealer, 6-1 or 6-2 (17-10). Before painting new plaster, always remove the water soluble surface salt deposits by dry brushing. 3. Use Alkali -Resistant Primer, 6-3 as a prime coat over skim coat or hard coat plaster. 4. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, and rinse; allow to dry and vacuum before painting. E. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. 1. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before application of primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, doors, and paneling. 4. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. 5. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. 6. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. F. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recominendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council. (SSPC). 1. Clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning " or SSPC-SP3, "Power Tool Cleaning". 2. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. 3. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. G. Shop -Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -primed surfaces. 898-14A PAINTING 09910 - 8 PAINTING, CONT H. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non- petroleum -based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. J. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of --F the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 TEXTURE FINISH APPLICATION A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. 1. Wall Texture Finish: To match existing facility wall surface. 2. Ceiling Texture Finish: To match existing facility ceiling surface. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture -finish manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.4 PAINTING APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPl Manual". 1. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 2. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in "Schedules." 3. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 4. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 898-14A PAINTING 09910 - 9 PAINTING CONT 8. Paint front and backsides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed ' adjacent surfaces. 9. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. 10. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field -finished casework to match exterior. 11. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with the manufacturers directions. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop -primed and touch up painted. 3. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, weld, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. C. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. D. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 4. Spray Equipment (Multi -color Painting): Conventional air or HVLP Turbine Equipment only. 5. No airless spray, siphon or gravity type equipment. E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Do not paint over name plates or instruction labels. G. Block Filler: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. H. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. I. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. 898-14A PAINTING 09910 - 10 PAINTING, CONT J. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass -smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. Provide satin fmish for final coats. K. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, bands, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. 3.5 FINISHING OF DRYWALL A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints penetrations; fastener heads, surfaces defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. B. Prefill. open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using setting -type joint compound. C. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are indicated. D. Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following joint compounds in 3 coats (not including prefill of openings in base), and sand between coats and after last coat: 1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready -mix setting -type all-purpose or taping compound. 2. Full (Second) Coat: Ready -mix setting -type all-purpose or topping compound. 3. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready -mix setting -type all purpose or topping compound. E. Partial Finishing: Omit third coat and sanding on concealed drywall construction which is indicated for drywall finishing or which requires finishing to achieve fire -resistance rating, sound rating or to act as air or smoke barrier. 3.6 APPLICATION OF TEXTURE FINISH A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and prime drywall and other surfaces in strict accordance with texture finish manufacturer's instructions. Apply'Sheet Rock' First Coat primer to all surfaces to achieve texture finish. B. Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to drywall and other surfaces indicated to receive finish in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to produce a uniform texture matching Architect's sample without starved spots or other evidence of thin application, and free of application patterns and lines. C. Remove any texture droppings or overspray from door frames, windows, light fixtures, equipment, electrical boxes and other adjoining construction. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 898-14A PAINTING 09910 - 11 PAINTING, CONT. i C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. F'11 D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. F 898-14A PAINTING 09910 - 12 PAINTING, CONT. PAINT SCHEDULE INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEM (Sherwin Williams) Interior Masonry or Concrete Soffits: After masonry cleaning has been completed per manufacturer's instructions. FLAT Primer Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer, A24W8300 l't Coat ProMar 400 Zero VOC Interior Flat, B30W4600 2nd Coat ProMar 400 Aero VOC Interior Flat, B30W4600 } Interior Concrete Masonry Units SEMI -GLOSS Primer PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 1" Coat ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi -Gloss, B31 W2651 2nd Coat ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi -Gloss, B31 W2651 Woodwork, Trim, Doors and Door Frames (Opaque) SEMI -GLOSS Primer ProMar 200 Zero VOC Primer, B28W2600 1" Coat Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Semi -Gloss, B66-650 2na Coat Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Semi -Gloss, B66-650 Woodwork, Trim, Doors and Door Frames (Transparent) STAINED Stain Wood Classics .' 2nd Coat Wood Classics WB Polyurethane A68 Yd Coat Wood Classics WB Polyurethane, A68 Gypsum Drywall Systems ENAMEL Pruner ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W2600 1" Coat ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi -Gloss, B31 W2651 2nd Coat ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi -Gloss, B31W2651 Ferrous Metal: Doors, Frames and Miscellaneous Metals SEMI -GLOSS Pruner Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 1" Coat Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Semi -Gloss, B66-650 2°d Coat Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Semi -Gloss, B66-650 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEM (SherwinWilliams) Concrete or Masonry: After masonry cleaning has been completed per manufacturer's instructions. FLAT Primer Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer, A24W8300 I' Coat Loxon XP High Build Coating, A24W400 2nd Coat Loxon XP High Build Coating, A24W400 Plaster and Stucco Soffits: After masonry cleaning has been completed per manufacturer's instructions. FLAT Primer Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer, A24W8300 l't Coat Sherlastic Elastomeric Coating, A5-800 2nd Coat Sherlastic Elastomeric Coating, A5-800 Wood Trim SATIN Primer Exterior Latex Wood Primer, B42W8041 1" Coat A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82 2nd Coat A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82 898-14A PAINTING 09910 - 13 PAINTING. CONT. Galvanized and Aluminum Metal SEMI -GLOSS Primer Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer, B66-310 1" Coat Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Semi -Gloss, B66 2°d Coat Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Semi -Gloss, B66 Ferrous Metal SEMI -GLOSS Primer Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer, B66-310 I" Coat Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Semi -Gloss, B66 2°d Coat Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Semi -Gloss, B66 END OF SECTION 09910 898-14A PAINTING 09910 - 14 SECTION 09960 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates: 1. Exterior Substrates: a. Face Brick. b. Stacked Stone 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F and not greater than 100 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 40 and 90 deg F. B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist. 897-14A HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 - 1 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS CONT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Artisan Prosoco Sure Klean Blok-Guard & Graffiti Control or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Kelly -Moore Paints. 3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each coating Y P system that are compatible with one another and ' substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated. 3. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. B. Colors: Clear. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: a. Masonry (Clay, Brick and CMU): 12 percent. B. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be sealed. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and sealing. 1. After completing sealing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection. �s 898-14A HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 - 2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS CONT C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Clean surfaces using appropriate and compatible cleaners, as recommended by manufacturer for substrate. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or if alkalinity of mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Clean surfaces using appropriate and compatible cleaners, as recommmended by manufacturer for substrate. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Protect treated surfaces from rain for 4-6 hours, minimum 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. END OF SECTION 09960 898-14A HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 - 3 SECTION 09972 — CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY i A. Section Includes: 1 1. Surface Refinishing of a. Tile b. Vertical and Horizontal Concrete Block 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Surface Refinishing: the restoration of an existing or created vertical or horizontal surfaces, consisting of porcelain, tile, fiberglass, cultured marble, laminate, acrylic, terrazzo or concrete block, to like new. May also be referred to as surface restoration or re -glazing. B. Step 1 & Step 2 Cleaners: Cleaners used to create an ideal neutral PH on the existing surface to ensure a bond between the old and newly applied surface. C. Bonding Agent: Non-acid bonding agent used to assure adhesion of the coatings to the original surface. D. Clear coat: An application of an abrasive, water and chemical resistant urethane to create a watertight seal over the color finish. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For exposed finish surface. C. Maintenance Data: For finished to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Company to have proven track record and substantiated performance from previous projects that have used their refinishing process and must present references from said institutions upon request. 2. All refinishing of porcelain, tile, and vertical concrete block to utilize a surface refinishing process that creates a membrane over the surface and penetrates porous surfaces to bind all components together. 3. Do no use hydrofluoric acids to etch the surface and potentially expose contaminants to the air. 4. Installer and technicians to have complete a certified training and safety program. 5. Provide the Architect with choices of colors, finishes, and textures upon request. B. Source Limitations: 1. Obtain all resurfacing materials through one source from a single manufacturer. j 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS s A. Material Compatibility: Provide materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, based on testing and field experiences. s 898-14A CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS 09972 - 1 l �_1 CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS CONT g1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of resurfacing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Cleaners 2. Bonding Agent 3. Sealers 4. Primers 5. Finish 6. Clear Coat 2.2 CLEANER A. Surface must be thoroughly cleaned using manufacturer's recommended process to physically and chemically remove soap film, scale, mineral deposits, body oil, grease, and organic compounds. Cleaning process must create a neutral PH surface, per manufactuerer's requirements, which is critical to bonding process. 2.3 BONDING AGENT A. A bonding agent specifically engineered to work on "glass" surface, such as ceramic tile and porcelain is required. The bonding agent should have an epoxy component that will ensure adhesion, or "bonding" on any hard surface, particularly "glass like" surfaces. Etching acids, such as hydrofluoric acid are not an acceptable substitute for a proven bonding agent. 1. Basis of Design Product: Miracle Method NM-40 898-14A CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS 09972 - 2 CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS CONT 2.4 SEALER A. A proprietary sealing epoxy that will cure underwater and that will provide a secure membrane required by manufacturer for application of primer. 1. Basis of Design Product: Mira -Seal® 2.5 PRIMERS A. A two component, fast dry, high build polyamide epoxy primer, tinted as required by manufacturer. Install to manufacturer's required wet and dry thickness. 1. Basis of Design Product: Miracle Method Primer® installed to 4-5 mil wet and 3.5 mil dry thickness. 2.6 FINISH A. Multicolor topcoat system containing modified polymer particles suspended within a modified Terpolymer water phase composite. 1. Basis of Design Product: Natural Accents® a. Product should be ready -to -spray using HVLP spray equipment. Adjustments to viscosity may be made with water, not to exceed 5% of total volume. 2.7 CLEAR COAT A. The required solvent -based, multi -component, satin finish urethane clear coat. Must meet the following requirements: 1. Rolled Steel Panel Test a. Gloss: 15 +/- 5 b. Flexibility: ''/a" Mand. Passes — no cracks C. Direct Impact: Pass 80 in. lbs. at mill dry film d. Reverse Impact: Pass 80 in. lbs. at mill dry film 2. Immersion Test a. 5% detergent 7 hours: No Effect PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Surface preparation: Concrete and glazed vertical block. 2. Field Conditions 3. Safety 898-14A CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS 09972 - 3 CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS CONT 3.2 SURFACE PREP AND APPLICATION A. Interior vertical concrete block and vertical glazed surfaces. 1. Do not start work on tile till all plumbing is completed and patches in tile are made at removed, relocated and new plumbing fixtures. 2. Remove or mask unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and devices. 3. Clean surfaces using a proven process to remove dirt, grease and any other contaminants that may prevent adhesion of coatings. 4. Mask all surfaces not to be refinished. 5. Remove and repair all loose and missing grout. 6. Remove and repair all cracked and damaged surfaces. 7. Set up exhaust fan, (minimum 2,000 cubic feet per minute) to vent odor out of area. 8. Treat all surfaces to be refinished with non-acid bonding agent to ensure adhesion. 9. Apply to or more coats of appropriately tinted epoxy primer to the bonded surface using a HVLP system to ensure even coats. 10. Allow proper time for primer coats to dry. 11. Apply two or more coats of finish to the primed surface using a HVLP system to ensure even coats. 12. Apply to or three coats of a clear acrylic to protect the cured finish surface using a HVLP system to ensure even coats. 13. Remove masking paper; replace louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels. Clean jobsite. 14. Return to service in 24-hours. 3.3 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the coatings' manufacturer. Minimum 60 degrees for interiors. B. Follow Manufacturer's recommended procedure for producing best results, i.e. masking, cleaning, ventilation, and use of bonding agent, repairs, primers and top coats. C. Must have adequate lighting levels of 80 foot candles measured mid -height at substrate surface and electricity in each unit. D. Water must be available in each unit. 3.4 SAFETY A. Manufacturer will conform to all safety guidelines and parameters required by the Architect and/or General Contractor and must provide MSDS sheets and a copy of its respiratory safety program as part of the project submittals. B. Technicians are required to wear gloves, safety goggles and use proper respirator equipment as outlined in their Safety manual during the refinishing process. C. Technicians may be required to adhere to additional safety standards as dictated by the General Contractor. END OF SECTION 09972 898-14A CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS 09972 - 4 TOILET COMPARTMENTS CONT H. Phenolic -Panel Finish: 1. Facing Sheet Finish: One color and pattern in each room. µ 2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, with manufacturer's standard through -color core matching face sheet. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Clear -anodized aluminum. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or partially open position. a. All accessible doors to swing to closed position. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface -mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper, sized to prevent in -swinging door from hitting compartment -mounted accessories. 5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber -tipped bumper at out -swinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out -swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded -aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome -plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft -resistant -type heads. Provide sex - type bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot -dip galvanized steel, or other rust -resistant, protective -coated steel. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Overhead -Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. B. Urinal -Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment at bottoms of posts. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at posts to conceal anchorage. C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, provide 24-inch- wide, in -swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide, doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. 898-14A TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 3 : ;r- TOILET COMPARTMENTS CONT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Units to be installed rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. e 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1/2 inch. 2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full length continuous brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. B. Overhead -Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 10155 898-14A �TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 4 SECTION 10350 - FLAGPOLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes ground -mounted flagpoles made from aluminum. B. Owner -Furnished Material: Flag[s]. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 3 Section "Miscellaneous Cast -in -Place Concrete" for concrete work at ground -mounted flagpoles. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to the following design criteria: 1. Wind Loads: 11.0 mph, Exposure C according to NAAMM FP 1001, "Guide Specifications for Design of Metal Flagpoles". 2. Base flagpole design on polyester flags of maximum standard size suitable for use with flagpole or flag size indicated, whichever is more stringent. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.5 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operating characteristics, fittings, accessories, and finishes for flagpoles. B. Shop Drawings: For flagpoles. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show general arrangement, jointing, fittings, accessories, grounding, anchoring, and support. 1. Include section, and details of foundation system for ground -mounted flagpoles. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flagpoles to include in operation and maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flagpole as complete unit, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices, from single source from single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other protective container. tl �f 898-14A FLAGPOLES 10350 - 1 FLAGPOLES CONT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Products: Provide "Continental" by Corncord Idustries, Inc. or a comparable prouct by one of the following: 1. American Flagpole; a Kearney -National Inc. company. 2. Concord Industries, Inc. 3. Eder Flag Manufacturing Company, Inc. 4. Ewing Flagpoles. 5. U.S. Flag & Flagpole Supply, LP. 6. USS Manufacturing Inc. 2.2 FLAGPOLES A. Flagpole Construction, General: Construct flagpoles in one piece if possible. If more than one piece is necessary, comply with the following: 1. Fabricate shop and field joints without using fasteners, screw collars, or lead calking. 2. Provide flush hairline joints using self -aligning, snug -fitting, internal sleeves. B. Exposed Height: 30 feet. C. Aluminum Flagpoles: Provide cone -tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241/B 241M, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch. D. Metal Foundation Tube: Manufacturer's standard corrugated -steel foundation tube, not less than 0.064- inch- nominal wall thickness. Provide with 3/16-inch steel bottom plate and support plate; 3/4-inch- diameter, steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges welded together. Galvanize steel after assembly. Provide loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation tube for plumbing pole. . l . Provide flashing collar of same material and finish as flagpole. E. Sleeve for Aluminum Flagpole: Fiberglass or PVC pipe foundation sleeve, made to fit flagpole, for casting into concrete foundation. ---. 1. Provide flashing collar of same material and finish as flagpole. 2.3 FITTINGS A. Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard flush -seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to match flagpole -butt diameter. 1. 0.063-inch spun aluminum with gold anodic finish. B. External Halyard: Ball -bearing, nonfouling, revolving truck assembly of cast metal with continuous 5/16- inch- diameter, braided polypropylene halyard and 9-inch cast -metal cleats with fasteners. Finish exposed metal surfaces to match flagpole. 1. Provide one halyard and one cleat at each flagpole. 2. Provide cast -metal cleat covers, finished to match flagpole, secured with cylinder locks. 3. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide two stainless -steel swivel snap hooks per halyard. x a. Provide with neoprene or vinyl covers. 898-14A FLAGPOLES 10350 - 2 FLAGPOLES CONT 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Drainage Material: Crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; coarse aggregate. B. Sand: ASTM C 33, fine aggregate. C. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Multicomponent nonsag urethane or Single -component nonsag urethane joint sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for Use NT (nontraffic) and for Use M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, for Use O. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Natural Satin Finish: AA-M32, fine, directional, medium satin polish; buff complying with AA-M20; seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard -coat wax. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Notify `dig test' and verify location of any buried utilities prior to start of work. B. Prepare uncoated metal flagpoles that are set in foundation tubes by painting below -grade portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. C. Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. Place and compact drainage material at excavation bottom. D. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of flagpole base at grade. Secure and brace forms to prevent displacement during concreting. E. Place concrete, as specified in Division 3 Section "Miscellaneous Cast -in -Place Concrete". Compact concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist -cure exposed concrete for not less than seven days or use nonstaining curing compound. F. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter of concrete base. 3.2 A. FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION General: Install flagpoles where shown and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. i� 898-14A FLAGPOLES 10350 - 3 FLAGPOLES. CONT B. Ground Set: Place foundation tube, or sleeve, center, and brace to prevent displacement during concreting. Place concrete. Plumb and level foundation tube or sleeve and allow concrete to cure. Install flagpole, plumb, in foundation tube or sleeve. 1. Foundation Tube: Place tube seated on bottom plate between steel centering wedges and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2-inch layer of elastomeric joint sealant and cover with flashing collar. END OF SECTION 10350 898-14A FLAGPOLES 10350 -_ 4 SECTION 10440 — SPECIALTY SIGNS PART 1 - GENERAL `.., t 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of specialty signs is shown on drawings. 1. Provide signage at accessible toilets. B. Forms of specialty signs required include the following: 1. Interior panel signs adhesive and mechanically attached. 2. Metal pole mounted sign at parking. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compliance: Signage to meet requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act, Texas Accessibility Standards and the American National Standards Institute Al 17.1 standards. B. Signs which designate permanent rooms and spaces, shall have raised letters and numerals 1/32" from the surface of the sign in upper case, sans serif or simple serif, and be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Raised characters shall be between 5/8" and 2" high. C. Braille dots to comply with Specification #800 National Library Service, National Library of Congress specifications for standard literary Braille. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Drawings are based on: 1. `Braille — Tac" P101 (Men), P 102 (Women) and P 119 (Unisex) Interior Signage. 2. "Best Manufacturing Sign Systems" Traffic Signage. B. Injected Molded Plastic: High impact polystyrene. C. Fasteners: Use mechanical concealed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated, which are fabricated from metals which are non -corrosive to either sign materials or mounting surface. D. Anchors and Inserts: Use non-ferrous metal or hot -dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. Furnish toggle bolt at each interior drywall construction. r, E 898-14A SPECIALTY SIGNS 10440 - 1 t_ SPECIALTY SIGNS CONT E. Post: 2" diameter galvanized pipe, with cap. 2.2 FABRICATION OF PANEL SIGNS A. Fabricate panel signs to comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes and details of construction. B. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16" measured diagonally from corner to corner. C. Unframed Interior Panel Signs: Fabricate unframed panel signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to conform with the following requirements: 1. Size: 6" x 8". 2. Thickness: .125 inches for injected molded signs. 3. Edge Condition: Square cut. 4. Corner Condition: Rounded to 1/2" radius. D. Typical Signage size or copy size may vary from sizes stated to accoirnnodate excessive or large copy as scheduled at no additional cost. 1. Provide stock pictograms and copy signs at toilets. a. Typestyle: - Optima Bold. b. Pictograms: - P 101 (Men/Figure/Access) at the Meds toilet. - P 102 (Women/Figure/Access) at the Women`s toilet. E. Unframed Exterior Post Signs: Fabricate using flat aluminum sheets with baked enamel finish with screen printed copy. Provide international symbols as indicated on drawings. 1. Size: 12" x 18". 2. Thickness:.005. 3. Corner Condition: Rounded to 1/2" radius. F. Sign size or copy may vary provided overall product meets compliance requirements. G. See plans for typical copy. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Locate sign units and accessories where shown or scheduled, using mounting methods of type described and in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Verify mounting locations of all signs before installation and install to meet ADA-AG and TAS mounting heights and locations. All room signage must be mounted beside the door. Addition signage may be mounted on the door. B. Install sign units level, plumb and at height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects of appearance. 898-14A SPECIALTY SIGNS 10440 - 2 SPECIALTY SIGNS CONT 3.2 PANEL SIGNS A. Post Mounted Signs: Install post as indicated on the drawing with coupling installed at grade. Set post in concrete footing as noted. Install sign to post using non -corrosive through -bolt fasteners extending through both faces of the mounting pipe. END OF SECTION 10440 898-14A SPECIALTY SIGNS 10440 - 3 SECTION 10521 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire extinguishers: a. Hand -carried. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets, fire extinguishers, and mounting brackets. 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing -in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated. C. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. D. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets and fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, raring, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. 898-14A FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10521 - 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS CONT 1.6 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace Ere extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M., Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. B. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear). 2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings and Larsen's standard bracket, both with Larsen MPS extinguisher or comparable product by one of the following: a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group. b. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc. C. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc.. B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. 1. Shelf•. Same metal and finish as cabinet. D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation. 1. Square -Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth. E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door. F. Door Material: Steel sheet. G. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame. 898-14A FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10521 - 2 J FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS CONT H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear). 1. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door -operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard. 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees. J. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked -enamel finish. 2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 1) Location: Applied to location indicated on Drawings. 2) Application Process: Silk-screened, Etched. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical. 3. Larsen's Loc or equivalent. K. Finishes: 1. Manufacturer's standard baked -enamel paint for the following: a. Exterior of cabinet, door, and trim except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. b. Interior of cabinet and door. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory -drilled mounting holes. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow -metal design, 1niniinum 1/2 inch thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 898-14A FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10521 - 3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS CONT 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS 1� A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for r recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.5 STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC- SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling". After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. B. Factory Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. C. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two -coat, baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.6 PORTABLE, HAND -CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet indicated. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsen #CD5 or comparable product by one of the following: a. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. C. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. d. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products. 2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. B. Multipurpose Dry -Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 1-A:10-B:C, 2.5-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate -based dry chemical in enameled -steel container. 2.7 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or black.. baked -enamel finish. L 898-14A FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10521 - 4 l FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS CONT B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket -mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Vertical. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed. B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire protection cabinets fire extinguishers in locations and at mounting heights indicated 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet. 2. Mounting Brackets: 42 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. 3. In no case shall the top of the fire extinguisher lever control be greater than 48" above finish floor. B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire protection cabinets. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb. C. Identification: Apply decals or vinyl lettering at locations indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. 898-14A FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10521 - 5 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS CONT D. Touch u marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory -finished t o p e, p p y appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mountingbracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar ininor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 10521 898-14A FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10521 - 6 SECTION 10801 — TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. } 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent of each type of toilet accessory is indicated on drawings and schedules. B. Section Includes: 1. Public -use washroom accessories. C. Owner -Furnished, General Contractor Installed, Material: 1. Toilet Tissue Dispensers. 2. Paper Towel Dispensers. 3. Waste Receptacles. 4. Soap Dispensers. 5. Sanitary -Napkin Disposal Units. D. General Contractor Furnished Material 1. Grab Bars 2. Mirror units ` 3. Toilet Partitions €€ E. Some type of toilet accessories are included as part of Section "Toilet Compartments" 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. ` 3. Material and Finish Descriptions. �. 4. Features that will be included for Project. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings. 898-14A TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -1 v: TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES, CONT 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect. t- 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Bathroom Accessories, Inc. 3. American Specialties, Inc. 4. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 5. Bradley Corporation. 6. Continental Mfg. Co. 7. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO) 2.2 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch (22 gage) minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: ASTM B 19 flat products; ASTM B 1.6, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings. C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359-inch (20 gage) minimum nominal thickness. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot -dip zinc coating. E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper -and -theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). 898-14A TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES, CONT 2.3 GRAB BARS A. Comply with American Disability Act - Accessibility Guidelines and the Texas Accessibility Standards. 1. Grab Bar: a. Basis -of -Design Product: GAMCO 150C-42 side bar; 150C-36 back bar. b. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. C. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. d. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish. e. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. f. Configuration and Length: Straight, 36 inches long at rear. Straight, 48 inches at side of water closet. 2.4 MIRROR UNIT A. Basis of Design Product: A.S.A. Model 0620, 18" x 36" 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion - resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of [six] keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 10801 898-14A TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 3 SECTION 12494 - ROLLER SHADES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes roller shades and motorized shade operators. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories. 2. Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for motor operators, controls, limit switches, and other powered devices and for system disconnect switches for motorized shade operation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions. 1. Motorized Shade Operators: Include operating instructions. 2. Motors: Show nameplate data, ratings, characteristics, and mounting arrangements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of roller shades. Include elevations, sections, details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings, attachments to other work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work. 1. Motorized Shade Operators: Show locations, shade schedule, and details for installing operator components, switches, and controls. Indicate room numbers, shade opening sizes, motor size, electrical characteristics, drive arrangement, mounting, and grounding provisions. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, connection details, system, and control wiring. 3. Head, jamb, and sill details, and mounting dimensions required for each product. C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Shade mounting assembly and attachment. 2. Size and location of access to shade operator, motor, and adjustable components. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of shade indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for Verification: 1. For the following products: i a. Shade Material: Not less than 12-inch- square section of fabric, from dye lot used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat. Mark top and face of material. J 898-14A ROLLER SHADES 12494 - 1 i �3 ROLLER SHADES CONT F. Product Certificates: For each type of roller shade, signed by product manufacturer. G. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining roller shades and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to fabrics, finishes, and performance. 3. Operating hardware. 4. Motorized shade operator. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades and all accessories through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. D. Product Standard: Provide roller shades complying with WCMA A 100.1. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule. B. Include installation, programming, and maintenance instructions. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 to 104 degrees F. 2. Humidity: 0 to 90 percent, non -condensing. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's 2 year parts and labor and 8 years limited parts warranty for defective equipment. B. Provide manufacturer's 10 year warranty providing for repair or replacement of defective equipment. 898-14A ROLLER SHADES 12494 - 2 ROLLER SHADES CONT - a 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Rollers Shades: Before installation begins, for each size, color, texture, and pattern indicated, full- size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROLLER SHADES A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Hunter Douglas, Inc.; Hunter Douglas Window Fashions Division. 2. Levolor; Levolor-Kirsch Window Fashions; a Newell Rubbermaid Company. 3. Lutron Shading Solutions by VIMCO. 4. Shade Techniques, Inc. 5. Verosol USA, Inc.; OEM Shades Inc. C. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings Sheet A2.1 or an approved product prior to bid. D. Shade Band Material: Sealed shade fabric or treated PVC -coated fabric edges. 1. Pattern: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Style: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range 4. Bottom Hem: Straight. 5. Trim: As indicated by manufacturer's designation for style and color. E. Rollers: Electrogalvanized or epoxy primed steel or extruded -aluminum tube of diameter and wall thickness required to support and fit internal components of operating system and the weight and width of shade band material without sagging; designed to be easily removable from support brackets; with adhesive strip or manufacturer's standard method for attaching shade material. Provide capacity for one roller shade band(s) per roller, unless otherwise indicated. F. Direction of Roll: Regular, from back of roller. G. Mounting Brackets: Fascia end caps, fabricated from steel finished to match fascia or headbox. H. Fascia: L-shaped, formed -steel sheet or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; continuous panel concealing front and bottom of shade roller, brackets, and operating hardware and operators; length as indicated on Drawings; removable design for access. I. Top/Back Cover: L-shaped; material and finish to match fascia; combining with fascia and end caps to form a six -sided headbox enclosure sized to fit shade roller and operating hardware inside. 898-14A ROLLER SHADES 12494 - 3 ROLLER SHADES CONT J. Bottom Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum, with plastic or metal capped ends. Provide concealed, by pocket of shade material, internal -type bottom bar with concealed weight bar as required for smooth, properly balanced shade operation. e: K. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings, mounting permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging roller shade or adjacent surfaces and finishes. L. Shade Operation: Motorized operator. 2.2 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION A. Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the roller, a flexible sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to the roller, a bottom bar, and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade. B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion -resistant -coated materials. 1. Lifting Mechanism: With permanently lubricated moving parts. C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window. Shade Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1/4 inch from face of jamb. Length equal to head to sill dimension of opening in which each shade is installed. D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting fascia, headbox, roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated. E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use. F. Color -Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. G. Colors of Metal and Plastic Components Exposed to View: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADE OPERATORS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Manufacturer of roller shade. B. General: Provide factory -assembled motorized shade operation systems designed for lifting shades of type, size, weight, construction, use, and operation frequency indicated. Provide operation systems of size and capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessories suitable for Project conditions and recommended by shade manufacturer, complete with electric motors and factory-prewired motor controls, remote -control stations, remote -control devices, power disconnect switches, enclosures protecting controls and all operating parts, and accessories required for reliable operation without malfunction. Include wiring from motor controls to motors. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with the building electrical system. 898-14A ROLLER SHADES 12494 - 4 ROLLER SHADES CONT C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. Control Equipment: Comply with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6 with NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V dc. E. Electric Motors: UL-approved or -recognized, totally enclosed, insulated motor, complying with NEMA MG 1, with thermal -overload protection, brake, permanently lubricated bearings, and limit switches; sized by shade manufacturer to start and operate size and weight of shade considering service factor or considering Project's service conditions without exceeding nameplate ratings. l . Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Motor Characteristics: Single phase, l 10 V, 60 Hz. 3. Motor Mounting: Within manufacturer's standard roller enclosure. F. Remote Controls: Electric controls with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure for recessed or flush mounting. Provide the following devices for remote -control activation of shades: 1. Group Control Stations: Maintained -contact, three -position, rocker -style, wall switch -operated control station with open, close, and center off functions for multiple -switch group control. a. Color: White. 2. Group Control Handheld Remote: Open/close handheld transmitter, three -position, rocker -style switch with open, close and center of functions for multiple -switch group control. a. Color: White G. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop shade at fully raised and fully lowered positions. H. Operating Function: Stop and hold shade at open, midpoint, and closed positions. I. Operating Features: Include the following: 1. Group switching with integrated switch control; single face plate for multiple switch cut-outs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate locations of connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance. 3.2 A. B. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 1 inch to interior face of glass. Connections: Connect motorized operators to building electrical system. ;t 898-14A ROLLER SHADES 12494 - 5 ; ' ROLLER SHADES CONT 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain roller shades. Refer to Division 1 Section Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 12494 898-14A ROLLER SHADES 12494 - b CONSULTANTS' PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY The specifications sections to be authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following: PART 1- DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16073 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16442 PANELBOARDS 16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS By: Michael T. Strahan, P.E. BSA Consulting Engineers, PLLC Texas Firm Registration #4415 License No. 84881 O F j4f��.(�, tT Abf MICHAEL T. STRAHAN Z . . 84881 't�j jW 898-FA DIVISION 16 TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 5 4 6 4 7 6 6 9 11 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Common electrical installation requirements. 3. Utility company requirements. 1.3 SUBM.ITTALS A. Submittal Data for Division 16 shall be submitted for review in one binder. There shall be a tab for each section of the specifications requiring submittal review. Submittals shall not be in folders and the sections requiring review shall not be submitted separately. Submittals received that are not formatted correctly will be returned without review. B. The engineer will review submittals twice as part of his obligation to the owner. If submittals have to be reviewed more than twice the contractor will be pay the engineer a $100 per hour for each additional review. Additional reviews will be performed upon receipt of charges but will not be released until the engineer has received a check from the contractor. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test Equipment Suitability and Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS, "Suitability of Test Equipment" and "Test Instrument Calibration." B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment: 1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. 2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. 3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast -in -place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. 898-14B I BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-1 b_ p DliJ1V DLDl. litll.tlL 1Vlti1 r,1t1t1.LJ ri1VL 1V1L' lIIVLJ, l.V1V 1. C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames." D. Coordinate electrical testing of electrical, mechanical, and architectural items, so equipment and systems that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate successful interoperability. E. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings for electrical supports, raceways, and cable with general construction work. F. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment that requires positioning before closing in the building. G. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies. 1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision for service entrances and electricity -metering components. 2. Verify extent of work required of the contractor by the power company. Include any required trenching, backfilling, conduit, conductors, concrete pads, etc. and all associated costs plus any other power company costs to the owner in the original bid. H. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames." I. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field -finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface. J. Verify extent and scope of all bid alternates with architectural. K. Contractor shall coordinate exact locations and distances to mechanical equipment and temperature control requirements with Mechanical Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 EQUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY'S ELECTRICITY METERING A. Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company for trenching, conduit, concrete pads, backfill etc. and include all related material and labor costs in original bid including any power company charges. 898-14A BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-1 ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall -mounting items. C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements. D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity. E. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. END OF SECTION 16050 898-14A BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment. B. Section includes grounding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications 1. Underground distribution grounding. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as -built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following: 1. Test wells. 2. Ground rods. 3. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment. C. A Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor. Field quality -control reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells based on NETA MTS. a. Tests shall determine if ground -resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not. b. Include recommended testing intervals. n I: QUALITY ASSURANCE Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on -site testing. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 898-14B GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONT. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned -copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. C. Bare Grounding Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles: 1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft -drawn copper. 2. Conductor Protector: Half -round PVC or wood molding; if wood, use pressure -treated fir, cypress, or cedar. D. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. 2.2 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic -welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. D. Bus -bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless exothermic -type wire terminals, and long -barrel, two -bolt connection to ground bus bar. 2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper -clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet in diameter. 898-14A GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 2 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONT. { 1` PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. B. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green -colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow. C. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down to specified height above floor; connect to horizontal bus. D. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Computer and Rack -Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch -circuit runs from equipment -area power panels and power -distribution units. C. Air -Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct - mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. D. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from 898-14A GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 3 r_. GROUNDING AND BONDING CONT. panelboard grounding terininals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. 2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one -rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. C. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures," and shall be at least 12 inches deep, with cover. 1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor. D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 2. Use exothermic -welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect -type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. 3.4 LABELING A. Comply with requirements in Divisionl6 Section "Electrical Identification" Article for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green. B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at the grounding electrode conductor where exposed. 1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notify the facility manager." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been l., energized, test for compliance with requirements. 898-14A GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 4 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONT. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground -resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells , and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall -of -potential method according to IEEE 81. 4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground -rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 oluns. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s). F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 16060 898-14A GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 5` SECTION 16073 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. 1.5 SUBMITTALS t A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports. 898-14B HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1 b073-1 r1tiUN%_ x%.0 t11V11 0UFF%J1\ 1 J r kjx%\ 1;Ll;1iI D-R-tiL J I a I rly1J %-kin 1 C. Welding certificates. E, 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory -fabricated components for field assembly. I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. C. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Metallic Coatings: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory -fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non -armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their i supports to building surfaces include the following: 898-14A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16073 - 2 1. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. r 2. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type, zinc -coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. �- a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. -- 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable -iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural -steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two -bolt conduit clamps. D. Spring -steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2- inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 898-14A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16073 - 3 r1t11VVL'1%.J L11VJJ JVrL V1\1J i'VA L'LL'1i11L1Vt1L o l o1L'Iylo lJV1V 1. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION 3 t A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. , B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface -Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder -actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard -weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight -aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on. slotted -channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic - restraint strength and anchorage requirements. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site -fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 PAINTING A. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing - repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 16073 898-14A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16073 - 4 t, I— SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION .. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground -line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products. C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive -attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. 1.5 COORDINATION ` A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. 898-14B ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075-1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION CONT. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. ., D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size. B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type. C. Snap -Around, Color -Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid -colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. 2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. B. Snap -Around, Color -Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid -colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. 2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Snap -Around, Color -Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid -colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. 2.4 FLOOR MARKING TAPE A. 2-inch- wide, 5-mil pressure -sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay. 2.5 UNDERGROUND -LINE WARNING TAPE A. Tape: 1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. f 898-14A ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION CONT. B. Color and Printing: 1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red -Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE,. 3. Inscriptions for Orange -Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE,. C. Tag: Type I: 1. Pigmented polyolefin, bright -colored, continuous -printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct -burial service. 2. Thickness: 4 mils. 3. Weight: 18.5 lb/1000 sq. ft.. 4. 3-Inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 30 lbf, and 2500 psi. 2.6 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self -Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory -printed, multicolor, pressure -sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Baked -Enamel Warning Signs: 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches. D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA 1N FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 2.7 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/1.6 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. 2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Self -Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark -gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. 2.9 CABLE TIES A. General -Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. $ 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 898-14A ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 3 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION CONT. 4. Color: Black except where used for color -coding. B. Plenum -Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking. 1. Minimum Width 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F. 5. Color: Black. -' 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self -tapping, stainless -steel screws or stainless -steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F. System Identification Color -Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color -coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas. G. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. H. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV -stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated. I. Underground -Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground - line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. J. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application._ 898-14A ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION CONT. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Accessible Raceways, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals. B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. Power. C. Power -Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color -coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color -Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch -circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. C. Field -Applied, Color -Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half -lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. D. Power -Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and _ junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesive -backed phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation. E. Install instructional sign including the color -code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive -film -type labels. F. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write -on tags to conductors and list source. G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field -installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory -installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. H. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground -line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. Install underground -line warning tape for both direct -buried cables and cables in raceway. I. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush -mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. -• J. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels. 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. .4 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 898-14A ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 5 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION. CONT. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: �= . a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. K. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. L. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alann systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. C. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. C. Enclosed switches. d. Enclosed circuit breakers. e. Push-button stations. f. Contactors. END OF SECTION 16075 898-14A 1 ) ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 6 4- SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. B. NBR: Aciylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Field quality -control test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on -site testing specified in Part 3. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. i- 898-14B CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120-1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES CONT. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Set sleeves in cast -in -place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 2. General Cable Corporation. 3. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 4. Southwire Company. B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN. D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 2. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 3. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 4. Tyco Electronics Corp. E. Description: Factory -fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. 2.2 SLEEVES FOR CABLES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THYN, single conductors in raceway. 898-14A CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES CONT. D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on -Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in , raceway. F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on -Grade, and Underground: Type THHN- THWN, single conductors in raceway. H. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. I. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless -steel, wire -mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. J. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. K. Class 2 Control Circuits: Power -limited tray cable, in cable tray. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." F. Identify and color -code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. y 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack. 898-14A CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 3 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES CONT. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements. a. Insert, in separate subparagraphs, critical equipment and services to be tested. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. C. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 16120 898-14A CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 4 t SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures" for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing. C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. G. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit. H. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 1. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged -cover enclosures, and cabinets. B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Custom enclosures and cabinets. 2. For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following: a. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. b. Frame and cover design. C. Grounding details. d. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling -in and lifting irons. e. Joint details. 898-14B RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-1 ICAI.r� W A 16 A1VlJ MJAZ3. UUIN 1. C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: i 1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with common supports... 3. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 4. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency. E. Source quality -control test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Alflex Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 4. Electri-Flex Co. 5. Maverick Tube Corporation. 6. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 7. Wheatland Tube Company. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5. D. IMC: ANSI C80.6. E. PVC -Coated Steel Conduit: PVC -coated rigid steel conduit. 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum. F. EMT: ANSI C80.3. G. FMC: Zinc -coated steel. H. LFMC; Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. I. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.__ 898-14A RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 2 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 2. Fittings for EMT: Steel, compression type. 3. Coating for Fittings for PVC -Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded j oints. j J. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following; 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. ElecSYS, Inc. 8. Electri-Flex Co. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 11. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation. B. ENT: NEMA TC 13. C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated. D. LFNC: UL 1660. E. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. F. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B. 2.3 OPTICAL FIBER/COMMUNICATIONS CABLE RACEWAY AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: _. 1. Arnco Corporation. 2. Endot Industries Inc. 3. IPEX Inc. 4. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. B. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible type, approved for plenum installation. 2.4 METAL WIItEWAYS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffinan. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. 898-14A RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 3 r_-ik,r W lid 1 J L11V1J I3lJAr,J l.V1N I. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type. 7 E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Crouse -Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 3. Hoffman. 4. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 6. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 7. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 8. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 9. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary. B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. C. Cast -Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover. D. Metal Floor Boxes: Sheet metal, fully adjustable, rectangular. E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. F. Cast -Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. G. Hinged -Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous -hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio -frequency -resistant paint. H. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized -steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: IMC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC. �....� 898-14A RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 4 , 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 6. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring: a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off -Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating. b. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor F-_:: for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Heavy-duty fiberglass units with polymer - concrete frame and cover, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating. C. Handholes and Pull Boxes Subject to Light -Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass - reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf vertical loading. B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes raceways in the following locations: a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet -handling units. C. Mechanical rooms. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transfonners and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 7. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air: EMT. 8. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: EMT Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: Riser -type, optical fiber/communications cable raceway. 9. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel in damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer. E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. F. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 898-14A RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 5 iCt %_nW."\Z J 1-uNIJ t3V1 n"_-0 1.V1V I. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. '! D. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." E. Arrange stub -ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor. I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. L. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. M. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. N. Expansion -Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight -run length that exceeds 25 feet. j 1. Install expansion joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. 4.e b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. C. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. ' 2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change. 898-14A RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 6 3. Install each expansion joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation. O. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. P. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw -cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Q. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. R. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct -Buried Conduit: I. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. 2. Install backfill as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub -up ducts throughout the length of the elbow. 5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete. b. For stub -ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 3.4 PROTECTION ' A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are i _.. without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. r 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 16130 898-14A RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 7 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist -locking receptacles. 3. Wall -box motion sensors. 4. Isolated -ground receptacles. 5. Snap switches and wall -box dimmers. 6. Wall -switch and exterior occupancy sensors. 7. Pendant cord -connector devices. 8. Cord and plug sets. 9. Floor service outlets, poke -through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter. C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch -circuit conductor. D. RFI: Radio -frequency interference. E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. D. Field quality -control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 898-14B WIRING DEVICES 16140-1 t__ rr aa�u �v i iv 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated a wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Receptacles for Owner -Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described in subparagraphs below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Service Outlet Assemblies: One for every 10, but no fewer than one. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). B. Isolated -Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Hubbell; CR 5253IG. b. Leviton; 53624G. C. Pass & Seymour; IG6300. 2. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. 898-14A _. WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2 W IM11.4U ur V ik'zo C.111V 1 2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES ' A. General Description: Straight blade, feed -through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. to B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; GF20. b. Pass & Seymour; 2084. C. Isolated -Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; IG5362BLS. b. Hubbell; IG5362SA. C. Leviton; 5380-IG. 2. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. 2.4 TWIST -LOCKING RECEPTACLES A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; L520R. b. Hubbell; HBL2310. B. Isolated -Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Hubbell; IG2310. b. Leviton; 2310-I6. 2. Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. 2.5 PENDANT CORD -CONNECTOR DEVICES A. Description: Matching, locking -type plug and receptacle body connector; NEMA WD 6 configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade. 1. Body: Nylon with screw -open cable -gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip- 2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire -mesh type made of high -strength galvanized -steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector. 2.6 CORD AND PLUG SETS A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. 1. Cord: Rubber -insulated, stranded -copper conductors, with Type SOW -A jacket; with green - insulated grounding conductor and equipment -rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent. 898-14A WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 3 _,` 2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable -clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. 2.7 SNAP SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; CS 1221 (single pole), CS 1222 (two pole), CS 1223 (three way), CS 1224 (four way). 2.8 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS A. Telephone Outlet: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 3560-6. b. Leviton; 40649. 2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four -pair UTP; TIA/EIA- 568-B.1; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863. 2.9 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for .Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- thick, satin -finished stainless steel 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring -loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations." B. Wet -Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather -resistant , die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. 2.10 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS A. Type: Modular, flush -type, dual -service units suitable for wiring method used. B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. C. Service Plate: Rectangular, with satin finish. D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated. E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color -coded, RJ-45 Category 5e jacks for UTP cable. 2.11 FINISHES A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. i 898-14A __ ` WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 4 W IMINU 1Jl�' v ll tea, l.V1V 1. 2. Isolated -Ground Receptacles: As specified above, with orange triangle on face. PART 3-EXECUTION I " 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or tenninated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. C. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding -head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around tenninal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal -to -metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.__ 2. Install hospital -grade receptacles in patient -care areas with the ground pin or neutral blade at the top. t 898-14A WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 5 !T 11\ll\V -- 1 AVLV VVlI 1 F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra -deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. ` G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black -filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. I . Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 16140 i 898-14A e WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 6 1, SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL F! 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions , and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY j A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded -case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 4. Enclosures. i 1.3 DEFINITIONS .._ A. NC: Normally closed. B. NO: Normally open. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. L. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. Ll 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. 6. Include time -current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. D. Field quality -control reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. 898-14B ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410-1 1 I_" E. Manufacturer's field service report. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 2. Time -current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on -site testing. B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation. conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. under the following 104 deg F. B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. 898-14A ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 2 r11V11LV3r11J 3wlll.111✓3 A1V1J 1111'%1..UlI I5111;AltrM3 1.V1V 1. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. q 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type. l n PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. D. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NOINC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. 6. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 7. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 8. Service -Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 9. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 120-V ac. 2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower I rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. 898-14A ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 3 Ll\�LVULL V 1111 �11LU 1.11\U �11t�V11 L1W11111/1\U �Vl\ 1 C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ae, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. D. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. 5. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 6. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 7. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 120-V ac. 2.3 MOLDED -CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. C. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field -replaceable rating plug, nns sensing, with the following field -adjustable settings:., 1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short -time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short -time time adjustments. 4. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay, and IZt response. D. Ground -Fault, Circuit -Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two -pole configurations with Class A ground -fault protection (6-mA trip). E. Ground -Fault, Equipment -Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground -fault protection (30-mA trip). F. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high -intensity discharge lighting circuits. 4. Ground -Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self -powered type with mechanical ground -fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time -delay settings, push -to -test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero -sequence current transformer/sensor. 5. Communication Capability: Circuit -breaker -mounted communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system, specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control." 6. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil -clearing contact. 898-14A ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 4 J✓1Vl:LU�J✓L �Wlll.til✓J Ei1VL 1.11Cl.Ull IilCCH1i1;1tJ l.U1V 1. r} 7. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay. 8. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit - breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit -breaker contacts. 9. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped. 10. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations. 11. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self -powered;. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install individual wall -mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. C. Install fuses in fusible devices. D. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 1. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated -plastic nameplate. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance ' Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. j 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: 898-14A ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 5 j t L"1V L.LlJ L7L'L U VV it VLLliU Al, LJ l xx LINj-Z- 1J..i1\U �WxI 1. a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable ' scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. C. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. -= 4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field -adjustable circuit -breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 16 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination". END OF SECTION 16410 898-14A ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 6 SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch -circuit panelboards. 3. Electronic -grade panelboards. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating. B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time -current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log -log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. D. Field Quality -Control Reports: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. 898-14B PANELBOARDS 16442-1 E. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 1 2. Time -current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on -site testing. B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Comply with NEMA PB 1. F. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation. B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F to plus 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet. 898-14A PANELBOARDS 16442 - 2 1.8 COORDINATION re A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. E Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor - bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. 1.9 WARRANTY j A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra iaterials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types: Two spares for each panelboard. 3. r...� PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface -mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. C. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. e. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 5.-' 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface -mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush -mounted fronts, overlap box. f1 I 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged t...1 trim cover. 4. Skirt for Surface -Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 6. Finishes: 898-14A PANELBOARDS 16442 - 3 a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished iminediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two -coat, baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. C. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components. 7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover. C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom. D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch -circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. 3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch -circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from box. 4. Extra -Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as suitable for nonlinear loads. 5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections. E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus -Configured Terminators: Compression type. 4. Feed -Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 6. Gutter -Tap Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 7. Extra -Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra -capacity neutral bus. F PAPA G In Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating current available at terminals. DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. C. Doors: Secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike. 898-14A PANELBOARDS 16442 - 4 rtuv�t,nvr�t�t» �,vlv i . D. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only. 2.3 2.4 E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt -on circuit breakers. F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt -on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive -locking device requires mechanical release for removal. G. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard. 1. Internal Control -Power Source: Control -power transformer, with fused primary and secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection. LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH -CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch -circuit type. C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only. D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. E. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard. 1. Internal Control -Power Source: Control -power transformer, with fused primary and secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection. F. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. ELECTRONIC -GRADE PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: l . Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 5. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB l; with factory -installed, integral TVSS; labeled by an NRTL for compliance with UL 67 after installing TVSS. C. Doors: Secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. D. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on thermal -magnetic circuit breakers. E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on thennal-magnetic circuit breakers. 898-14A PANELBOARDS {4 16442 - 5 F. Buses: 1. Copper phase and neutral buses; 200 percent capacity neutral bus and lugs. 2. Copper equipment and isolated ground buses. 2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler -Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field -replaceable rating plug or field- replicable electronic trip; and the following field -adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short -time pickup levels. C. Long- and short -time time adjustments. d. Ground -fault pickup level, time delay, and IZt response. 2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two -pole configurations with Class A ground -fault protection (6-mA trip). 3. Ground -Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground -fault protection (30-mA trip). 4. Arc -Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single -pole configuration. 5. Molded -Case Circuit -Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. C. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high -intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Ground -Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time -delay settings, push -to -test feature, and ground -fault indicator. e. Communication Capability: Integral communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control." f. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage. g. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field - adjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay. h. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit -breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit -breaker contacts. i. Alarm Switch: Single -pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit breaker trips. j. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit. k. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit -breaker handle in on or off position. 1. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit -breaker handle in on position. 898-14A _, PANELBOARDS 16442 - 6 rtuvnL,nvruu�o �.vivi. 2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES [ A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base. 2. For panelboards, install epoxy -coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards. 5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard. C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards. D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." E. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. F. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. G. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field -adjustable, circuit -breaker trip ranges. H. Install filler plates in unused spaces. 898-14A PANELBOARDS 16442 - 7 I. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade. J. Arrange conductors in utters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing g g load balancing. K. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section"Electrical Identification." D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, _ and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion, C. Instruments and Equipment: 1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 898-14A ., PANELBOARDS 16442 - 8 rtuvni,Dyr-u�L� �,viv i. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards �_ 4 included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. �x 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field -adjustable circuit -breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 16 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination." C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and snake circuit changes. 1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load -balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. 4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 16442 898-14A PANELBOARDS 16442 - 9 �_ _ SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall -box dimmers for incandescent lamps. 2. Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors. 3. Division 16 Section "Stage Lighting" for theatrical lighting fixtures and their controls. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BF: Ballast factor. B. CCT: Correlated color temperature. C. CRI: Color -rendering index. D. HID: High -intensity discharge. E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Ballast, including BF. 4. Energy -efficiency data. 5. Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air -handling lighting fixtures. Furnish data required in "Submittals" Article in Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." 898-14B INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511-1 6. Sound Performance Data: For air -handling lighting fixtures. Indicate sound power level and sound transmission class in test reports certified according to standards specified in 4 Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." 7. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy -efficiency data for lamps. 8. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer. b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples: For each lighting fixture indicated in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each Sample shall include the following: 1. Lamps and ballasts, installed. 2. Cords and plugs. 3. Pendant support system. D. Installation instructions. E. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Lighting fixtures. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches of the plane of the luminaires. 4. Ceiling -mounted projectors. 5. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. 6. Other items in finished ceiling including the following: a. Air outlets and inlets. b. Speakers. C. Sprinklers. d. Smoke and fire detectors. e. Occupancy sensors. f. Access panels. 9. 7. Perimeter moldings. F. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures. G. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer -controlled fixtures, from manufacturer. H. Field quality -control reports. 898-14A INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 2 I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes. J. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NFPA 70. E. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global. F. Mockups: Provide interior lighting fixtures for room or module mockups, complete with power and control connections. 1. Obtain Architect's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations. 2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 3. Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of batterypowered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years. 2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self -Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years. 898-14A INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 3 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. L Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 3. Fluorescent -fixture -mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every 20 emergency lighting unit. 4. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 5. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A. C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B. E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. H. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. b. UV stabilized. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. I. Factory -Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels 4 shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: j a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. 898-14A INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 4 b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. C. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires. d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires. J. Electromagnetic -Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter. 2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts: 1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. 2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level control is indicated. 4. Sound Rating: Class A. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher. 8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 9. BF: 0.88 or higher. 10. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher. 1.1. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. B. luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed -start ballasts. C. Electronic Programmed -Start Ballasts for T8 Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following: 1. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. D. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high -power factor, Class P, and having automatic -reset thermal protection. 1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label. E. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements and bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in the field. F. Ballasts for Low -Temperature Environments: 1. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types. 2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with indicated lamp types. G. Ballasts for Residential Applications: Fixtures designated as "Residential" may use low -power - factor electronic ballasts having a Class B sound rating and total harmonic distortion of approximately 30 percent. 898-14A INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 5 2.4 MR H. Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic -Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio -frequency interference for consumer equipment. I. Ballasts for Dimmer -Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type. 1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens. 2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and l . lamp type indicated. 4. Control: Coordinate wiring from ballast to control device to ensure that the ballast, controller, and connecting wiring are compatible. J. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type. 1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off. a. High -Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. b. Low -Level Operation: 30 percent of rated lamp lumens. 2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and lamp type indicated. K. Ballasts for Tri-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type. 1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off. a. High -Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. b. Low -Level Operation: 30 and 60 percent of rated lamp lumens. 2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific tri-level control system and lamp type indicated. BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Description: Electronic -programmed rapid -start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 1. Lamp end -of -life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: Class A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher. 10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio -frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery -inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery -inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 898-14A INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 6 �_ 4 2. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. 3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. a. Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and 5 demonstrates unit operability. b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel -cadmium type. 5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant -current type with sealed power transfer relay. 6. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory -installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. 7. Integral Self -Test: Factory -installed electronic device automatically initiates code -required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. B. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery -inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more fluorescent lamps, remote mounted from lighting fixture. Comply with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Connect unswitched circuit to battery -inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. 2. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp in a remote fixture continuously. 3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel -cadmium type. 4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant -current type. 5. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. 6. Test Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. 7. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 8. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory -installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. 9. Integral Self -Test: Factory -installed electronic device automatically initiates code -required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. 2.6 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal -Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ballast Circuit: Constant -wattage autotransformer or regulating high -power -factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F for single -lamp ballasts. 3. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. 4. Open -circuit operation that will not reduce average life. 5. Low -Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers` standard epoxy -encapsulated models designed to minimize audible fixture noise. B. Electronic Ballast for Metal. -Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg F for single -lamp ballasts. 2. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 deg F. 3. Lamp end -of -life detection and shutdown circuit. 4. Sound Rating: Class A. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 898-14A INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 7 2.7 0*-' 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less. 8. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher. 9. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio -frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 10. Protection: Class P thermal cutout. 11. Continuous Dimming Ballast: Dimming range shall be from 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens without flicker. a. Ballast Input Watts: Reduced to a maximum of 50 percent of normal at lowest dimming setting.__, C. High -Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type, with solid-state igniter/starter. Igniter/starter shall have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C. 1. Instant -Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, factory installed within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to 150 W. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F. QUARTZ LAMP LIGHTING CONTROLLER A. General Requirements for Controllers: Factory installed by lighting fixture manufacturer. Comply with UL 1598. B. Standby (Quartz Restrike): Automatically switches quartz lamp on when a HID lamp in the fixture is initially energized and during the HID lamp restrike period after brief power outages. C. Connections: Designed for a single branch -circuit connection. D. Switching Off. Automatically switches quartz lamp off when HID lamp strikes. E. Switching Off. Automatically switches quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent light output. EXIT SIGNS A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, 1A and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. i B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Self -Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel -cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. ; C. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. d. Test Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of nonnal power and demonstrates unit operability. e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. f. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory -installed infrared receiver ? 898-14A INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 8 i in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. g. Integral Self -Test: Factory -installed electronic device automatically initiates code - required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. 2.9 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, lead -acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power -supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep -discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 4. Test Push Button: Push -to -test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. 5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Nonnal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 6. Wire Guard: Heavy -chrome -plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. 7. Integral Time -Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is restored after an outage. 8. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory -installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. 9. Integral Self -Test: Factory -installed electronic device automatically initiates code -required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. 2.10 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. T8 rapid -start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. B. T8 rapid -start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts unless otherwise indicated. 1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). 2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum). 3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). 4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum). 6. 57 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum). 7. 70 W: T4, triple tube, rated 5200 initial lumens (minimum). 2.11 HID LAMPS _ A. Metal -Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K. 898-14A INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 9 B. Pulse -Start, Metal -Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K. 2.12 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle -iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single -Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Twin -Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc -coated steel, 12 gage. E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage. F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium -plated, threaded steel rod. G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking -type plug. 2.13 RETROFIT KITS FOR FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Reflector Kit: UL 1598, Type I. Suitable for two- to four -lamp, surface -mounted or recessed lighting fixtures by improving reflectivity of fixture surfaces. B. Ballast and Lamp Change Kit: UL 1598, Type II. Suitable for changing existing ballast, lamps, and sockets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures: 1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire. B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall. C. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast and luminaire. D. Lay -in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element. 1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners. 2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application. 898-14A INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 10 j r 3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. 4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3. E. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem -Mounted, Single -Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin -stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure. F. Air -Handling Lighting Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment. G. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. B. Verify that self -luminous exit signs are installed according to their listing and the requirements in NFPA 101. C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE A. Burn -in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn -in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months provide on -site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires Provide up to two visits to Project during other -than -normal Some of this work may be required after dark. 1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect. END OF SECTION 16511 of date of Substantial Completion, to suit actual occupied conditions. occupancy hours for this purpose. 898-14A INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 11 PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK